Home

manual - mpsge

1. gnuplot exportselection off egnuplot fastrotate on egnuplot ctrlq off Xlib The xlib terminal driver supports the X11 Windows System It generates gnuplot_x11 commands but sends them to the output file specified by set output lt filename gt set term x11 is equivalent to set output lenuplot_x11 noevents set term xlib xlib takes the same set of options as x11 Part V Bugs Please e mail bug reports to the gnuplot bugs mailing list or upload the report to the gnuplot web site on SourceForge Please give complete information on the version of gnuplot you are using and if possible a test script that demonstrates the bug See seeking assistance p 17 Known limitations Floating point exceptions floating point number too large small divide by zero etc may occasionally be generated by user defined functions Some of the demos in particular may cause numbers to exceed the floating point range Whether the system ignores such exceptions in which case gnuplot labels the corresponding point as undefined or aborts gnuplot depends on the compiler runtime environment The gamma bessel and erf functions do not work for complex arguments Coordinates specified as time wrap at 24 hours The nohidden3d option that is supposed to exempt individual plots from the global property set hidden3d does not work for parametric curves X11 terminal It is difficult to select UTF 8 fonts The progr
2. f0000 specifies pure red If omitted the background is transparent The size option expects two lenghts lt x gt and lt y gt as the canvas size The default size of the canvas is 12 5cm x 8 75cm The scale option works similar to the size option but expects scaling factors lt x gt and lt y gt instead of lengths The plotsize option permits setting the size of the plot area instead of the canvas size which is the usual gnuplot behaviour Using this option may lead to slightly asymmetric tic lengths Like originreset this option may not lead to convenient results if used with multiplots or pm3d plots An alternative approach is to set all margins to zero and to use the noclip option The plot area has then the dimensions of the given canvas sizes The charsize option expects the average horizontal and vertical size of the used font Look at the generated style file for an example of how to use it from within your TeX document fontscale or textscale expects a scaling factor as a parameter All texts in the plot are scaled by this factor then The options tex latex and context choose the TeX output format LaTeX is the default To load the style file put the according line at the beginning of your document input gnuplot lua tikz tex for plain TeX usepackage gnuplot lua tikz for LaTeX usemodule gnuplot lua tikz for ConTeXt createstyle
3. Test This command graphically tests or presents terminal and palette capabilities Syntax test terminal palette rgblrbg grb gbr brg bgr test or test terminal creates a display of line and point styles and other useful things appropriate for and supported by the terminal you are just using test palette plots profiles of R z G z B z where 0 lt z lt 1 These are the RGB components of the current color palette It also plots the apparent net intensity as calculated using NTSC coefficients to map RGB onto a grayscale The optional parameter a permutation of letters rgb determines the sequence in which the r g b profiles are drawn Undefine Clear one or more previously defined user variables This is useful in order to reset the state of a script containing an initialization test A variable name can contain the wildcard character as last character If the wildcard character is found all variables with names that begin with the prefix preceding the wildcard will be removed This is useful to remove several variables sharing a common prefix Note that the wildcard character is only allowed at the end of the variable name Specifying the wildcard character as sole argument to undefine has no effect Example undefine foo fool foo2 if exists foo load initialize gp bar 1 bari 2 bar2 3 undefine bar removes all three variables Unset Options set using the set command may be returned to their default st
4. 2 will display argc 7 pO abcd p1 1 2 p2 p3 quoted p4 p5 p6 2 p7 xx NOTE there is a clash in syntax with the datafile using callback operator Use n or column n to access column n from a datafile inside a called datafile plot Clear The clear command erases the current screen or output device as specified by set output This usually generates a formfeed on hardcopy devices Use set terminal to set the device type For some terminals clear erases only the portion of the plotting surface defined by set size so for these it can be used in conjunction with set multiplot to create an inset Example set multiplot plot sin x set origin 0 5 0 set size 0 4 0 4 clear plot cos x unset multiplot Please see set multiplot p 128 set size p 145 and set origin p 133 for details of these commands 5 Do Syntax do for lt iteration spec gt lt commands gt lt commands gt Execute a sequence of commands multiple times The commands must be enclosed in curly brackets and the opening must be on the same line as the do keyword This command cannot be used with old style un bracketed if else statements See if p 70 For examples of iteration specifiers see iteration p 71 Example set multiplot layout 2 2 do for name in A B C D 4 filename name dat set title sprintf Condition s name plot filename title name unset multiplot 0 Evaluate The evaluat
5. Backwards compatibility 20 New smoothing algorithms e 20 New time date handlingl ee 20 gy Aptis Da lin Ds eth Ae E Se cee teat a ot a eH At tato ado e 20 21 21 22 22 22 23 24 25 25 Enco s aaa a A a A ia AA e 26 Elliptic integtalsji oc aos oe dd E EMER A AA 28 Random number generator 0 e 28 sue ke waht aie ahha a a a BR a Hh Gk E ae UO oe Beets a kB 28 CONTENTS Gnuplot defined variables ee User defined variables and functions onts Cairo pdfcairo pngcairo epscairo wxt terminals ooo Gd png gif jpeg terminals ee Postscript also encapsulated postscript eps ooo a Glossary Glossary Sh Giese hae oat ated atau te cere 1 ah hy ah Se Aen SR IVR ete ie ari ace Ya SEERNE heya ns spencer EEEE aa Linecolor variable mar als rr a ed A ELSES Seat a nae heeee sg de dea Weald Gee eR A AAA A A a ee eT eer ee eee ee een rere Serer rere a4 ih Gone eee hee oes one anes d ee eee aes aA Plotting UN tart up initialization UN tring constants and string variables rr a Tere dra Aa Bok BS E yntax daa a eo a a eee aaa ae Gee eo Time Date data I Plotting styles Boxerrorbars 28 29 29 30 30 31 32 32 32 32 33 33 34 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 CONTENTS 4 44 45 45 46 47 a7 48 48 49 50 50 50
6. Examples Use the third column of data to assign colors to individual points plot data using 1 2 3 with points lc variable A single data file may contain multiple sets of data separated by two blank lines Each data set is assigned as index value see index that can be retrieved via the using specifier column 2 See pseudocolumns This example uses to value in column 2 to draw each data set in a different line color plot data using 1 2 column 2 with lines lc variable Rgbcolor variable You can assign a separate color for each data point line segment or label in your plot lc rgbcolor variable tells the program to read RGB color information for each line in the data file This requires a corresponding additional column in the using specifier The extra column is interpreted as a 24 bit packed RGB triple If the value is provided directly in the data file it is easiest to give it as a hexidecimal value see rgbcolor p 34 Alternatively the using specifier can contain an expression that evaluates to a 24 bit RGB color as in the example below Text colors are similarly set using tc rgbcolor variable Example x Place colored points in 3D at the x y z coordinates corresponding to their red green and blue components rgb r g b 65536 int r 256 int g int b splot data using 1 2 3 rgb 1 2 3 with points lc rgb variable Linestyles vs linetypes
7. Lines can have additional properties such as linewidth You can associate these various properties as well as equivalent properties for point symbols into user defined linestyles using the command set style line Once you have defined a linestyle you can use it in a plot command to control the appearance of one or more plot elements Whereas linetypes are permanent they last until you explicitly redefine them linestyles are temporary They only last until the next reset of the graphics state Examples define a new line style with terminal independent color cyan linewidth 3 and associated point type 6 a circle with a dot in it set style line 5 1t rgb cyan lw 3 pt 6 plot sin x with linespoints ls 5 user defined line style 5 Mouse input Many terminals allow interaction with the current plot using the mouse Some also support the definition of hotkeys to activate pre defined functions by hitting a single key while the mouse focus is in the active plot window It is even possible to combine mouse input with batch command scripts by invoking the command pause mouse and then using the mouse variables returned by mouse clicking as parameters for subsequent scripted actions See bind p and mouse variables p 38 See also the command set mouse p 127 Bind Syntax bind allwindows lt key sequence gt lt gnuplot commands gt bind lt key sequence gt reset bind The bind allows defining or redefi
8. and nobox The default lt linetype gt is the same as that used for the plot borders Entering set key default returns the key to its default configuration The key is drawn as a sequence of lines with one plot described on each line On the right hand side or the left hand side if reverse is selected of each line is a representation that attempts to mimic the way the curve is plotted On the other side of each line is the text description the line title obtained from the plot command The lines are vertically arranged so that an imaginary straight line divides the left and right hand sides of the key It is the coordinates of the top of this line that are specified with the set key command In a plot only the x and y coordinates are used to specify the line position For a splot x y and z are all used as a 3D location mapped using the same mapping as the graph itself to form the required 2D screen position of the imaginary line When using the TeX or other terminals where formatting information is embedded in the string gnuplot can only estimate the correctly exact width of the string for key positioning If the key is to be positioned at the left it may be convenient to use the combination set key left Left reverse If splot is being used to draw contours the contour labels will be listed in the key If the alignment of these labels is poor or a different number of decimal places is desired the label format can be specified See set c
9. using 1 2 3 4 with pm3d lc rgb variable Another drawing algorithm which would draw quadrangles around a given node by taking corners from averaged x y coordinates of its surrounding 4 nodes while using node s color could be implemented in the future This is already done for drawing images 2D grids via image and rgbimage styles Notice that ranges of z values and color values for surfaces are adjustable independently by set zrange set cbrange as well as set log for z or cb Maps can be adjusted by the cb axis only see also set view map p and set colorbox p L05 Hidden3d The option set pm3d hidden3d draws the bounding lines of each quadrangle at the same time that the quadrangle itself is drawn Normally it is used in conjunction with the depthorder option to achieve an approximation to true hidden line removal This is far more efficient than using the command set hidden3d The command takes an optional linestyle controlling the appearance of the bounding lines If the linestyle parameter is negative or omitted then the line properties given in the plot command are used Example of recommended usage set pm3d at s hidden3d depthorder unset hidden3d unset surf splot x x y y linecolor rgb black linewidth 0 5 Interpolate The option interpolate m n will interpolate grid points into a finer mesh and color each quadrangle appropriately For data files this will smoothen the color surface and enhance spikes in
10. where the option can be one of the following closed above below x1 x2 y1 y2 r lt a gt xy lt x gt lt y gt The first variant closed treats the curve itself as a closed polygon This is the default if there are two columns of input data The second variant is to fill the area between the curve and a given axis a horizontal or vertical line or a point filledcurves closed just filled closed curve filledcurves xi X1 axis filledcurves x2 X2 axis etc for yl and y2 axes filledcurves y1 0 line y 0 at y1 axis ie parallel to x1 axis filledcurves y2 42 line y 42 at y2 axis ie parallel to x2 etc filledcurves xy 10 20 point 10 20 of x1 y1 axes arc like shape filledcurves above r 1 5 the area of a polar plot outside radius 1 5 The third variant requires three columns of input data the x coordinate and two y coordinates corresponding to two curves sampled at the same set of x coordinates the area between the two curves is filled This is the default if there are three or more columns of input data 3 columns x yl y2 Example of filling the area between two input curves fill between curves demo plot data using 1 2 3 with filledcurves The above and below options apply both to commands of the form filledcurves above x1 x2ly1 y2 r lt val gt and to commands of the form using 1 2 3 with filledcurves below In either case the option limits the filled ar
11. 192 start start up starting values startup 25 39 statistical overview statistics 173 stats 19 20 173 steps 50 57 strcol strftime string operators stringcolumn strings strlen strptime strstrt style styles 1 146 148 139 substitution substr substring summation sun 219 svg 219 svga svgalib syntax 17 41 115 120 156 160 system 27 174 table tan tandy 60dpi tanh tc 34 tek40 tek410x term terminal terminals 153 termoption ternary test texdraw 220 text 12 2 POD 223 text menu 224 text menu 226 textcolor tgif te tics 153 ticscale ticslevel tikz time time specifiers time date 42 155 timecolumn timefmt 23 89 013 023 E 159 253 timestamp 154 240 tips title 5 159 159 tkcanvas tm hour tm mday tm min tm mon 27 tm sec tm wday tm yday tm year tmargin 156 tpic 222 trange 156 transparency 54 transparent 149 unary undefine 174 unique unset 174 update urange 156 user defined user defined using 23 P6 B0 E3 E EA EI 68 I TT UTF 8 valid 27 value 2 ae SET variable 44 variables 28 E vectors o E Sl E NI Co RE view 157 165 169 voigt vrange 157 vttek VWS vx384 wgnuplot ini 225 wgnuplot mnu 225 while 175 wi
12. In fact you can use a constant expression for the column number provided it doesn t start with an opening parenthesis constructs like using O complicated expression can be used The crucial point is that the expression is evaluated once if it doesn t start with a left parenthesis or once for each data point read if it does If timeseries data are being used the time can span multiple columns The starting column should be specified Note that the spaces within the time must be included when calculating starting columns for s other data E g if the first element on a line is a time with an embedded space the y value should be specified as column three It should be noted that plot file plot file using 1 2 and plot file using 1 2 can be subtly different 1 if file has some lines with one column and some with two the first will invent x values when they are missing the second will quietly ignore the lines with one column and the third will store an undefined value for lines with one point so that in a plot with lines no line joins points across the bad point 2 if a line contains text at the first column the first will abort the plot on an error but the second and third should quietly skip the garbage In fact it is often possible to plot a file with lots of lines of garbage at the top simply by specifying plot file using 1 2 However if you want to leave text in your data files it is safer
13. See fit multi branch p 68 Environment variables The environment variables must be defined before gnuplot is executed how to do so depends on your operating system FIT_LOG changes the name and or path of the file to which the fit log will be written from the default of fit log in the working directory The default value can be overwritten using the command set fit logfile FIT_SCRIPT specifies a command that may be executed after an user interrupt The default is replot but a plot or load command may be useful to display a plot customized to highlight the progress of the fit Multi branch In multi branch fitting multiple data sets can be simultaneously fit with functions of one independent variable having common parameters by minimizing the total WSSR The function and parameters branch for each data set are selected by using a pseudo variable e g either the dataline number a column index of 1 or the datafile index 2 as the second independent variable Example Given two exponential decays of the form z f x each describing a different data set but having a common decay time estimate the values of the parameters If the datafile has the format x z s then f x y y 0 axexp x tau brexp x tau fit f x y datafile using 1 2 2 3 via a b tau For a more complicated example see the file hexa fnc used by the fit dem demo Appropriate weighting may be required since unit weights ma
14. The PostScript language is a very complex language far too complex to describe in any detail in this document Nevertheless there are some things in a PostScript file written by gnuplot that can be changed without risk of introducing fatal errors into the file For example the PostScript statement Color true def written into the file in response to the command set terminal postscript color may be altered in an obvious way to generate a black and white version of a plot Similarly line colors text colors line weights and symbol sizes can also be altered in straight forward ways Text titles and labels can be edited to correct misspellings or to change fonts Anything can be repositioned and of course anything can be added or deleted but modifications such as these may require deeper knowledge of the PostScript language The organization of a PostScript file written by gnuplot is discussed in the text file ps_file doc in the docs ps subdirectory of the gnuplot source distribution Postscript fontfile The fontfile or fontfile add option takes one file name as argument and encapsulates this file into the postscript output in order to make this font available for text elements labels tic marks titles etc The fontfile delete option also takes one file name as argument It deletes this file name from the list of encapsulated files The postscript terminal understands some font file formats Type 1 fonts in ASCII file forma
15. This plots y x with the title x plot x This plots x squared with title x72 and file data 1 with title measured data plot x 2 title x72 data 1 t measured data This puts an untitled circular border around a polar graph set polar plot my_function t 1 notitle Plot multiple columns of data each of which contains its own title in the file plot for i 1 4 data using i title columnhead With Functions and data may be displayed in one of a large number of styles The with keyword provides the means of selection Syntax with lt style gt linestyle ls lt line_style gt linetype lt lt line_type gt linewidth lw lt line_width gt linecolor lc lt colorspec gt pointtype pt lt point_type gt pointsize ps lt point_size gt fill fs lt fillstyle gt nohidden3d nocontours nosurface palette where lt style gt is one of lines dots steps errorbars xerrorbar xyerrorlines points impulses fsteps errorlines xerrorlines yerrorbars linespoints labels histeps financebars xyerrorbars yerrorlines vectors or boxes candlesticks image circles boxerrorbars filledcurves rgbimage ellipses boxxyerrorbars histograms rgbalpha pm3d boxplot The first group of styles have associated line point and text properties The second group of styles also have fill properties See fillstyle p 148 Some styles have further sub styles See plotting styles p for deta
16. Various mousing operations go here set title Zoomed in view set term post set output zoom ps refresh Replot The replot command without arguments repeats the last plot or splot command This can be useful for viewing a plot with different set options or when generating the same plot for several devices Arguments specified after a replot command will be added onto the last plot or splot command with an implied separator before it is repeated replot accepts the same arguments as the plot and splot commands except that ranges cannot be specified Thus you can use replot to plot a function against the second axes if the previous command was plot but not if it was splot N B use of plot 3 replot is not recommended because it will require that you type in the data all over again In most cases you can use the refresh command instead which will redraw the plot using the data previously read in Note that replot does not work in multiplot mode since it reproduces only the last plot rather than the entire screen See also command line editing p for ways to edit the last plot p splot p 169 command See also show plot p 134 to show the whole current plotting command and the possibility to copy it into the history p 70 E Reread The reread command causes the current gnuplot command file as specified by a load command or on the command line to be reset to its starting
17. color landscape portrait small big size lt xsize gt lt ysize gt metric inches pointsmax lt max_points gt solid dashed font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt textnormal textspecial texthidden textrigid thickness linewidth lt units gt depth lt layer gt version lt number gt monochrome and color determine whether the picture is black and white or color small and big produce a 5x3 or 8x5 inch graph in the default landscape mode and 3x5 or 5x8 inches in portrait mode size sets overrides the size of the drawing area to lt xsize gt lt ysize gt in units of inches or centimeters depending on the inches or metric setting in effect The latter settings is also used as default units for editing with xfig pointsmax lt max_points gt sets the maximum number of points per polyline solid inhibits automatic usage of dashed lines when solid linestyles are used up which otherwise occurs font sets the text font face to lt fontname gt and its size to lt fontsize gt points textnormal resets the text flags and selects postscript fonts textspecial sets the text flags for LaTeX specials texthidden sets the hidden flag and textrigid the rigid flag depth sets the default depth layer for all lines and text The default depth is 10 to leave room for adding material with xfig on top of the plot version sets the format version of the generated fig output Currently only versions 3 1 and 3 2 are
18. landscape 3 plots in both directions Tikz This driver creates output for use with the TikZ package of graphics macros in TeX It is currently imple mented via an external lua script and set term tikz is a short form of the command set term lua tikz See term lua p 200 for more information Use the command set term tikz help to print terminal options Tkcanvas This terminal driver generates Tk canvas widget commands based on Tcl Tk default or Perl To use it rebuild gnuplot after uncommenting or inserting the appropriate line in term h then gnuplot gt set term tkcanvas perltk interactive gnuplot gt set output plot file After invoking wish execute the following sequence of Tcl Tk commands source plot file canvas c pack c gnuplot c Or for Perl Tk use a program like this use Tk my top MainWindow gt new my c top gt Canvas gt pack my gnuplot do plot pl gnuplot gt c MainLoop The code generated by gnuplot creates a procedure called gnuplot that takes the name of a canvas as its argument When the procedure is called it clears the canvas finds the size of the canvas and draws the plot in it scaled to fit For 2 dimensional plotting plot two additional procedures are defined gnuplot_plotarea will return a list containing the borders of the plotting area xleft xright ytop ybot in canvas screen coordinates while the ranges of the two axes
19. lt fontsize gt is the size of the font in PostScript points and lt title gt is the title for the GnuTerm window Defaults are new monochrome dashed Helvetica 14pt Examples set term next default set term next 22 set term next color Times Roman 14 set term next color Helvetica 12 title MyPlot set term next old Pointsizes may be changed with set linestyle Openstep next Several options may be set in the openstep next driver Syntax set terminal openstep lt mode gt lt type gt lt color gt lt dashed gt lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt title lt newtitle gt where lt mode gt is default which sets all options to their defaults lt type gt is either new or old where old invokes the old single window lt color gt is either color or monochrome lt dashed gt is either solid or dashed lt fontname gt is the name of a valid PostScript font lt fontsize gt is the size of the font in PostScript points and lt title gt is the title for the GnuTerm window Defaults are new monochrome dashed Helvetica 14pt Examples set term openstep default set term openstep 22 set term openstep color Times Roman 14 set term openstep color Helvetica 12 title MyPlot set term openstep old Pointsizes may be changed with set linestyle Pbm Syntax set terminal pbm lt fontsize gt lt mode gt size lt x gt lt y gt where lt fontsize gt is small medium or la
20. monochrome color lt font gt lt fontsize gt lt xsize gt lt ysize gt lt linewidth gt where the fontsize and linewidth are specified in points and the sizes in inches The defaults are monochrome SwitzerlandLight 22 8 2 10 and 1 2 Debug This terminal is provided to allow for the debugging of gnuplot It is likely to be of use only for users who are modifying the source code Dumb The dumb terminal driver plots into a text block using ascii characters It has an optional size specification and a trailing linefeed flag Syntax set terminal dumb size lt xchars gt lt ychars gt no feed no enhanced where lt xchars gt and lt ychars gt set the size of the text block The default is 79 by 24 The last newline is printed only if feed is enabled Example set term dumb size 60 15 plot 5 6 5 sin x with impulse I A A A A 0 8 11 l sin x 0 6 I 1111 ee 0 4 I1111l 11111111 0 2 1111111 SS O AAA A A A A A A A 0 2 MCE TIAA 11 IDE d 0 At LETTE 1 IIIIIIIII 0 6 1111111 IIIIIII 0 8 1 111 41 11 1 4 ps pe ii Pp dt 4 2 0 2 4 6 Dxf The dxf terminal driver creates pictures that can be imported into AutoCad Release 10 x It has no options of its own but some features of its plots may be modified by other means The default size is 120x80 AutoCad units which can be changed by set
21. set style line lt n gt lt linestyle gt If gnuplot was built with the support of objects then the following options are also available Syntax set style rectangle lt object options gt lt linestyle gt lt fillstyle gt set style circle radius lt size gt set style ellipse size lt size gt units xylxxlyy Set style arrow Each terminal has a default set of arrow and point types which can be seen by using the command test set style arrow defines a set of arrow types and widths and point types and sizes so that you can refer to them later by an index instead of repeating all the information at each invocation Syntax set style arrow lt index gt default set style arrow lt index gt nohead head heads size lt length gt lt angle gt lt backangle gt filled empty nofilled front back 1 linestyle ls lt line_style gt linetype 1t lt line_type gt linewidth lw lt line_width unset style arrow show style arrow lt index gt is an integer that identifies the arrowstyle If default is given all arrow style parameters are set to their default values If the linestyle lt index gt already exists only the given parameters are changed while all others are preserved If not all undefined values are set to the default values Specifying nohead produces arrows drawn without a head a line segment This gives you yet another way to draw a line segment on the plot By default arrow
22. set terminal gpic x y Grass The grass terminal driver gives gnuplot capabilities to users of the GRASS geographic information system Contact grassp list moon cecer army mil for more information Pages are written to the current frame of the GRASS Graphics Window There are no options Hp2623a The hp2623a terminal driver supports the Hewlett Packard HP2623A It has no options Hp2648 The hp2648 terminal driver supports the Hewlett Packard HP2647 and HP2648 It has no options Hp500c The hp500c terminal driver supports the Hewlett Packard HP DeskJet 500c It has options for resolution and compression Syntax set terminal hp500c lt res gt lt comp gt where res can be 75 100 150 or 300 dots per inch and comp can be rle or tiff Any other inputs are replaced by the defaults which are 75 dpi and no compression Rasterization at the higher resolutions may require a large amount of memory Hpgl The hpgl driver produces HPGL output for devices like the HP7475A plotter There are two options which can be set the number of pens and eject which tells the plotter to eject a page when done The default is to use 6 pens and not to eject the page when done The international character sets ISO 8859 1 and CP850 are recognized via set encoding iso_8859_1 or set encoding cp850 sce set encoding p 111 for details Syntax set terminal hpgl lt number_of_pens gt eject The selection set terminal hpgl 8 ejec
23. solid dashed enhanced noproportional rounded butt linewidth lt LW gt dashlength lt DL gt size XX YY background lt rgb_color gt font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt fontscale lt scale gt In monochrome mode successive line types cycle through dash patterns In color mode successive line types use successive colors and only after all 8 default colors are exhausted is the dash pattern incremented solid draws all curves with solid lines overriding any dashed patterns linewidth lt factor gt multiplies all line widths by this factor dashlength lt factor gt is useful for thick lines lt fontname gt is the name of a font and lt fontsize gt is the size of the font in points The nominal size of the output image defaults to 1024x768 in arbitrary units You may specify a different nominal size using the size option Enhanced text mode tries to approximate proportional character spacing If you are using a monospaced font or don t like the approximation you can turn off this correction using the noproportional option The default settings are color dashed font Arial 12 size 1024 768 Selecting default sets all options to their default values Examples set terminal emf Times Roman Italic 12 set terminal emf color solid no pesky dashes Emxvga The emxvga emxvesa and vgal terminal drivers support PCs with SVGA vesa SVGA and VGA graphics boards respectively They are intended
24. 172800 05 12 set xdata time set timefmt d m set xtics format b d set xrange 01 12 06 12 set xtics 01 12 03 12 05 12 Both of these will produce tics Dec 1 Dec 3 and Dec 5 but in the second example the tic at Dec 3 will be unlabeled Xtics rangelimited This option limits both the auto generated axis tic labels and the corresponding plot border to the range of values actually present in the data that has been plotted Note that this is independent of the current range limits for the plot For example suppose that the data in file dat all lies in the range 2 lt y lt 4 Then the following commands will create a plot for which the left hand plot border y axis is drawn for only this portion of the total y range and only the axis tics in this region are generated I e the plot will be scaled to the full range on y but there will be a gap between 0 and 2 on the left border and another gap between 4 and 10 This style is sometimes referred to as a range frame graph set border 3 set yrange 0 10 set ytics nomirror rangelimited plot file dat Xyplane The set xyplane command adjusts the position at which the xy plane is drawn in a 3D plot The synonym set ticslevel is accepted for backwards compatibility Syntax set xyplane at lt zvalue gt set xyplane relative lt frac gt set ticslevel lt frac gt equivalent to set xyplane relative show xyplane The form set xypla
25. 21 22 23 hot black red yellow white 30 31 32 color printable on gray black blue violet yellow white 33 13 10 rainbow blue green yellow red 34 35 36 AFM hot black red yellow white A full color palette in HSV color space 3 2 2 red yellow green cyan blue magenta red Please note that even if called rgbformulae the formulas might actually determine the lt H gt lt S gt lt V gt or lt X gt lt Y gt lt Z gt or color components as usual Use positive and negative to invert the figure colors Note that it is possible to find a set of the best matching rgbformulae for any other color scheme by the command show palette fit2rgbformulae Defined Gray to rgb mapping can be manually set by use of palette defined A color gradient is defined and used to give the rgb values Such a gradient is a piecewise linear mapping from gray values in 0 1 to the RGB space 0 1 x 0 1 x 0 1 You must specify the gray values and the corresponding RGB values between which linear interpolation will be done Syntax set palette defined lt gray1 gt lt color1 gt lt grayN gt lt colorN gt lt grayX gt are gray values which are mapped to 0 1 and lt colorX gt are the corresponding rgb colors The color can be specified in three different ways lt color gt lt r gt lt g gt lt b gt lt color name gt rrggbb Either by three numbers each in 0 1 for red green and blue
26. Cgm width All distances in the CGM file are in abstract units The application that reads the file determines the size of the final plot By default the width of the final plot is assumed to be 6 inches 15 24 cm This distance is used to calculate the correct font size and may be changed with the width option The keyword should be followed by the width in points Here a point is 1 72 inch as in PostScript This unit is known as a big point in TeX Gnuplot expressions can be used to convert from other units Example set terminal cgm width 432 default set terminal cgm width 6 72 same as above set terminal cgm width 10 2 54 72 10 cm wide Cgm nofontlist The default font table includes the fonts recommended for WebCGM which are compatible with the Com puter Graphics Metafile input filter for Microsoft Office and Corel Draw Another application might use different fonts and or different font names which may not be documented The nofontlist synonym win word6 option deletes the font table from the CGM file In this case the reading application should use a default table Gnuplot will still use its own default font table to select font indices Thus Helvetica will give you an index of 1 which should get you the first entry in your application s default font table Helvetica Bold will give you its second entry etc Context ConTeXt is a macro package for TeX highly integrated with Metapost for drawing figures a
27. DU o a ae de Se ee ee add does Ho ee aa A Se Oe ee Be 111 ae Nee ewan eet at eae Gi Ge oe ee Eh ete ne ae eta eta aN Be ep 111 Bitje e a E BN Ee BO Ee ee Roe plese att east ee ac eee apie ye 112 ont path abe ee ee ak a baw OOM eee hee eee a ee eae be ed Be eek 112 Formati e Se wae Sh BB tee De ae ae ee Oe ee ee he a Ga 113 a Gh PM att tac de dns Bo OG eet e A RE Ot ed Medes amp Ge eg 113 AA OR a eat A tote ee Sey a a A ae ee ee 113 A h 4G ATARI OO aan eo ES 114 beers eeu eRe Ae At a a A eee ee ee e 115 IRN CHONG p i ak Sakata ae ee a ee ee ea a He ee HE Paw Sak Boa ee ee 115 Cees ead aa eed wae rc een ee ta de eee eee bbe Ss bee pad 116 oy ed Aaa ek ea oe RARA See a 116 o aaa aa esos 118 dee Gee p a Ge ee e a a RE i we ele ee BR en e a 118 EE e ee a ok aire at at a a eae ES AO SO Oe me Se ore Oa aa ee A A 119 eres bik oe eee oe E eae ew ke ees Oe aS AA oS 120 bias eek EEE EI EY PE aout EE E EEE 121 aBel AA A 122 Gb is A ee aa a re Hele e e A 124 marge isos arde 124 Loadpathl e dose t e a aoa a eR e a a A A ea eee ee 124 IA AAA AN a aesaad OG GES 125 CONTENTS 9 SU a as e en ye FES A amp Gk Ae 125 Mapping AR atest E a a a ae A he eb GD See e Gk MO Soe BOR Bw ee 126 Marelli aa LA ek hace ee ABE SR RS ee Pees Se SESS EE amp eg 126 INIGUSE A sek Baka ee ee ee Beh Oe te a a a Ae amp eos ae nek Booed ee ee we 127 gfe Mss Grupa eet Ree ee Gen a Ae ee a ee eaters eo Boe Gem a 127 ibe RRA LE eee Be ee Re dS A
28. Lines with error bars are supported for 2D data file plots by reading one to four additional columns or using entries these additional values are used in different ways by the various errorlines styles In the default situation gnuplot expects to see three four or six numbers on each line of the data file either x y ydelta x y ylow yhigh x y xdelta x y xlow xhigh x y xdelta ydelta or x y xlow xhigh ylow yhigh s The x coordinate must be specified The order of the numbers must be exactly as given above though the using qualifier can manipulate the order and provide values for missing columns For example plot file with errorlines plot file using 1 2 sqrt 1 with xerrorlines plot file using 1 2 1 3 1 3 4 5 with xyerrorlines The last example is for a file containing an unsupported combination of relative x and absolute y errors The using entry generates absolute x min and max from the relative error The y error bar is a vertical line plotted from x ylow to x yhigh If ydelta is specified instead of ylow and yhigh ylow y ydelta and yhigh y ydelta are derived If there are only two numbers on the record yhigh and ylow are both set to y The x error bar is a horizontal line computed in the same fashion The error bars have crossbars at each end unless set bars is used see set bars p 100 for details If autoscaling is on the range
29. Mouse variables When mousing is active clicking in the active window will set several user variables that can be accessed from the gnuplot command line The coordinates of the mouse at the time of the click are stored in MOUSE_X MOUSE_Y MOUSE_X2 and MOUSE_Y2 The mouse button clicked and any meta keys active at that time are stored in MOUSE_BUTTON MOUSE_SHIFT MOUSE_ALT and MOUSE_CTRL These variables are set to undefined at the start of every plot and only become defined in the event of a mouse click in the active plot window To determine from a script if the mouse has been clicked in the active plot window it is sufficient to test for any one of these variables being defined plot something pause mouse if defined MOUSE_BUTTON call something_else else print No mouse click It is also possible to track keystrokes in the plot window using the mousing code plot something pause mouse keypress print Keystroke MOUSE_KEY at MOUSE_X MOUSE_Y When pause mouse keypress is terminated by a keypress then MOUSE_KEY will contain the ascii character value of the key that was pressed MOUSE_CHAR will contain the character itself as a string variable If the pause command is terminated abnormally e g by ctrl C or by externally closing the plot window then MOUSE_KEY will equal 1 Note that after a zoom by mouse you can read the new ranges as GPVAL_X_MIN GPVAL_X_MAX GPVAL_Y_MIN and GPVAL_Y_MAX see gnu
30. STATS_blocks number of indexable data blocks in the file The second set reports properties of the in range data from a single column If the corresponding axis is autoscaled x axis for the 1st column y axis for the optional second column then no range limits are applied If two columns are being analysed in a single stats command the the suffix _x or _y is appended to each variable name I e STATS _min_x is the minimum value found in the first column while STATS _min_y is the minimum value found in the second column STATS_min minimum value of in range data points STATS_max maximum value of in range data points STATS_index_min index i for which data i STATS_min STATS_index_max index i for which data i STATS_max STATS_lo_quartile value of the lower 1st quartile boundary STATS_median median value STATS_up_quartile value of the upper 3rd quartile boundary STATS_mean mean value of in range data points STATS_stddev standard deviation of the in range data points STATS_sum sum STATS_sumsq sum of squares The third set of variables is only relevant to analysis of two data columns STATS_correlation correlation coefficient between x and y values STATS_slope A corresponding to a linear fit y Ax B STATS_intercept B corresponding to a linear fit y Ax B STATS_sumxy sum of x y STATS_pos_min_y x coordinate of a point with minimum y value STATS_pos_max_y x coordinate of a point with maximum y
31. Syntax raise plot_window_nb The raise command raises opposite to lower plot window s associated with the interactive terminal of your gnuplot session i e pm win wxt or x11 It puts the plot window to front top in the z order windows stack of the window manager of your desktop As x11 and wxt support multiple plot windows then by default they raise these windows in descending order of most recently created on top to the least recently created on bottom If a plot number is supplied as an optional parameter only the associated plot window will be raised if it exists The optional parameter is ignored for single plot windows terminal i e pm and win If the window is not raised under X11 then perhaps the plot window is running in a different X11 session telnet or ssh session for example or perhaps raising is blocked by your window manager policy setting Refresh The refresh command is similar to replot with two major differences refresh reformats and redraws the current plot using the data already read in This means that you can use refresh for plots with in line data pseudo device and for plots from datafiles whose contents are volatile You cannot use the refresh command to add new data to an existing plot Mousing operations in particular zoom and unzoom will use refresh rather than replot if appropriate Example plot datafile volatile with lines with labels 100 200 Special point e
32. The commands set style function lines plot f x 1t 3 g x 1s 1 will create a plot of f x using the default blue line and a plot of g x using the user defined wide green line Similarly the commands set style function linespoints plot p x 1t 1 pt 3 q x 1s 1 will create a plot of p x using the default triangles connected by a red line and q x using small triangles connected by a green line splot sin sqrt x x y y sqrt x x y y w 1 pal creates a surface plot using smooth colors according to palette Note that this works only on some terminals See also set palette p 138 set pm3d p 135 set style line 10 linetype 1 linecolor rgb cyan will assign linestyle 10 to be a solid cyan line on any terminal that supports rgb colors Set style circle Syntax set style circle radius graph screen lt R gt no wedge This command sets the default radius used in plot style with circles It applies to data plots with only 2 columns of data x y and to function plots The default is set style circle radius graph 0 02 Nowedge disables drawing of the two radii that connect the ends of an arc to the center The default is wedge This parameter has no effect on full circles Set style rectangle Rectangles defined with the set object command can have individual styles However if the object is not assigned a private style then it inherits a default that is taken from the set style rectangle command Syntax set st
33. The size of each individual point is determined by multiplying the global pointsize by the value read from the data file If you have defined specific line type width and point type size combinations with set style line one of these may be selected by setting lt line_style gt to the index of the desired style If gnuplot was built with pm3d support the special keyword palette is allowed for smooth color change of lines points and dots in splots The color is chosen from a smooth palette which was set previously with the command set palette The color value corresponds to the z value of the point coordinates or to the color coordinate if specified by the 4th parameter in using Both 2D and 3D plots plot and splot commands can use palette colors as specified by either their fractional value or the corresponding value mapped to the colorbox range A palette color value can also be read from an explicitly specified input column in the using specifier See colors p 83 set palette p 138 linetype p 124 The keyword nohidden3d applies only to plots made with the splot command Normally the global option set hidden3d applies to all plots in the graph You can attach the nohidden3d option to any individual plots that you want to exclude from the hidden3d processing The individual elements other than surfaces i e lines dots labels of a plot marked nohidden3d will all be drawn even if they would normally be obscured by other plot
34. To fill the area between the curve and the baseline at y 0 use fillsteps See also with fillsteps with steps Rgbalpha See image p 54 Rgbimage See image p 54 Vectors The 2D vectors style draws a vector from x y to x xdelta y ydelta The 3D vectors style is similar but requires six columns of basic data A small arrowhead is drawn at the end of each vector 4 columns x y xdelta ydelta 6 columns x y z xdelta ydelta zdelta In both cases an additional input column 5th in 2D 7th in 3D may be used to provide variable per datapoint color information see linecolor p and rgbcolor variable p 35 splot with vectors is supported only for set mapping cartesian The keywords with vectors may be followed by an in line arrow style specifications a reference to a predefined arrow style or a request to read the index of the desired arrow style for each vector from a separate column Note If you choose arrowstyle variable it will fill in all arrow properties at the time the corresponding vector is drawn you cannot mix this keyword with other line or arrow style qualifiers in the plot command plot with vectors filled heads plot with vectors arrowstyle 3 plot using 1 2 3 4 5 with vectors arrowstyle variable s See arrowstyle p 146 for more details Example plot file dat using 1 2 3 4 with vectors head filled 1t 2 splot file dat using 1 2 3 1 1 1 with vec
35. bar default Figure lt n gt lt x gt lt y gt is the size of the plot default is 846x594 pt 11 75x8 25 in Use lt fontname gt to specify the font default is Times Roman and lt fontsize gt to specify the font size default is 14 0 pt The aqua terminal supports enhanced text mode see enhanced p 24 except for overprint Font support is limited to the fonts available on the system Character encoding can be selected by set encoding and currently supports iso_latin_1 iso_latin_2 cp1250 and UTF8 default Lines can be drawn either solid or dashed default is solid and the dash spacing can be modified by lt dashlength gt which is a multiplier gt 0 Be The be terminal type is present if gnuplot is built for the beos operating system and for use with X servers It is selected at program startup if the DISPLAY environment variable is set if the TERM environment variable is set to xterm or if the display command line option is used Syntax set terminal be reset lt n gt Multiple plot windows are supported set terminal be lt n gt directs the output to plot window number n If n gt 0 the terminal number will be appended to the window title and the icon will be labeled gplt lt n gt The active window may distinguished by a change in cursor from default to crosshair Plot windows remain open even when the gnuplot driver is changed to a different device A plot window can be closed by pressing the
36. but sfrm1000 pfb instead The usage of TeX fonts is shown in one of the demos The file ps fontfile doc tex in the docs psdoc subdirectory of the gnuplot source distribution contains a table with glyphs of the TeX mathfonts If the font CMEX10 is embedded file cmex10 pfb gnuplot defines the additional font CMEX10 Baseline It is shifted vertically in order to fit better to the other glyphs CMEX10 has its baseline at the top of the symbols Postscript prologue Each PostScript output file includes a Prolog section and possibly some additional user defined sections containing for example character encodings These sections are copied from a set of PostScript prologue files that are either compiled into the gnuplot executable or stored elsewhere on your computer A default directory where these files live is set at the time gnuplot is built However you can override this default either by using the gnuplot command set psdir or by defining an environment variable GNUPLOT _PS_DIR See set psdir p 144 Postscript adobeglyphnames This setting is only relevant to PostScript output with UTF 8 encoding It controls the names used to describe characters with Unicode entry points higher than 0x00FF That is all characters outside of the Latin1 set In general unicode characters do not have a unique name they have only a unicode identification code However Adobe have a recommended scheme for assigning names to certain ranges
37. cd c newdata work as expected Call The call command is identical to the load command with one exception you can have up to ten additional parameters to the command delimited according to the standard parser rules which can be substituted into the lines read from the file As each line is read from the called input file it is scanned for the sequence dollar sign followed by a digit 0 9 If found the sequence is replaced by the corresponding parameter from the call command line If the parameter was specified as a string in the call line it is substituted without its enclosing quotes Sequence is replaced by the number of passed parameters followed by any character will be that character e g use to get a single Providing more than ten parameters on the call command line will cause an error A parameter that was not provided substitutes as nothing Files being called may themselves contain call or load commands Syntax p call lt input file gt lt parameter 0 gt lt parm 1 gt lt parm 9 gt The name of the input file must be enclosed in quotes and it is recommended that parameters are similarly enclosed in quotes future versions of gnuplot may treat quoted and unquoted arguments differently Example If the file calltest gp contains the line print argc pO0 0 p1 1 p2 2 p3 3 p4 4 p5 5 p6 6 p7 x 7x entering the command call calltest gp abcd 1 2 quoted
38. cos x arg z treat angle values as radians but this may be changed to degrees using the command set angles Math library functions Function Arguments Returns abs x any absolute value of x x same type abs x complex length of x real x imag x acos x any cos z inverse cosine acosh x any cosh x inverse hyperbolic cosine in radians airy x any Airy function Ai x arg x complex the phase of x asin x any sin x inverse sin asinh x any sinh x inverse hyperbolic sin in radians atan x any tan x inverse tangent atan2 y x int or real tan y zx inverse tangent atanh x any tanh x inverse hyperbolic tangent in radians EllipticK k real k 1 1 K k complete elliptic integral of the first kind EllipticE k real k 1 1 E k complete elliptic integral of the second kind EllipticPi n k real n lt 1 real k 1 1 II n amp complete elliptic integral of the third kind besj0 x int or real jo Bessel function of x in radians besj1 x int or real j Bessel function of x in radians besy0 x int or real yo Bessel function of x in radians besyl x int or real y Bessel function of x in radians ceil x any x smallest integer not less than x real part cos x any cos x cosine of x cosh x any cosh x hyperbolic cosine of x in radians erf x any erf real x error function of real x erfc x any erfc real x 1 0 error function of real x exp x any e
39. exponential function of expint n x int n gt 0 real z gt 0 E a gt t e dt exponential integral of x floor x any x largest integer not greater than x real part gamma x any gamma real x gamma function of real x ibeta p q x any ibeta real p q 1 ibeta function of real p q x inverf x any inverse error function of real x 27 Math library functions Function Arguments Returns igamma a x any igamma real a x igamma function of real a z imag x complex imaginary part of x as a real number invnorm x any inverse normal distribution function of real x int x real integer part of x truncated toward zero lambertw x real Lambert W function lgamma x any lgamma real x lgamma function of real x log x any log x natural logarithm base e of x log10 x any log p x logarithm base 10 of x norm x any normal distribution Gaussian function of real rand x int pseudo random number in the interval 0 1 real x any real part of x sgn x any 1 if x gt 0 1 if x lt 0 0if x 0 imag x ignored sin x any sin z sine of x sinh x any sinh z hyperbolic sine of x in radians sqrt x any yx square root of x tan x any tan x tangent of x tanh x any tanh z hyperbolic tangent of x in radians voigt x y real Voigt Faddeeva function 2 f GIP ae dt String functions Function Arguments Returns gprintf format x any string result from a
40. file dat using COL gt e N w BoM mH Mom ow This will produce a plot with clusters of two boxes vertical bars centered at each integral value on the x axis If the first column of the input file contains labels they may be placed along the x axis using the variant command plot for COL 2 4 2 file dat using COL xticlabels 1 If the file contains both magnitude and range informa tion for each value then error bars can be added to the plot The following commands will add error bars ex tending from y lt error gt to y lt error gt capped by horizontal bar ends drawn the same width as the box itself The error bars and bar ends are drawn with linewidth 2 using the border linetype from the current fill style set bars fullwidth set style fill solid 1 border 1t 1 set style histogram errorbars gap 2 lw 2 plot for COL 2 4 2 file dat using COL COL 1 m ee ee ee Histogram with error bars H Ho To plot the same data as a rowstacked histogram Just to be different this example lists the separate columns explicitly rather than using iteration set style histogram rowstacked plot file dat using 2 using 4 xtic 1 This will produce a plot in which each vertical bar cor responds to one row of data Each vertical bar contains a stack of two segments correspon
41. lt variable gt in string of words i The scope of an iteration ends at the next comma or the end of the command whichever comes first Iteration can not be nested This will plot one curve sin 3x because iteration ends at the comma plot for i 1 3 j i sin j x This will plot three curves because there is no comma after the definition of j plot for i 1 3 j i sin j x Example plot for dataset in apples bananas dataset dat title dataset In this example iteration is used both to generate a file name and a corresponding title Example file n sprintf dataset_ d dat n splot for i 1 10 file i title sprintf dataset 7 d i This example defines a string valued function that generates file names and plots ten such files together The iteration variable i in this example is treated as an integer and may be used more than once Example set key left plot for n 1 4 x n sprintf d n This example plots a family of functions Example list apple banana cabbage daikon eggplant item n word list n plot for i 1 words list item i dat title item i list new stuff replot This example steps through a list and plots once per item Because the items are retrieved dynamically you can change the list and then replot Example list apple banana cabbage daikon eggplant plot for i in list i dat title i list new stuff replot This is example does exactly th
42. maxcols By default the key is placed in the upper right inside corner of the graph The keywords left right top bottom center inside outside Imargin rmargin tmargin bmargin above over below and under may be used to automatically place the key in other positions of the graph Also an at lt position gt may be given to indicate precisely where the plot should be placed In this case the keywords left right top bottom and center serve an analogous purpose for alignment For more information see key placement p 120 Justification of the plot titles within the key is controlled by Left or Right default The text and sample can be reversed reverse and a box can be drawn around the key box in a specified linetype and linewidth or a user defined linestyle By default the key is built up one plot at a time That is the key symbol and title are drawn at the same time as the corresponding plot That means newer plots may sometimes place elements on top of the key set key opaque causes the key to be generated after all the plots In this case the key area is filled with background color and then the key symbols and titles are written Therefore the key itself may obscure portions of some plot elements The default can be restored by set key noopaque By default the first plot label is at the top of the key and successive labels are entered below it The invert option causes the first label to be placed at the bottom
43. of the function The r x and y ranges control the extent of the graph in the x and y directions Each of these ranges as well as the rrange may be autoscaled or set explicitly For details see set rrange p 145 and set xrange p 160 Example set polar plot t sin t set trange 2 pi 2 pi set rrange 0 3 plot t sin t The first plot uses the default polar angular domain of 0 to 2 pi The radius and the size of the graph are scaled automatically The second plot expands the domain and restricts the size of the graph to the area within 3 units of the origin This has the effect of limiting x and y to 3 3 You may want to set size square to have gnuplot try to make the aspect ratio equal to unity so that circles look circular See also polar demos polar dem and polar data plot poldat dem Print The set print command redirects the output of the print command to a file Syntax set print set print set print lt filename gt set print lt filename gt append set print lt shell_command gt Without lt filename gt the output file is restored to lt STDERR gt The lt filename gt means lt STDOUT gt The append flag causes the file to be opened in append mode A lt filename gt starting with is opened as a pipe to the lt shell_command gt on platforms that support piping Psdir The set psdir lt directory gt command controls the search path used by the postscript termina
44. w 2 q floor tan pi 2 0 1 f x sin wx sinc x sin pi x pi x delta t t 0 ramp t t gt 0 t 0 min a b a lt b a b comb n k n k n k len3d x y z sqrt x x y y z z plot f x sin x a a 0 2 f x a 0 4 f x file mydata inp file n sprintf run_ d dat n The final two examples illustrate a user defined string variable and a user defined string function Note that the variables pi 3 14159 and NaN IEEE Not a Number are already defined You can redefine these to something else if you really need to The original values can be recovered by setting NaN pi GPVAL_NaN GPVAL_pi Other variables may be defined under various gnuplot operations like mousing in interactive terminals or fitting see gnuplot defined variables p for details You can check for existence of a given variable V by the exists V expression For example a 10 if exists a print a is defined if lexists b print b is not defined Valid names are the same as in most programming languages they must begin with a letter but subsequent characters may be letters digits or _ Each function definition is made available as a special string valued variable with the prefix GPFUN_ Example set label GPFUN_sinc at graph 05 95 See show functions p 115 functions p 8s gnuplot defined variables p 30 macros p 40 value p 28 2 Fonts Gnuplo
45. 0 0 0 0 0 Axis 192 192 192 2 2 Line1 0 0 255 0 0 Line2 0 255 0 0 1 Line3 255 Line4 255 Line5 0 O 12 0002 0 255 0 3 804 These settings apply to the wgnuplot text window only The TextOrigin and TextSize entries specify the location and size of the text window The TextFont entry specifies the text window font and size The TextWrap entry selects wrapping of long text lines The TextLines entry specifies the number of unwrapped lines the internal buffer of the text window can hold This value currently cannot be changed from within wgnuplot See text menu p 224 The GraphFont entry specifies the font name and size in points The five numbers given in the Border Axis and Line entries are the Red intensity 0 255 Green intensity Blue intensity Color Linestyle and Mono Linestyle Linestyles are 0 SOLID 1 DASH 2 DOT 3 DASHDOT 4 DASHDOTDOT In the sample wgnuplot ini file above Line 2 is a green solid line in color mode or a dashed line in monochrome mode The default line width is 1 pixel If Linestyle is negative it specifies the width of a SOLID line in pixels Linel and any linestyle used with the points style must be SOLID with unit width See graph menu p 224 Wxt The wxt terminal device generates output in a separate window The window is created by the wxWidgets library where the wxt comes from The actual drawing is done via cairo a 2D graphics library and pango a library for laying out
46. 1 1 1 nohead lw 2 To draw a vertical line from the bottom to the top of the graph at x 3 use set arrow from 3 graph O to 3 graph 1 nohead To draw a vertical arrow with T shape ends use set arrow 3 from 0 5 to 0 5 heads size screen 0 1 90 To draw an arrow relatively to the start point where the relative distances are given in graph coordinates use set arrow from 0 5 rto graph 0 1 0 1 To draw an arrow with relative end point in logarithmic x axis use set logscale x set arrow from 100 5 rto 10 10 This draws an arrow from 100 5 to 1000 5 For the logarithmic x axis the relative coordinate 10 means factor 10 while for the linear y axis the relative coordinate 10 means difference 10 To delete arrow number 2 use unset arrow 2 To delete all arrows use unset arrow To show all arrows in tag order use show arrow arrows demos Autoscale Autoscaling may be set individually on the x y or z axis or globally on all axes The default is to autoscale all axes If you want to autoscale based on a subset of the plots in the figure you can mark the other ones with the flag noautoscale See datafile p 78 Syntax set autoscale lt axes gt min max fixmin fixmax fix fix keepfix set autoscale noextend unset autoscale lt axes gt show autoscale where lt axes gt is either x y z cb x2 y2 or xy A keyword with min or max appended this cannot be done with xy tells gnuplot to autoscale just
47. 152 SMS fle ea oe OO ee ee E A ee ee ne Oe SS 152 ge ay aoe te ty es Se emer AR A oe ces ee a we 153 ea 46 9966 edo 153 AA o A A A AA a de Sa 153 So ties A ee ae a a ge ate ee we oia E Ri Ge gs 154 Sok ea eee oe ae eae bob ee hoe ee ge Oo be ee eee bead oe oe 154 5 SERRE Gy Vea Pe ee we ee RA RRR Ewes ALAN wo 4 154 Ms amp ie gi tad dhe GASES EE eee SERA E EE EEDA SAG SOOO EES 155 phe Eas a ta ahh dy y my ae we RO E a E Res a Ow a 156 Timarete apaa ae Ce SD OS SE Oe a E 156 TADA SAS AR BO AD oo eee ee ee OU eS ee e 156 oe tae ete Reece laces GP AF A tee ys AS AAN 156 ge ues ee a sas nas re O cee ck een es Oe Wee a 156 S44 Bien EG A we bee Pe AAA eee ao a 157 lewe iaa irradia rr 157 TII aseee haat eact se E EE EEE EET 157 A E AAA EIA AAA AA a a aa aaa d T Gs 157 CONTENTS 11 A a an da e daa e A eee ee Ge dad 158 ANNA 158 A Ra ee age aes a AA ee 158 a et 158 O gn eg ae ges gee Bes ae we 158 Ee Pa ee a eee Be A Re ee eee oe ee e A 158 Sethe eee bbb d did bide d dpe egos abe eed 644454 bo ee ee to 158 MAME fae age ee bag bea eee ea a a a SER KO ee eae Rae dah Se Gite as 159 sees odes Aa neeea S458 Get eed neon uses anes 159 Pee SOR ere be ee ee sa oe Ree ee SIDA 159 AEG sae at AE at Uh a ete des a A hk AS A Se de de ev eas BS Boas Eh aH 159 A den ces de hones ag eevee E Br peas ee ee tee A a es ae eget ee ac ye goes See ee 160 E ER oe oe Ge Dy ee Ge See ANA ww 160 ARA 162 E AR RN 164 Lal a O ada A ADA cs dy Seo ao ds GO Ge
48. 155 for more information about time format strings Timefmt This command applies to timeseries where data are composed of dates times It has no meaning unless the command set xdata time is given also Syntax set timefmt lt format string gt show timefmt The string argument tells gnuplot how to read timedata from the datafile The valid formats are Time Series timedata Format Specifiers Format Explanation ha day of the month 1 31 Au month of the year 1 12 AY year 0 99 AY year 4 digit hj day of the year 1 365 7H hour 0 24 7M minute 0 60 s seconds since the Unix epoch 1970 01 01 00 00 UTC 8 second integer 0 60 on output double on input hb three character abbreviation of the name of the month 7B name of the month Any character is allowed in the string but must match exactly t tab is recognized Backslash octals nnn are converted to char If there is no separating character between the time date elements then d m y WH M and S read two digits each If a decimal point immediately follows the field read by S the decimal and any following digits are interpreted as a fractional second Y reads four digits j reads three digits b requires three characters and B requires as many as it needs Spaces are treated slightly differently A space in the string stands for zero or more whitespace characters in the file That is H M can be used to read 1220 and 12 20 as we
49. 2 is specified metapost uses postscript fonts to generate the eps file so that the result can be viewed using e g ghostscript Normally the output of metapost uses TeX fonts and therefore has to be included in a La TeX file before you can look at it The option noprologues is the default No additional line specifying the prologue will be added The option a4paper adds a a4paper to the documentclass Normally letter paper is used default Since this option is only used in case of LaTeX the latex option is selected automatically The option amstex automatically selects the latex option and includes the following LaTeX packages amsfonts amsmath intlimits By default these packages are not included A name in quotes selects the font that will be used when no explicit font is given in a set label or set title A name recognized by TeX a TFM file exists must be used The default is cmr10 unless notex is selected then it is perr8r Courier Even under notex a TFM file is needed by Metapost The file pcrr8r tfm is the name given to Courier in LaTeX s psnfss package If you change the font from the notex default choose a font that matches the ASCII encoding at least in the range 32 126 cmtt10 almost works but it has a nonblank character in position 32 space The size can be any number between 5 0 and 99 99 If it is omitted 10 0 is used It is advisable to use magstep sizes 10 times an integer or half integer power of 1 2 rounde
50. 51 ee eee y a ee re eee Tee ee 53 roo 53 Image 54 E E RR en ee a A 54 E eae fo es ta E as Be a 55 55 55 Lines 55 56 56 56 57 57 57 O el ot O E U 57 Q O z jab 5 jon Wa Adjustable parameters a a Short Introduction s lt y jes dea ee ee ee ee eee a ew ae A Error estimates i u u08 244 BEARERS wee eRe eA EARS RAE ELA DEE we ee Statistical Overview lt lt 4440 44 ra HEA DE Ree ee A ewe y Practical guidelines 200 02 eo bee eR eee ee aE ES Se DEES ee eS Cl sie se hy S SS de ho ac Ss Ae ee ale a se A ao 58 58 58 59 59 60 60 60 61 61 61 62 62 63 63 63 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 68 69 69 70 70 70 6 CONTENTS 71 71 72 72 Plot 73 AOS amp a A a e Gs Be Ee a AA AAA a a ee eS amp 73 aes Ga hae Ree ae et ee eee Se Boe Oe eee Page nknea Be a ee S 74 A Hoty teh an BSR ara ot Gs ig ed A Se A Ap ee eo ee we e 74 ATTAY sick do teal gh Se Boga ae eS RA A BRR a GO 75 oS eet st Se ee ee ea oe ae ee A Ge a 75 MUP hes ar ao Ae Rice ee dd hah a ad we EAS OD BW Be ek a 75 A v3 25 25 hee ete See Tae a GG Sy ce we ee Sh a ee eae de 75 Ae Ae ee Bo Avie ee IU re One ee ee 76 oe ek bee SERRE ESE a Rh A ewe eee Pet ae eee ee 76 A Ce ese ine inn ea lee Mk es ee ee ake ees Ze eg Mt cy Oye ew enn We Gey eG 76 Soop tae Ga o alee ee a Oe AR a ole ee ee 76 PG ene ga ee eae ed ee eee ea da Pee e ye wae bbe bad B54 7
51. 8 bit Russian Serbian Bulgarian Macedonian cp1254 codepage for MS Windows Turkish superset of Latin5 sjis shift JIS Japanese encoding utf8 variable length multibyte representation of Unicode entry point for each character The command set encoding locale is different from the other options It attempts to determine the current locale from the runtime environment On most systems this is controlled by the environmental variables LC_ALL LC_CTYPE or LANG This mechanism is necessary for example to pass multibyte character encodings such as UTF 8 or EUC_JP to the wxt and cairopdf terminals This command does not affect the locale specific representation of dates or numbers See also set locale p 125 and set decimalsign p 109 Generally you must set the encoding before setting the terminal type Note that encoding is not supported by all terminal drivers and that the device must be able to produce the desired non standard characters Fit The fit setting defines where the fit command writes its output Syntax set fit logfile lt filename gt no errorvariables no quiet unset fit show fit The lt filename gt argument must be enclosed in single or double quotes If no filename is given or unset fit is used the log file is reset to its default value fit log or the value of the environmental variable FIT_LOG If the given logfile name ends with a or it is interpreted to be a directory name a
52. 82 a curve is piecewise constructed from segments of cubic polynomials whose coefficients are found by the weighting the data points the weights are taken from the third column in the data file That default can be modified by the third entry in the using list e g plot data file using 1 2 1 0 smooth acsplines Qualitatively the absolute magnitude of the weights determines the number of segments used to construct the curve If the weights are large the effect of each datum is large and the curve approaches that produced by connecting consecutive points with natural cubic splines If the weights are small the curve is composed 9 of fewer segments and thus is smoother the limiting case is the single segment produced by a weighted linear least squares fit to all the data The smoothing weight can be expressed in terms of errors as a statistical weight for a point divided by a smoothing factor for the curve so that standard errors in the file can be used as smoothing weights Example sw x S 1 x x S plot data_file using 1 2 sw 3 100 smooth acsplines Bezier The bezier option approximates the data with a Bezier curve of degree n the number of data points that connects the endpoints Csplines The csplines option connects consecutive points by natural cubic splines after rendering the data monotonic see smooth unique p 82 Sbezier The sbezier option first renders the data monotonic unique and the
53. Be matrix max 137 mean 137 median metafont metapost 204 mf 20 mif min missing 107 mixing macros backquotes modulo monochrome options mouse 36 B7 127 218 22a 227 mouseformat mousewheel 1 mousing an mp 204 multi branch 68 multi branch multiplot 62 62 128 128 220 mx2tics 130 mxtics my2tics 130 mytics 131 mztics 131 NaN E ET ES nec cp6 192 negation negative 140 new features newhistogram EF 238 NeXT 206 next noarrow noautoscale noborder nocbdtics 167 nocbmtics 168 nocbtics noclip nocontour 105 nodgrid3d nofpe trap 106 nogrid nohidden3d nohistorysize 118 nokey nolabel nologscale nomouse 127 nomultiplot nomx2tics 130 nomxtics 13 nomy2tics 130 nomytics 13 nomztics 131 nonuniform 170 nooffsets 133 noparametric 134 nopolar norm 27 nosurface 152 notimestamp 154 nox2dtics nox2mtics 158 nox2tics 158 nox2zeroaxis 158 noxdtics 159 noxmtics 160 noxtics 162 noxzeroaxis 165 noy2dtics 165 noy2mtics 165 noy2tics 166 noy2zeroaxis 166 noydtics 166 noymtics 166 noytics 166 noyzeroaxis 166 nozdtics nozmtics 168 noztics 168 nozzeroaxis 167 O pan object offsets okidata one s complement OpenStep Openstep 207 openstep 207 operator precedence ae options I ori 6
54. Bring to Top when checked brings the graph window to the top after every plot Color when checked enables color linestyles When unchecked it forces monochrome linestyles Double buffer activates drawing into a memory buffer before copying the graph to the screen This avoids flickering e g during animation and rotation of 3d graphs See mouse p 127 and scrolling p 128 Oversampling doubles the size of the virtual canvas It is scaled down again for drawing to the screen This gives smoother graphics but requires more memory and computing time It requires double buffer Antialiasing selects smoothing of lines and edges Note that this slows down drawing Background sets the window background color Choose Font selects the font used in the graphics window Line Styles allows customization of the line colors and styles Update wgnuplot ini saves the current window locations window sizes text window font text window font size graph window font graph window font size background color and linestyles to the initialization file wgnuplot ini Note that this menu is only available by pressing the right mouse button with unset mouse Printing In order of preference graphs may be printed in the following ways 1 Use the gnuplot command set terminal to select a printer and set output to redirect output to a file 2 Select the Print command from the gnuplot graph window An extra command screendump does this from the t
55. Gpic The gpic terminal driver generates GPIC graphs in the Free Software Foundations s groff package The default size is 5 x 3 inches The only option is the origin which defaults to 0 0 Syntax set terminal gpic lt x gt lt y gt where x and y are in inches A simple graph can be formatted using groff p mpic Tps file pic gt file ps The output from pic can be pipe lined into eqn so it is possible to put complex functions in a graph with the set label and set x y label commands For instance set ylab space O int from 0 to x alpha t roman d t will label the y axis with a nice integral if formatted with the command gpic filename pic geqn d Tps groff m macro package Tps gt filename ps Figures made this way can be scaled to fit into a document The pic language is easy to understand so the graphs can be edited by hand if need be All co ordinates in the pic file produced by gnuplot are given as x gnuplotx and y gnuploty By default x and y are given the value 0 If this line is removed with an editor in a number of files one can put several graphs in one figure like this default size is 5 0x3 0 inches PS 8 0 x 0 y 3 copy figa pic x 5 5 y 3 copy figb pic x 0 y 0 copy figc pic x 5 y 0 copy figd pic PE This will produce an 8 inch wide figure with four graphs in two rows on top of each other One can also achieve the same thing by specifying x and y in the command
56. Some systems support multiple different visual classes together on one screen On these systems it might be necessary to force gnuplot to use a specific visual class e g the default visual might be 8bit PseudoColor but the screen would also support 24bit TrueColor which would be the preferred choice The information about an Xserver s capabilities can be obtained with the program xdpyinfo For the visual names below you can choose one of StaticGray GrayScale StaticColor PseudoColor TrueColor DirectColor If an Xserver supports a requested visual type at different depths gnuplot chooses the visual class with the highest depth deepest If the requested visual class matches the default visual and multiple classes of this type are supported the default visual is preferred Example on an 8bit PseudoColor visual you can force a private color map by specifying gnu plot maxcolors 240 and gnuplot mincolors 240 gnuplot maxcolors integer gnuplot mincolors integer gnuplot visual visual name X11 other_resources By default the contents of the current plot window are exported to the X11 clipboard in response to X events in the window Setting the resource gnuplot exportselection to off or false will disable this By default text rotation is done using a method that is fast but can corrupt nearby colors depending on the background If this is a problem you can set the resource gnuplot fastrotate to off
57. With scale the size of the tic marks can be adjusted If lt minor gt is not specified it is 0 5 lt major gt The default size 1 0 for major tics and 0 5 for minor tics is requested by scale default rotate asks gnuplot to rotate the text through 90 degrees which will be done if the terminal driver in use supports text rotation norotate cancels this rotate by lt ang gt asks for rotation by lt ang gt degrees supported by some terminal types The defaults are border mirror norotate for tics on the x and y axes and border nomirror norotate for tics on the x2 and y2 axes For the z axis the axis border option is not available and the default is nomirror If you do want to mirror the z axis tics you might want to create a bit more room for them with set border The lt offset gt is specified by either x y or x y z and may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system lt offset gt is the offset of the tics texts from their default positions while the default coordinate system is character See coordinates p 22 for details nooffset switches off the offset Example Move xtics more closely to the plot set xtics offset 0 graph 0 05 By default tic labels are justified automatically depending on the axis and rotation angle to produce aes thetically pleasing results If this is not desired justification can be overridden with an explicit left right or center keyword autojusti
58. align the key as though it were text positioned using the label command i e left means left align with key to the right of lt position gt etc Key samples By default each plot on the graph generates a corresponding entry in the key This entry contains a plot title and a sample line point box of the same color and fill properties as used in the plot itself The font and textcolor properties control the appearance of the individual plot titles that appear in the key Setting the textcolor to variable causes the text for each key entry to be the same color as the line or fill color for that plot This was the default in some earlier versions of gnuplot The length of the sample line can be controlled by samplen The sample length is computed as the sum of the tic length and lt sample_length gt times the character width samplen also affects the positions of point samples in the key since these are drawn at the midpoint of the sample line even if the sample line itself is not drawn The vertical spacing between lines is controlled by spacing The spacing is set equal to the product of the pointsize the vertical tic size and lt vertical_spacing gt The program will guarantee that the vertical spacing is no smaller than the character height The lt width_increment gt is a number of character widths to be added to or subtracted from the length of the string This is useful only when you are putting a box around the key and you are using
59. also be used with matrix binary files Flipx flipy flipz Sometimes the scanning directions in a binary datafile are not consistent with that assumed by gnuplot These keywords can flip the scanning direction along dimensions x y z Origin When gnuplot generates coordinates based upon transposition and flip it attempts to always position the lower left point in the array at the origin i e the data lies in the first quadrant of a Cartesian system after transpose and flip To position the array somewhere else on the graph the origin keyword directs gnuplot to position the lower left point of the array at a point specified by a tuple The tuple should be a double for plot and a triple for splot For example origin 100 100 100 200 is for two records in the file and intended for plotting in two dimensions A second example origin 0 0 3 5 is for plotting in three dimensions Center Similar to origin this keyword will position the array such that its center lies at the point given by the tuple For example center 0 0 Center does not apply when the size of the array is Inf Rotate The transpose and flip commands provide some flexibility in generating and orienting coordinates However for full degrees of freedom it is possible to apply a rotational vector described by a rotational angle in two dimensions The rotate keyword applies to the two dimensional plane whether it be plot or splot The rotation is done with respect to the
60. and rendering text Syntax set term wxt lt n gt size lt width gt lt height gt background lt rgb_color gt no enhanced font lt font gt fontscale lt scale gt title title dashed solid dashlength lt dl gt no persist no raise no ctr1 close Multiple plot windows are supported set terminal wxt lt n gt directs the output to plot window number n The default window title is based on the window number This title can also be specified with the keyword title Plot windows remain open even when the gnuplot driver is changed to a different device A plot window can be closed by pressing the letter q while that window has input focus by choosing close from a window manager menu or with set term wxt lt n gt close The size of the plot area is given in pixels it defaults to 640x384 In addition to that the actual size of the window also includes the space reserved for the toolbar and the status bar When you resize a window the plot is immediately scaled to fit in the new size of the window Unlike other interactive terminals the wxt terminal scales the whole plot including fonts and linewidths and keeps its global aspect ratio constant leaving an empty space painted in gray If you type replot click the replot icon in the terminal toolbar or type a new plot command the new plot will completely fit in the window and the font size and the linewidths will be reset to their defaults T
61. arbitrary number of columns for which information must be specified at the command line For example array record format and using can indicate the size format and dimension of data There are a variety of useful commands for skipping file headers and changing endianess There are a set of commands for positioning and translating data since often coordinates are not part of the file when uniform sampling is inherent in the data Different from matrix binary or ASCII general binary does not treat the generated columns as 1 2 or 3 in the using list Rather column 1 begins with column 1 of the file or as specified in the format list There are global default settings for the various binary options which may be set using the same syntax as the options when used as part of the s plot lt filename gt binary command This syntax is set datafile binary The general rule is that common command line specified parameters override file extracted parameters which override default parameters Binary matrix is the default binary format when no keywords specific to binary general are given i e array record format filetype gt General binary data can be entered at the command line via the special file name However this is intended for use through a pipe where programs can exchange binary data not for keyboards There is no end of record character for binary data Gnuplot continues reading from a pipe until it has read the number
62. automatically offset a small distance after starting a zoom region with button 3 This can be useful to avoid a tiny or even empty zoom region zoomjump is off by default Multiplot The command set multiplot places gnuplot in the multiplot mode in which several plots are placed on the same page window or screen Syntax set multiplot layout lt rows gt lt cols gt rowsfirst columnsfirst downwards upwards title lt page title gt scale lt xscale gt lt yscale gt offset lt xoff gt lt yoff gt unset multiplot For some terminals no plot is displayed until the command unset multiplot is given which causes the entire page to be drawn and then returns gnuplot to its normal single plot mode For other terminals each separate plot command produces an updated display either by redrawing all previous ones and the newly added plot or by just adding the new plot to the existing display The area to be used by the next plot is not erased before doing the new plot The clear command can be used to do this if wanted as is typically the case for inset plots Any labels or arrows that have been defined will be drawn for each plot according to the current size and origin unless their coordinates are defined in the screen system Just about everything else that can be set is applied to each plot too If you want something to appear only once on the page for instance a single time stamp you ll need to put
63. badly by the automatic layout algorithm in this case mirror tells gnuplot to put unlabeled tics at the same positions on the opposite border nomirror does what you think it does in and out change the tic marks to be drawn inwards or outwards With scale the size of the tic marks can be adjusted If lt minor gt is not specified it is 0 5 lt major gt The default size 1 0 for major tics and 0 5 for minor tics is requested by scale default rotate asks gnuplot to rotate the text through 90 degrees which will be done if the terminal driver in use supports text rotation norotate cancels this rotate by lt ang gt asks for rotation by lt ang gt degrees supported by some terminal types The defaults are border mirror norotate for tics on the x and y axes and border nomirror norotate for tics on the x2 and y2 axes For the z axis the default is nomirror The lt offset gt is specified by either x y or x y z and may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system lt offset gt is the offset of the tics texts from their default positions while the default coordinate system is character See coordinates p for details nooffset switches off the offset By default tic labels are justified automatically depending on the axis and rotation angle to produce aes thetically pleasing results If this is not desired justification can be overridden with an explicit left right or center keyword auto
64. be interrupted and subsequently halted from the keyboard see fit p 63 The user variable FIT CONVERGED contains s 1 if the previous fit command terminated due to convergence it contains 0 if the previous fit terminated for any other reason Often the function to be fitted will be based on a model or theory that attempts to describe or predict the behaviour of the data Then fit can be used to find values for the free parameters of the model to determine how well the data fits the model and to estimate an error range for each parameter See fit error_estimates p A Alternatively in curve fitting functions are selected independent of a model on the basis of experience as to which are likely to describe the trend of the data with the desired resolution and a minimum number of parameters functions The fit solution then provides an analytic representation of the curve However if all you really want is a smooth curve through your data points the smooth option to plot may be what you ve been looking for rather than fit Error estimates In fit the term error is used in two different contexts data error estimates and parameter error estimates Data error estimates are used to calculate the relative weight of each data point when determining the weighted sum of squared residuals WSSR or chisquare They can affect the parameter estimates since they determine how much influence the deviation of each data point from the
65. behaves as it does in C The first argument a which must be an integer is evaluated If it is true non zero the second argument b is evaluated and returned otherwise the third argument c is evaluated and returned The ternary operator is very useful both in constructing piecewise functions and in plotting points only when certain conditions are met 0 Examples Plot a function that is to equal sin x for 0 lt x lt 1 1 x for 1 lt x lt 2 and undefined elsewhere f x O lt x amp amp x lt 1 sin x 1 lt x amp amp x lt 2 1 x 1 0 plot f x Note that gnuplot quietly ignores undefined values so the final branch of the function 1 0 will produce no plottable points Note also that f x will be plotted as a continuous function across the discontinuity if a line style is used To plot it discontinuously create separate functions for the two pieces Parametric functions are also useful for this purpose For data in a file plot the average of the data in columns 2 and 3 against the datum in column 1 but only if the datum in column 4 is non negative plot file using 1 4 lt 0 1 0 2 3 2 For an explanation of the using syntax please see plot datafile using p 84 Summation A summation expression has the form sum lt var gt lt start gt lt end gt lt expression gt lt var gt is treated as an integer variable that takes on successive integral values from lt sta
66. but 2 2 4 The factorial operator returns a real number to allow a greater range Binary The following is a list of all the binary operators and their usages Binary Operators Symbol Example Explanation axrx b exponentiation axb multiplication a b division ahb modulo atb addition a b subtraction a equality l a b inequality lt a lt b less than lt a lt b less than or equal to gt a gt b greater than gt a gt b greater than or equal to amp akb bitwise AND j a b bitwise exclusive OR alb bitwise inclusive OR amp amp ak amp b logical AND allb logical OR a b assignment A a b serial evaluation A B string concatenation eq A eq B string equality ne A ne B string inequality Starred explanations indicate that the operator requires integer arguments Capital letters A and B indicate that the operator requires string arguments Logical AND amp amp and OR short circuit the way they do in C That is the second amp amp operand is not evaluated if the first is false the second operand is not evaluated if the first is true Serial evaluation occurs only in parentheses and is guaranteed to proceed in left to right order The value of the rightmost subexpression is returned Ternary There is a single ternary operator Ternary Operator Symbol Example Explanation a b c ternary operation The ternary operator
67. by a grid with lt rows gt rows and lt cols gt columns This grid is filled rows first or columns first depending on whether the corresponding option is given in the multiplot command The stack of plots can grow downwards or upwards Default is rowsfirst and downwards Each plot can be scaled by scale and shifted with offset if the y values for scale or offset are omitted the x value will be used unset multiplot will turn off the automatic layout and restore the values of set size and set origin as they were before set multiplot layout Example set size 1 1 set origin 0 0 set multiplot layout 3 2 columnsfirst scale 1 1 0 9 up to 6 plot commands here unset multiplot The above example will produce 6 plots in 2 columns filled top to bottom left to right Each plot will have a horizontal size of 1 1 2 and a vertical size of 0 9 3 See also multiplot demo multiplt dem Mx2tics Minor tic marks along the x2 top axis are controlled by set mx2tics Please see set mxtics p 130 Mxtics Minor tic marks along the x axis are controlled by set mxtics They can be turned off with unset mxtics Similar commands control minor tics along the other axes Syntax set mxtics lt freq gt default unset mxtics show mxtics The same syntax applies to mytics mztics mx2tics my2tics and mcbtics lt freq gt is the number of sub intervals NOT the number of minor tics between major tics the default for a linear axis
68. canvas coordinates See coordinates p 22 In all cases the radius is calculated relative to the horizontal scale of the axis graph or canvas Any disparity between the horizontal and vertical scaling will be corrected for so that the result is always a circle By default a full circle is drawn The optional qualifier arc specifies a starting angle and ending angle in degrees for one arc of the circle The arc is always drawn counterclockwise Polygon Syntax set object lt index gt polygon from lt position gt to lt position gt to lt position gt or from lt position gt rto lt position gt rto lt position gt The position of the polygon may be specified by giving the position of a sequence of vertices These may be given in axis graph or screen coordinates If relative coordinates are used rto then the coordinate type must match that of the previous vertex See coordinates p 22 Example set object 1 polygon from 0 0 to 1 1 to 2 0 set object 1 fc rgb cyan fillstyle solid 1 0 border 1t 1 Offsets Offsets provide a mechanism to put an empty boundary around the data inside an autoscaled graph The offsets only affect the x1 and yl axes and only in 2D plot commands Syntax set offsets lt left gt lt right gt lt top gt lt bottom gt unset offsets show offsets Each offset may be a constant or an expression Each defaults to 0 By default the left and right offsets are given
69. canvas terminal are mouseable The additional keyword mousing causes the standalone mode to add a mouse tracking box underneath the plot It also adds a link to a javascript file gnuplot_mouse js and to a stylesheet for the mouse box gnuplot_mouse css in the same local or URL directory as canvastext js The name option creates a file containing only javascript Both the javascript function it contains and the id of the canvas element that it draws onto are taken from the following string parameter The commands set term canvas name fishplot set output fishplot js will create a file containing a javascript function fishplot that will draw onto a canvas with id fishplot An html page that invokes this javascript function must also load the canvastext js function as described above A minimal html file to wrap the fishplot created above might be lt html gt lt head gt lt script src canvastext js gt lt script gt lt script src gnuplot_common js gt lt script gt lt head gt lt body onload fishplot gt lt script src fishplot js gt lt script gt lt canvas id fishplot width 600 height 400 gt lt div id err_msg gt No support for HTML 5 canvas element lt div gt lt canvas gt lt body gt lt html gt The individual plots drawn on this canvas will have names fishplot_plot_1 fishplot_plot_2 and so on These can be referenced by external javascript routines for example gnuplot tog
70. containing the plots By default Metapost passes all text through TeX This has the advantage of allowing essentially any TeX symbols in titles and labels Syntax set term mp color colour monochrome solid dashed notex tex latex magnification lt magsize gt psnfss psnfss version7 nopsnfss prologues lt value gt a4paper amstex lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt The option color causes lines to be drawn in color on a printer or display that supports it monochrome or nothing selects black lines The option solid draws solid lines while dashed or nothing selects lines with different patterns of dashes If solid is selected but color is not nearly all lines will be identical This may occasionally be useful so it is allowed The option notex bypasses TeX entirely therefore no TeX code can be used in labels under this option This is intended for use on old plot files or files that make frequent use of common characters like and that require special handling in TeX The option tex sets the terminal to output its text for TeX to process The option latex sets the terminal to output its text for processing by LaTeX This allows things like frac for fractions which LaTeX knows about but TeX does not Note that you must set the environment variable TEX to the name of your LaTeX executable normally latex if you use this option or use mpost tex lt name of LaTeX executable gt Oth
71. default is to use a different color for each line type Selecting monochome will use black for all linetypes in which case you probably want to select dashed to distinguish line types Even in in mono mode you can still use explicit colors for filled areas or linestyles where lt font gt is the name of the default font to use default Helvetica and lt fontsize gt is the font size in points default 12 For help on which fonts are available or how to install new ones please see the documentation for your local installation of pdflib The enhanced option enables enhanced text processing features subscripts superscripts and mixed fonts See enhanced p 24 The width of all lines in the plot can be increased by the factor lt n gt specified in linewidth Similarly dashlength is a multiplier for the default dash spacing rounded sets line caps and line joins to be rounded butt is the default butt caps and mitered joins The default size for PDF output is 5 inches by 3 inches The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in inches but other units are possible currently only cm Pdfcairo The pdfcairo terminal device generates output in pdf The actual drawing is done via cairo a 2D graphics library and pango a library for laying out and rendering text Syntax set term pdfcairo no enhanced mono color solid dashed font lt font gt fontscale lt scale
72. e in non interactive mode unless you specify as the last command line option It will also not show the text window at all in this mode only the plot By giving the optional argument persist same as for gnuplot under x11 former Windows only options noend or noend are still accepted as well will not close gnuplot Contrary to gnuplot on other operating systems gnuplot s interactive command line is accessible after the persist option The plot window remains open when the gnuplot terminal is changed with a set term command The plot window can be closed with set term windows close gnuplot supports different methods to create printed output on Windows see windows printing p 224 The windows terminal supports data exchange with other programs via clipboard and EMF files see graph menu p 224 You can also use the terminal emf to create EMF files Graph menu The gnuplot graph window has the following options on a pop up menu accessed by pressing the right mouse button or selecting Options from the system menu Copy to Clipboard copies a bitmap and an enhanced Metafile picture Save as EMF allows the user to save the current graph window as enhanced metafile Print prints the graphics windows using a Windows printer driver and allows selection of the printer and scaling of the output The output produced by Print is not as good as that from gnuplot s own printer drivers See also windows printing p 224
73. entire area addressable by gnuplot On a desktop it is a full window on a plotter it is a single sheet of paper in svga mode it is the full monitor screen A screen may contain one or more plots A plot is defined by an abscissa and an ordinate although these need not actually appear on it as well as the margins and any text written therein A plot contains one graph A graph is defined by an abscissa and an ordinate although these need not actually appear on it A graph may contain one or more lines A line is a single function or data set Line is also a plotting style The word will also be used in sense a line of text Presumably the context will remove any ambiguity The lines on a graph may have individual names These may be listed together with a sample of the plotting style used to represent them in the key sometimes also called the legend The word title occurs with multiple meanings in gnuplot In this document it will always be preceded by the adjective plot line or key to differentiate among them A 2D graph may have up to four labeled axes The names of the four axes are x for the axis along the bottom border of the plot y for the axis along the left border x2 for the top border and y2 for the right border See axes p 73 A 3D graph may have up to three labeled axes x y and z It is not possible to say where on the graph any particular axis will fall because you can change the
74. example set ylabel r shortstack first line second line The back option of set label commands is handled slightly different than in other terminals Labels using back are printed behind all other elements of the plot while labels using front are printed above everything else The driver produces two different files one for the eps part of the figure and one for the LaTeX part The name of the LaTeX file is taken from the set output command The name of the eps file is derived by replacing the file extension normally tex with eps instead There is no LaTeX output if no output file is given Remember to close the output file before next plot unless in multiplot mode In your LaTeX documents use input filename to include the figure The eps file is included by the command includegraphics so you must also include usepackage graphicx in the LaTeX preamble If you want to use coloured text option textcolour you also have to include usepackage color in the LaTeX preamble Pdf files can be made from the eps file using epstopdf If the graphics package is properly configured the LaTeX files can also be processed by pdflatex without changes using the pdf files instead of the eps files The behaviour concerning font selection depends on the header mode In all cases the given font size is used for the calculation of proper spacing When not using the standalone mode the actual LaTeX font and font si
75. file data with variable pointsize read from column 4 plot data using 1 2 4 with points pt 5 pointsize variable This plots two data sets with lines differing only by weight plot di t good w 1 1t 2 1w 3 d2 t bad w 1 1t 2 1w 1 This plots filled curve of x x and a color stripe plot x x with filledcurve closed 40 with filledcurve y1 10 This plots x x and a color box plot x x x gt 5 48 x lt 5 40 1 0 with filledcurve y1 10 lt 8 This plots a surface with color lines splot x x y y with line palette This plots two color surfaces at different altitudes splot x x y y with pm3d x x yx y with pm3d at t Print The print command prints the value of lt expression gt to the screen It is synonymous with pause 0 lt expression gt may be anything that gnuplot can evaluate that produces a number or it can be a string Syntax print lt expression gt lt expression gt See expressions p 25 The output file can be set with set print Pwd The pwd command prints the name of the working directory to the screen Note that if you wish to store the current directory into a string variable or use it in string expressions then you can use variable GPVAL_PWD see show variables all p 156 Quit The exit and quit commands and END OF FILE character will exit gnuplot Each of these commands will clear the output device as does the clear command before exiting 9 Raise
76. file or provide them globally in your TeX file for example by using newif ifGPblacktext GPblacktexttrue in the preamble of your document The local assignment is only done if no global value is given When using the cairolatex terminal give the name of the TeX file in the set output command including the file extension normally tex The graph filename is generated by replacing the extension If using the standalone mode a complete LaTeX header is added to the LaTeX file and inc is added to the filename of the gaph file The standalone mode generates a TeX file that produces output with the correct size when using dvips pdfTeX or VTeX The default input generates a file that has to be included into a LaTeX document using the input command If a font other than or default is given it is interpreted as LaTeX font name It contains up to three parts separated by a comma fontname fontseries fontshape If the default fontshape or fontseries are requested they can be omitted Thus the real syntax for the fontname is fontname fontseries fontshape The naming convention for all parts is given by the LaTeX font scheme The fontname is 3 to 4 characters long and is built as follows One character for the font vendor two characters for the name of the font and optionally one additional character for special fonts e g j for fonts with old style numerals or x for expert fonts The names of many font
77. fit may be interrupted by pressing Ctrl C After the current iteration completes you have the option to 1 stop the fit and accept the current parameter values 2 continue the fit 3 execute a gnuplot command as specified by the environment variable FIT SCRIPT The default for FIT SCRIPT is replot so if you had previously plotted both the data and the fitting function in one graph you can display the current state of the fit Once fit has finished the update command may be used to store final values in a file for subsequent use as a parameter file See update p 175 for details Adjustable parameters There are two ways that via can specify the parameters to be adjusted either directly on the command line or indirectly by referencing a parameter file The two use different means to set initial values Adjustable parameters can be specified by a comma separated list of variable names after the via keyword Any variable that is not already defined is created with an initial value of 1 0 However the fit is more likely to converge rapidly if the variables have been previously declared with more appropriate starting values In a parameter file each parameter to be varied and a corresponding initial value are specified one per line in the form varname value Comments marked by and blank lines are permissible The special form varname value FIXED means that the variable is treated as a fixed paramet
78. for plot d n plot data 4 title Title for plot 4 plot data 4 title graph4 plot data 4 title Title for plot four plot data 4 title graph 4 Since integers are promoted to strings when operated on by the string concatenation operator the following method also works N 4 plot data N title Title for plot N In general elements on the command line will only be evaluated as possible string variables if they are not otherwise recognizable as part of the normal gnuplot syntax So the following sequence of commands is legal although probably should be avoided so as not to cause confusion plot my_datafile dat title My Title plot plot title title There are three binary operators that require string operands the string concatenation operator the string equality operator eq and the string inequality operator ne The following example will print TRUE if A B eq AB print TRUE See also the two string formatting functions gprintf p 113 and sprintf p 27 Substrings can be specified by appending a range specifier to any string string variable or string valued function The range specifier has the form begin end where begin is the index of the first character of the substring and end is the index of the last character of the substring The first character has index 1 The begin or end fields may be empty or contain to indicate the true start or end of the o
79. gnuplot persist e set title Sine curve plot sin x To set user defined variables a and s prior to executing commands from a file gnuplot e a 2 s file png input gpl Canvas size In earlier versions of gnuplot some terminal types used the values from set size to control also the size of the output canvas others did not The use of set size for this purpose was deprecated in version 4 2 Since version 4 4 almost all terminals now behave as follows set term lt terminal_type gt size lt XX gt lt YY gt controls the size of the output file or canvas Please see individual terminal documentation for allowed values of the size parameters By default the plot will fill this canvas set size lt XX gt lt YY gt scales the plot itself relative to the size of the canvas Scale values less than 1 will cause the plot to not fill the entire canvas Scale values larger than 1 will cause only a portion of the plot to fit on the canvas Please be aware that setting scale values larger than 1 may cause problems on some terminal types 2 The major exception to this convention is the PostScript driver which by default continues to act as it has in earlier versions Be warned that the next version of gnuplot may change the default behaviour of the PostScript driver as well Example set size 0 5 0 5 set term png size 600 400 set output figure png plot data with lines These commands will produce an
80. gnuplot textColor black gnuplot borderColor black gnuplot axisColor black gnuplot linel Color red gnuplot line2Color green gnuplot line3Color blue gnuplot line4Color magenta gnuplot line5Color cyan gnuplot line6Color sienna gnuplot line7Color orange gnuplot line8Color coral The command line syntax for these is for example Example gnuplot background coral Grayscale_resources When gray is selected gnuplot honors the following resources for grayscale or color displays shown here with their default values Note that the default background is black gnuplot background black gnuplot textGray white gnuplot borderGray gray50 gnuplot axisGray gray50 enuplot linel Gray gray100 gnuplot line2Gray gray60 gnuplot line3Gray gray80 gnuplot line4Gray gray40 enuplot line5Gray gray90 gnuplot line6Gray gray50 gnuplot line7Gray gray70 gnuplot line8Gray gray30 Line_resources gnuplot honors the following resources for setting the width in pixels of plot lines shown here with their default values 0 or 1 means a minimal width line of 1 pixel width A value of 2 or 3 may improve the appearance of some plots gnuplot borderWidth 2 gnuplot axisWidth 0 gnuplot linel Width gnuplot line2 Width gnuplot line3 Width gnuplot line4 Width gnuplot lined Width gnuplot line6 Width gnuplot line7 Width gnuplot line8 Width FOC GGO GCO O gnuplot hono
81. gt linewidth lt lw gt rounded butt dashlength lt d1 gt size lt XxX gt unit lt YY gt unit This terminal supports an enhanced text mode which allows font and other formatting commands sub scripts superscripts etc to be embedded in labels and other text strings The enhanced text mode syntax is shared with other gnuplot terminal types See enhanced p for more details The width of all lines in the plot can be modified by the factor lt lw gt specified in linewidth The default linewidth is 0 25 points 1 PostScript point 1 72 inch 0 353 mm rounded sets line caps and line joins to be rounded butt is the default butt caps and mitered joins The default size for the output is 5 inches x 3 inches The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in inches but other units are possible currently only cm Screen coordinates always run from 0 0 to 1 0 along the full length of the plot edges as specified by the size option lt font gt is in the format FontFace FontSize i e the face and the size comma separated in a single string FontFace is a usual font face name such as Arial If you do not provide FontFace the pdfcairo terminal will use Sans FontSize is the font size in points If you do not provide it the pdfcairo terminal will use a nominal font size of 12 points However the default fontscale parameter for this terminal is 0 5 so
82. gt lt size gt textcolor tc lt colorspec gt default no enhanced show title If lt offset gt is specified by either x y or x y z the title is moved by the given offset It may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system See coordinates p for details By default the character coordinate system is used For example set title offset 0 1 will change only the y offset of the title moving the title down by roughly the height of one character The size of a character depends on both the font and the terminal lt font gt is used to specify the font with which the title is to be written the units of the font lt size gt depend upon which terminal is used textcolor lt colorspec gt changes the color of the text lt colorspec gt can be a linetype an rgb color or a palette mapping See help for colorspec p and palette p 138 noenhanced requests that the title not be processed by the enhanced text mode parser even if enhanced text mode is currently active set title with no parameters clears the title See syntax p for details about the processing of backslash sequences and the distinction between single and double quotes Tmargin The command set tmargin sets the size of the top margin Please see set margin p 126 for details Trange The set trange command sets the parametric range used to compute x and y values when in parametric or polar modes
83. have more differences See also show plot p 134 Data file Splot like plot can display from a file Syntax splot lt file_name gt binary lt binary list gt nonuniform matrix index lt index list gt levery lt every list gt using lt using list gt The special filenames and are permitted as in plot See special filenames p 82 In brief binary and matrix indicate that the data are in a special form index selects which data sets in a multi data set file are to be plotted every specifies which datalines subsets within a single data set are to be plotted and using determines how the columns within a single record are to be interpreted The options index and every behave the same way as with plot using does so also except that the using list must provide three entries instead of two The plot options thru and smooth are not available for splot but cntrparam and dgrid3d provide limited smoothing capabilities Data file organization is essentially the same as for plot except that each point is an x y z triple If only a single value is provided it will be used for z the datablock number will be used for y and the index of the data point in the datablock will be used for x If two or four values are provided gnuplot uses the last value for calculating the color in pm3d plots Three values are interpreted as an x y z triple Additional values are generally used as errors which can
84. in units of the first x axis the top and bottom offsets in units of the first y axis Alternatively you may specify the offsets as a fraction of the total axis range by using the keyword graph A positive offset expands the axis range in the specified direction e g a positive bottom offset makes ymin more negative Negative offsets while permitted can have unexpected interactions with autoscaling and clipping To prevent the auto scaling from further adjusting your axis ranges it is useful to also specify set auto fix Example set auto fix set offsets graph 0 05 0 2 2 plot sin x This graph of sin x will have a y range 3 3 because the function will be autoscaled to 1 1 and the vertical offsets are each two The x range will be 11 10 because the default is 10 10 and it has been expanded to the left by 0 05 of that total range Origin The set origin command is used to specify the origin of a plotting surface i e the graph and its margins on the screen The coordinates are given in the screen coordinate system see coordinates p 22 for information about this system Syntax set origin lt x origin gt lt y origin gt Output By default screens are displayed to the standard output The set output command redirects the display to the specified file or device Syntax set output lt filename gt show output The filename must be enclosed in quotes If the filename is omitted any output file
85. is not a better fit in either a statistical sense charac terized by an improved goodness of fit criterion or a physical sense with a solution more consistent with the model Depending on the problem it may be desirable to fit with various sets of starting values covering a reasonable range for each parameter Tips Here are some tips to keep in mind to get the most out of fit They re not very organized so you ll have to read them several times until their essence has sunk in The two forms of the via argument to fit serve two largely distinct purposes The via file form is best used for possibly unattended batch operation where you just supply the startup values in a file and can later use update to copy the results back into another or the same parameter file The via varl var2 form is best used interactively where the command history mechanism may be used to edit the list of parameters to be fitted or to supply new startup values for the next try This is particularly useful for hard problems where a direct fit to all parameters at once won t work without good starting values To find such you can iterate several times fitting only some of the parameters until the values are close enough to the goal that the final fit to all parameters at once will work Make sure that there is no mutual dependency among parameters of the function you are fitting For example don t try to fit a exp x b because a exp x b a exp b
86. is very convenient to use the plot iteration feature See iteration p 71 For example to create stacked histograms of the data in columns 3 through 8 set style histogram columnstacked plot for i 3 8 datafile using i title columnhead s Image The image rgbimage and rgbalpha plotting styles all project a uniformly sampled grid of data values onto a plane in either 2D or 3D The input data may be an actual bitmapped image perhaps converted from a standard format such as PNG or a simple array of numerical values This figure illustrates generation of a heat map from an ED Heat map feom incline array of val ues array of scalar values The current palette is used to map o 1 z 3 4 each value onto the color assigned to the corresponding pixel lot matrix with image rm FON NOOO W Bre OF woro PR 00 oona Each pixel data point of the input 2D image will be come a rectangle or parallelipiped in the plot The co ordinates of each data point will determine the center of the parallelipiped That is an M x N set of data will form an image with M x N pixels This is differ ent from the pm3d plotting style where an M x N set of data will form a surface of M 1 x N 1 elements The scan directions for a binary image data grid can be further controlled by additional keywords See binary keywords flipx p 77 keywords center p 77 and keywords rotate p 77 EGE image mapped onto a plane in
87. label x_2 noenhanced Enhanced Text Control Codes Control Example Result Explanation a x a superscript a a_x ax subscript a b_ cd aba phantom box occupies no width amp d amp space b duuuuub inserts space of specified length 7 a 8 a overprints on a raised by 8 times the current fontsize Braces can be used to place multiple character text where a single character is expected e g 27410 To change the font and or size use the full form fontname fontsize fontscale text Thus Symbol 20 G is a 20 pt GAMMA and 0 75 K is a K at three quarters of whatever fontsize is currently in effect The character MUST be the first character after the The phantom box is useful for aQ b_c to align superscripts and subscripts but does not work well for overwriting an accent on a letter For the latter it is much better to use an encoding e g iso_8859_1 or utf8 that contains a large variety of letters with accents or other diacritical marks See set encoding p 111 Since the box is non spacing it is sensible to put the shorter of the subscript or superscript in the box that is after the Space equal in length to a string can be inserted using the amp character Thus abc amp def ghi would produce abc ghi The character causes the next character or bracketed text to be overprinted by the following character s or bracket
88. lie in the range 0 255 Transparency The rgbalpha plotting style assumes that each pixel of input data contains an alpha value in the range 0 255 A pixel with alpha 0 is purely transparent and does not alter the underlying contents of the plot A pixel with alpha 255 is purely opaque All terminal types can handle these two extreme cases A pixel with 0 lt alpha lt 255 is partially transparent Only a few terminal types can handle this correctly other terminals will approximate this by treating alpha as being either O or 255 5 Image failsafe Some terminal drivers provide code to optimize rendering of image data within a rectangular 2D area However this code is known to be imperfect This optimized code may be disabled by using the keyword failsafe E g plot data with image failsafe Impulses The impulses style displays a vertical line from y 0 to the y value of each point 2D or from z 0 to the z value of each point 3D Note that the y or z values may be negative Data from additional columns can be used to control the color of each impulse To use this style Ud with impulses effectively in 3D plots it is useful to choose thick lines linewidth gt 1 This approximates a 3D bar chart 1 column y 2 columns x y line from x 0 to x y 2D 3 columns x y z line from x y 0 to x y z 3D Labels The labels style reads coordinates and text from a data Ajaccio file an
89. linecolor rgb sea green Contour set contour enables contour drawing for surfaces This option is available for splot only It requires grid data see grid_data p 172 for more details If contours are desired from non grid data set dgrid3d can be used to create an appropriate grid Syntax set contour base surface both unset contour show contour The three options specify where to draw the contours base draws the contours on the grid base where the x ytics are placed surface draws the contours on the surfaces themselves and both draws the contours on both the base and the surface If no option is provided the default is base See also set cntrparam p 103 for the parameters that affect the drawing of contours and set clabel p 102 for control of labelling of the contours The surface can be switched off see set surface p 152 giving a contour only graph Though it is possible to use set size to enlarge the plot to fill the screen more control over the output format can be obtained by writing the contour information to a file and rereading it as a 2D datafile plot unset surface set contour set cntrparam set table filename splot unset table contour info now in filename set term lt whatever gt plot filename In order to draw contours the data should be organized as grid data In such a file all the points for a single y isoline are listed then all the points for th
90. lt point_size gt pointinterval pi lt interval gt palette unset style line show style line default sets all line style parameters to those of the linetype with that same index If the linestyle lt index gt already exists only the given parameters are changed while all others are preserved If not all undefined values are set to the default values Line styles created by this mechanism do not replace the default linetype styles both may be used Line styles are temporary They are lost whenever you execute a reset command To redefine the linetype itself please see set linetype p 124 The line and point types default to the index value The exact symbol that is drawn for that index value may vary from one terminal type to another The line width and point size are multipliers for the current terminal s default width and size but note that lt point_size gt here is unaffected by the multiplier given by the commandset pointsize The pointinterval controls the spacing between points in a plot drawn with style linespoints The default is 0 every point is drawn For example set style line N pi 3 defines a linestyle that uses pointtype N pointsize and linewidth equal to the current defaults for the terminal and will draw every 3rd point in plots using with linespoints A negative value for the interval is treated the same as a positive value except that some terminals will try to interrupt the line where it passes thr
91. lt width gt lt height gt position lt x gt lt y gt close Multiple plot windows are supported set terminal win lt n gt directs the output to plot window number n color and monochrome select colored or mono output dashed and solid select dashed or solid lines Note that color defaults to solid whereas monochrome defaults to dashed enhanced enables enhanced text mode features subscripts superscripts and mixed fonts see enhanced text p for more information lt fontspec gt is in the format lt fontface gt lt fontsize gt where lt fontface gt is the name of a valid Windows font and lt fontsize gt is the size of the font in points and both components are optional Note that in previous versions of gnuplot the font statement could be left out and lt fontsize gt could be given as a number without double quotes This is no longer supported linewidth and fontscale can be used to scale the width of lines and the size of text title changes the title of the graph window size defines the width and height of the window in pixel and position the origin of the window i e the position of the top left corner on the screen again in pixel These options override any default settings from the wgnuplot ini file Other options may be changed using the graph menu or the initialization file wgnuplot ini The Windows version normally terminates immediately as soon as the end of any files given as command line arguments is reached i
92. may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is not ambiguous Any number of commands may appear on a line separated by semicolons Strings may be set off by either single or double quotes although there are some subtle differences See syntax p and quotes p for more details Examples load filename cd dir Commands may extend over several input lines by ending each line but the last with a backslash 1 The backslash must be the last character on each line The effect is as if the backslash and newline were not there That is no white space is implied nor is a comment terminated Therefore commenting out a continued line comments out the entire command see comments p 22 But note that if an error occurs somewhere on a multi line command the parser may not be able to locate precisely where the error is and in that case will not necessarily point to the correct line In this document curly braces denote optional arguments and a vertical bar separates mutually exclusive choices Gnuplot keywords or help topics are indicated by backquotes or boldface where available Angle brackets lt gt are used to mark replaceable tokens In many cases a default value of the token will be taken for optional arguments if the token is omitted but these cases are not always denoted with braces around the angle brackets For built in help on any topic type help followed by the name of the topic or help to get a menu of a
93. model RGB file 001 oOrRrrFO Orere ooo Binary palette files are supported as well see binary general p 74 Example put 64 triplets of R G B doubles into file palette bin and load it by set palette file palette bin binary record 64 using 1 2 3 Gamma correction For gray mappings gamma correction can be turned on by set palette gamma lt gamma gt lt gamma gt defaults to 1 5 which is quite suitable for most terminals The gamma correction is applied to the cubehelix color palette family but not to other palette coloring schemes However you may easily implement gamma correction for explicit color functions Example set palette model RGB set palette functions gray 0 64 gray 0 67 gray 0 70 To use gamma correction with interpolated gradients specify intermediate gray values with appropriate colors Instead of set palette defined 0000 1111 use g set palette defined 0000 0 5 73 73 73 1111 or even more intermediate points until the linear interpolation fits the gamma corrected interpolation well enough Postscript In order to reduce the size of postscript files the gray value and not all three calculated r g b values are written to the file Therefore the analytical formulae are coded directly in the postscript language as a header just before the pm3d drawing see g and cF definitions Usually it makes sense to write therein definitions of only the 3 formulae used But for multiplot or a
94. of basic data Addi tional input columns may be used to provide information such as variable line or fill color see rgbcolor variable p 35 2 columns x y 3 columns x y x_width With boxes E The width of the box is obtained in one of three ways If the input data has a third column this will be used to set the width of the box If not if a width has been set using the set boxwidth command this will be used If neither of these is available the width of each box will be calculated automatically so that it touches the adjacent boxes The interior of the boxes is drawn according to the current fillstyle See set style fill p 148 for details Alternatively a new fillstyle may be specified in the plot command For fillstyle empty the box is not filled For fillstyle solid the box is filled with a solid rectangle of the current drawing color There is an optional parameter lt density gt that controls the fill density it runs from 0 background color to 1 current drawing color For fillstyle pattern the box is filled in the current drawing color with a pattern if supported by the terminal driver Examples To plot a data file with solid filled boxes with a small vertical space separating them bargraph set boxwidth 0 9 relative set style fill solid 1 0 plot file dat with boxes To plot a sine and a cosine curve in pattern filled boxes style set style fill pattern plot sin x with boxes cos x
95. of points declared in the array qualifier See binary matrix p or binary general p for more details The index keyword is not supported since the file format allows only one surface per file The every and using filters are supported using operates as if the data were read in the above triplet form Binary File Splot Demo General General binary data in which format information is not necessarily part of the file can be read by giving further details about the file format at the command line Although the syntax is slightly arcane to the casual user general binary is particularly useful for application programs using gnuplot and sending large amounts of data Syntax plot lt file_name gt binary lt binary list gt splot lt file_name gt binary lt binary list gt General binary format is activated by keywords in lt binary list gt pertaining to information about file struc ture i e array record format or filetype Otherwise matrix binary format is assumed See binary matrix p 170 for more details There are some standard file types that may be read for which details about the binary format may be extracted automatically Type show datafile binary at the command line for a list Otherwise details must be specified at the command line or set in the defaults Keywords are described below The keyword filetype in lt binary list gt controls the routine used to read the file i e the forma
96. of the key with successive labels entered above it This option is useful to force the vertical ordering of labels in the key to match the order of box types in a stacked histogram The lt height_increment gt is a number of character heights to be added to or subtracted from the height of the key box This is useful mainly when you are putting a box around the key and want larger borders around the key entries All plotted curves of plots and splots are titled according to the default option autotitles The automatic generation of titles can be suppressed by noautotitles then only those titles explicitly defined by s plot title will be drawn The command set key autotitle columnheader causes the first entry in each column of input data to be interpreted as a text string and used as a title for the corresponding plot If the quantity being plotted is a function of data from several columns gnuplot may be confused as to which column to draw the title from In this case it is necessary to specify the column explicitly in the plot command e g plot datafile using 2 3 4 title columnhead 3 with lines An overall title can be put on the key title lt text gt see also syntax p for the distinction between text in single or double quotes The key title uses the same justification as do the plot titles The defaults for set key are on right top vertical Right noreverse noinvert samplen 4 spacing 1 25 title
97. option lets you decide what the algorithm is to do with data points that are undefined missing data or undefined function values or exceed the given x y or z ranges Such points can either be plotted nevertheless or taken out of the input data set All surface elements touching a point that is taken out will be taken out as well thus creating a hole in the surface If lt level gt 3 equivalent to option noundefined no points will be thrown away at all This may produce all kinds of problems elsewhere so you should avoid this lt level gt 2 will throw away undefined points but keep the out of range ones lt level gt 1 the default will get rid of out ofrange points as well By specifying noaltdiagonal you can override the default handling of a special case can occur if undefined is active i e lt level gt is not 3 Each cell of the grid structured input surface will be divided in two triangles along one of its diagonals Normally all these diagonals have the same orientation relative to the grid If exactly one of the four cell corners is excluded by the undefined handler and this is on the usual diagonal both triangles will be excluded However if the default setting of altdiagonal is active the other diagonal will be chosen for this cell instead minimizing the size of the hole in the surface The bentover option controls what happens to another special case this time in conjunction with the trianglepattern For r
98. output file figure png that is 600 pixels wide and 400 pixels tall The plot will fill the lower left quarter of this canvas This is consistent with the way multiplot mode has always worked Command line editing Command line editing and command history are supported using either an external gnu readline library an external BSD libedit library or a built in equivalent This choice is a configuration option at the time gnuplot is built The editing commands of the built in version are given below Please note that the action of the DEL key is system dependent The gnu readline and BSD libedit libraries have their own documentation Command line Editing Commands Character Function Line Editing B move back a single character F move forward a single character A move to the beginning of the line E move to the end of the line H delete the previous character DEL delete the current character D delete current character EOF if line is empty K delete from current position to the end of line L R redraw line in case it gets trashed U delete the entire line W delete previous word History P move back through history N move forward through history Comments Comments are supported as follows a may appear in most places in a line and gnuplot will ignore the rest of the line It will not have this effect inside quotes inside numbers including complex numbers insi
99. selanar supports Selanar graph ics bitgraph supports BBN Bitgraph terminals None have any options Tek410x The tek410x terminal driver supports the 410x and 420x family of Tektronix terminals It has no options Texdraw The texdraw terminal driver supports the LaTeX texdraw environment It is intended for use with tex draw sty and texdraw tex in the texdraw package Points among other things are drawn using the LaTeX commands Diamond and Box These com mands no longer belong to the LaTeX2e core they are included in the latexsym package which is part of the base distribution and thus part of any LaTeX implementation Please do not forget to use this package It has no options Tgif Tgif is an X11 based drawing tool it has nothing to do with GIF The tgif driver supports different pointsizes with set pointsize different label fonts and font sizes e g set label Hallo at x y font Helvetica 34 and multiple graphs on the page The proportions of the axes are not changed Syntax set terminal tgif portrait landscape default lt x y gt monochrome color linewidth lw lt LW gt solid dashed font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt where lt x y gt specifies the number of graphs in the x and y directions on the page color enables color linewidth scales all linewidths by lt LW gt lt fontname gt is the name of a valid PostScript font and lt fontsize gt specifies th
100. sinh x print y prints 1 16933 0 154051 print asinh y prints 57 29578 5 729578 See also poldat dem polar plot using set angles demo Arrow Arbitrary arrows can be placed on a plot using the set arrow command Syntax set arrow lt tag gt from lt position gt to lt position gt set arrow lt tag gt from lt position gt rto lt position gt set arrow lt tag gt from lt position gt length lt coord gt angle lt ang gt set arrow lt tag gt arrowstyle as lt arrow_style gt set arrow lt tag gt nohead head backhead heads size lt headlength gt lt headangle gt lt backangle gt filled empty nofilled front back linestyle lt line_style gt linetype lt line_type gt linewidth lt line_width unset arrow lt tag gt show arrow lt tag gt lt tag gt is an integer that identifies the arrow If no tag is given the lowest unused tag value is assigned automatically The tag can be used to delete or change a specific arrow To change any attribute of an existing arrow use the set arrow command with the appropriate tag and specify the parts of the arrow to be changed The position of the first end point of the arrow is always specified by from The other end point can be specified using any of three different mechanisms The lt position gt s are specified by either x y or x y z and may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system Uns
101. size dxf uses seven colors white red yellow green cyan blue and magenta which can be changed only by modifying the source file Tf a black and white plotting device is used the colors are mapped to differing line thicknesses See the description of the AutoCad print plot command Dxy800a This terminal driver supports the Roland DXY800A plotter It has no options Eepic The eepic terminal driver supports the extended LaTeX picture environment It is an alternative to the latex driver The output of this terminal is intended for use with the eepic sty macro package for LaTeX To use it you need eepic sty epic sty and a printer driver that supports the tpic specials Tf your printer driver doesn t support those specials eepicemu sty will enable you to use some of them dvips and dvipdfm do support the tpic specials Syntax set terminal eepic default color dashed rotate size XX YY small tiny lt fontsize gt Options You can give options in any order you wish color causes gnuplot to produce color commands so that the graphs are colored Using this option you must include usepackage color in the preambel of your latex document dashed will allow dashed line types without this option only solid lines with varying thickness will be used dashed and color are mutually exclusive if color is specified then dashed will be ignored rotate will enable tru
102. successive linetypes You can override this default sequence by specifying a particular linetype for any function datafile or plot element Examples plot foo bar plot two files using linetypes 1 2 plot sin x linetype 4 terminal specific linetype color 4 plot sin x lt 1 black For many terminal types it is also possible to assign user defined colors using explicit rgb red green blue values named colors or color values that refer to the current pm3d palette Examples plot sin x lt rgb violet one of gnuplot s named colors plot sin x lt rgb FFOOFF explicit RGB triple in hexadecimal plot sin x lt palette cb 45 whatever color corresponds to 45 in the current cbrange of the palette plot sin x lt palette frac 0 3 fractional value along the palette See show colornames p L05 set palette p 138 cbrange p 168 For terminals that support dot dash patterns each default linetype has both a dot dash pattern and a default color Gnuplot does not currently provide a mechanism for changing the dot dash pattern so if you want both a particular dash pattern and a particular color you must first choose a linetype that has the required dash pattern then override the default color using the keyword linecolor abbreviated lc For example the postscript terminal provides a dashed blue line as linetype 3 The plot commands below use this same dash pattern for three plots one in blue the default ano
103. supported thickness sets the default line thickness which is 1 if not specified Overriding the thickness can be achieved by adding a multiple of 100 to the linetype value for a plot command In a similar way the depth of plot elements with respect to the default depth can be controlled by adding a multiple of 1000 to lt linetype gt The depth is then lt layer gt lt linetype gt 1000 and the thickness is lt linetype gt 1000 100 or if that is zero the default line thickness linewidth is a synonym for thickness Additional point plot symbols are also available with the fig driver The symbols can be used through pointtype values 100 above 50 with different fill intensities controlled by lt pointtype gt 5 and outlines in black for lt pointtype gt 10 lt 5 or in the current color Available symbols are 50 59 circles 60 69 squares 70 79 diamonds 80 89 upwards triangles 90 99 downwards triangles The size of these symbols is linked to the font size The depth of symbols is by default one less than the depth for lines to achieve nice error bars If lt pointtype gt is above 1000 the depth is lt layer gt lt pointtype gt 1000 1 If lt pointtype gt 1000 is above 100 the fill color is lt pointtype gt 1000 100 1 Available fill colors are from 1 to 9 black blue green cyan red magenta yellow white and dark blue in monochrome mode black for 1 to 6 and white for 7 to 9 See p
104. switchtobodyfont iwona 10 changes the font to Iwona at a size of 10pt Plain TeX users have to change the font size explicitly within the first argument The second should be set to the same value to get proper scaling of text boxes Strings have to be put in single or double quotes Double quoted strings may contain special characters like newlines n etc Mf The mf terminal driver creates an input file to the METAFONT program Thus a figure may be used in the TeX document in the same way as is a character To use a picture in a document the METAFONT program must be run with the output file from gnuplot as input Thus the user needs a basic knowledge of the font creating process and the procedure for including a new font in a document However if the METAFONT program is set up properly at the local site an unexperienced user could perform the operation without much trouble The text support is based on a METAFONT character set Currently the Computer Modern Roman font set is input but the user is in principal free to choose whatever fonts he or she needs The METAFONT source files for the chosen font must be available Each character is stored in a separate picture variable in METAFONT These variables may be manipulated rotated scaled etc when characters are needed The drawback is the interpretation time in the METAFONT program On some machines i e PC the limited amount of memory available may also cause problems if too
105. that the window be cleared momentarily before a new plot is displayed raise raises plot window after each plot noraise does not raise plot window after each plot persist plots windows survive after main gnuplot program exits The options are shown above in their command line syntax When entered as resources in Xdefaults they require a different syntax Example gnuplot gray on gnuplot also provides a command line option pointsize lt v gt and a resource gnuplot pointsize lt v gt to control the size of points plotted with the points plotting style The value v is a real number greater than 0 and less than or equal to ten used as a scaling factor for point sizes For example pointsize 2 uses points twice the default size and pointsize 0 5 uses points half the normal size Monochrome_options For monochrome displays gnuplot does not honor foreground or background colors The default is black on white rv or gnuplot reverse Video on requests white on black Color_resources For color displays gnuplot honors the following resources shown here with their default values or the greyscale resources The values may be color names as listed in the BE rgb txt file on your system hex adecimal RGB color specifications see BE documentation or a color name followed by a comma and an intensity value from 0 to 1 For example blue 0 5 means a half intensity blue gnuplot background white
106. the apparent font size is smaller than this if the pdf output is viewed at full size For example set term pdfcairo font Arial 12 set term pdfcairo font Arial to change the font face only set term pdfcairo font 12 to change the font size only set term pdfcairo font to reset the font name and size The fonts are retrieved from the usual fonts subsystems Under Windows those fonts are to be found and configured in the entry Fonts of the control panel Under UNIX they are handled by fontconfig Pango the library used to layout the text is based on utf 8 Thus the pdfcairo terminal has to convert from your encoding to utf 8 The default input encoding is based on your locale If you want to use another encoding make sure gnuplot knows which one you are using See encoding p 111 for more details Pango may give unexpected results with fonts that do not respect the unicode mapping With the Symbol font for example the pdfcairo terminal will use the map provided by http www unicode org to trans late character codes to unicode Note that the Symbol font is to be understood as the Adobe Symbol font distributed with Acrobat Reader as SY_____ PFB Alternatively the OpenSymbol font distributed with OpenOffice org as opens___ ttf offers the same characters Microsoft has distributed a Symbol font symbol ttf but it has a different character set with several missing or moved mathematic characters If you ex
107. the function may help to suggest another model Similarly a reduced chisquare less than 1 0 indicates WSSR is less than that expected for a random sample from the function with normally distributed errors The data error estimates may be too large the statistical assumptions may not be justified or the model function may be too general fitting fluctuations in a particular sample in addition to the underlying trends In the latter case a simpler function may be more appropriate You ll have to get used to both fit and the kind of problems you apply it to before you can relate the standard errors to some more practical estimates of parameter uncertainties or evaluate the significance of the correlation matrix Note that fit in common with most NLLS implementations minimizes the weighted sum of squared distances y f x 2 It does not provide any means to account for errors in the values of x only in y Also any outliers data points outside the normal distribution of the model will have an exaggerated effect on the solution Control There are a number of gnuplot variables that can be defined to affect fit Those which can be defined once gnuplot is running are listed under control_variables while those defined before starting gnuplot are listed under environment_variables s Control variables The default epsilon limit 1e 5 may be changed by declaring a value for FIT_LIMIT When the sum of squared resid
108. the gray for gray maps The normalized gray value can be further mapped into a color see set palette p for the complete description 2 splot of data file with two or four data columns The gray color value is obtained by using the last column coordinate instead of the z value thus allowing the color and the z coordinate be mutually independent This can be used for 4d data drawing Other notes 1 The term scan referenced above is used more among physicists than the term iso_curve referenced in gnuplot documentation and sources You measure maps recorded one scan after another scan that s why 2 The gray or color scale is a linear mapping of a continuous variable onto a smoothly varying palette of colors The mapping is shown in a rectangle next to the main plot This documentation refers to this as a colorbox and refers to the indexing variable as lying on the colorbox axis See set colorbox p 105 set cbrange p 168 3 To use pm3d coloring to generate a two dimensional plot rather than a 3D surface use set view map or set pm3d map Position Color surface can be drawn at the base or top then it is a gray color planar map or at z coordinates of surface points gray color surface This is defined by the at option with a string of up to 6 combinations of b t and s For instance at b plots at bottom only at st plots firstly surface and then top map while at bstbst will never by seriously us
109. the plot which includes the graph labels and margins Important note In earlier versions of gnuplot some terminal types used the values from set size to control also the size of the output canvas others did not In version 4 4 almost all terminals now follow the following convention set term lt terminal type gt size lt XX gt lt Y Y gt controls the size of the output file or canvas Please see individual terminal documentation for allowed values of the size parameters By default the plot will fill this canvas set size lt XX gt lt YY gt scales the plot itself relative to the size of the canvas Scale values less than 1 will cause the plot to not fill the entire canvas Scale values larger than 1 will cause only a portion of the plot to fit on the canvas Please be aware that setting scale values larger than 1 may cause problems on some terminal types ratio causes gnuplot to try to create a graph with an aspect ratio of lt r gt the ratio of the y axis length to the x axis length within the portion of the plot specified by lt xscale gt and lt yscale gt The meaning of a negative value for lt r gt is different If lt r gt 1 gnuplot tries to set the scales so that the unit has the same length on both the x and y axes This is equivalent to set view equal xy See set view equal p 157 If lt r gt 2 the unit on y has twice the length of the unit on x and so on The success of gnuplot in producin
110. the second will be ignored There are default using lists based upon the typical number of parameters associated with a certain plot type For example with image has a default of using 1 while with rgbimage has a default of using 1 2 3 Note that the special characters for using representing point line index generally should not be used for binary data There are keywords in lt binary list gt that control this Array Describes the sampling array dimensions associated with the binary file The coordinates will be generated by gnuplot A number must be specified for each dimension of the array For example array 10 20 means the underlying sampling structure is two dimensional with 10 points along the first x dimension and 20 points along the second y dimension A negative number indicates that data should be read until the end of file If there is only one dimension the parentheses may be omitted A colon can be used to separate the dimensions for multiple records For example array 25 35 indicates there are two one dimensional records in the file Note Gnuplot version 4 2 used the syntax array 128x128 rather than array 128 128 The older syntax is now deprecated but may still work if your copy of gnuplot was built to support backwards compatibility Record This keyword serves the same function as array having the same syntax However record causes gnuplot to not generate coordinate information This is for the case where such i
111. the standalone mode it is written into the preamble directly before the begin document command In the input mode it is placed directly after the begingroup command to ensure that all settings are local to the plot Examples Use T1 fontencoding change the text and math font to Times Roman as well as the sans serif font to Helvetica set terminal cairolatex standalone header usepackage T1 fontenc n usepackage mathptmx n usepackagefhelvet Use a boldface font in the plot not influencing the text outside the plot set terminal cairolatex input header bfseries If the file gnuplot cfg is found by LaTeX it is input in the preamble the LaTeX document when using standalone mode It can be used for further settings e g changing the document font to Times Roman Helvetica and Courier including math fonts handled by mathptmx sty usepackage mathptmx usepackage scaled 0 92 helvet usepackage courier The file gnuplot cfg is loaded before the header information given by the header command Thus you can use header to overwrite some of settings performed using gnuplot cfg Canvas The canvas terminal creates a set of javascript commands that draw onto the HTML5 canvas element Syntax set terminal canvas size lt xsize gt lt ysize gt background lt rgb_color gt font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt fsize lt fontsize gt no enhanced linewidth lt lw gt rounded but
112. the x axis can be automatically scaled to fit the range of the parametric function that is being plotted Of course the y axis can also be automatically scaled just as in the non parametric case If autoscaling on the x axis is not set the current x range is used Data files are plotted the same in parametric and non parametric mode However there is a difference in mixed function and data plots in non parametric mode with autoscaled x the x range of the datafile controls the x range of the functions in parametric mode it has no influence For completeness a last command set autoscale t is accepted However the effect of this scaling is very minor When gnuplot determines that the t range would be empty it makes a small adjustment if autoscaling is true Otherwise gnuplot gives an error Such behavior may in fact not be very useful and the command set autoscale t is certainly questionable splot extends the above ideas as you would expect If autoscaling is set then x y and z ranges are computed and each axis scaled to fit the resulting data Polar mode When in polar mode set polar the xrange and the yrange may be left in autoscale mode Tf set rrange is used to limit the extent of the polar axis then xrange and yrange will adjust to match this automatically However explicit xrange and yrange commands can later be used to make further adjustments See set rrange p 145 The trange may also be autoscaled Note that if t
113. three alternatives if units xy is included in the plot specification the axes will be scaled as described above units xx ensures that both diameters are interpreted in units of the x axis while units yy means that both diameters are interpreted in units of the y axis In the latter two cases the ellipses will have the correct aspect ratio even if the plot is resized If units is omitted the default setting will be used which is equivalent to units xy This can be redefined by set style ellipse Example draws ellipses cycling through the available line types plot data using 1 2 3 4 0 0 with ellipses See also set object ellipse p 132 set style ellipse p 152 and fillstyle p 148 Dots The dots style plots a tiny dot at each point this is useful for scatter plots with many points Either 1 or 2 columns of input data are required in 2D Three columns are required in 3D For some terminals post pdf the size of the dot can be controlled by changing the linewidth 1 column y x is row number 2 columns x y 3 columns x y z 3D only splot Filledcurves s The filledcurves style is only relevant to 2D plotting Three variants are possible The first two variants re Mithi Aedes quire either a function or two columns of input data and below may be further modified by the options listed below phate Syntax plot with filledcurves option
114. to be compiled with emx gcc under either DOS or OS 2 They also need VESA and SVGAKIT maintained by Johannes Martin JMARTIN GOOFY ZDV UNI MAINZ DE with additions by David J Liu liuQphri nyu edu Syntax set terminal emxvga set terminal emxvesa vesa mode set terminal vgal The only option is the vesa mode for emxvesa which defaults to G640x480x256 Epscairo The epscairo terminal device generates encapsulated PostScript eps using the cairo and pango support libraries cairo verion gt 1 6 is required Please read the help for the pdfcairo terminal Epslatex The epslatex driver generates output for further processing by LaTeX Syntax set terminal epslatex default set terminal epslatex standalone input foldstyle newstyle level1 leveldefault color colour monochrome background lt rgbcolor gt nobackground solid dashed dashlength dl lt DL gt linewidth lw lt LW gt rounded butt clip noclip palfuncparam lt samples gt lt maxdeviation gt size lt XX gt unit lt YY gt unit header lt header gt noheader blacktext colortext colourtext font fontname fontsize lt fontsize gt fontscale lt scale gt The epslatex terminal prints a plot as terminal postscript eps but transfers the texts to LaTeX instead of including in the PostScript code Thus many options are the same as in the postscript terminal The appearance of the epsl
115. to its default state tc lt lt n gt sets the text color to that of line type lt n gt tc ls lt n gt sets the text color to that of line style lt n gt tc palette z selects a palette color corresponding to the label z position tc palette cb lt val gt selects a color corresponding to lt val gt on the colorbar tc palette fraction lt val gt with 0 lt val lt 1 selects a color corresponding to the mapping 0 1 to grays colors of the palette tc rgb RRGGBB selects an arbitrary 24 bit RGB color If a lt pointstyle gt is given using keywords lt pt and ps see style p 91 a point with the given style and color of the given line type is plotted at the label position and the text of the label is displaced slightly This option is used by default for placing labels in mouse enhanced terminals Use nopoint to turn off the drawing of a point near the label this is the default The displacement defaults to 1 1 in pointsize units if a lt pointstyle gt is given 0 0 if no lt pointstyle gt is given The displacement can be controlled by the optional offset lt offset gt where lt offset gt is specified by either x y or x y z and may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system See coordinates p for details If one or more axis is timeseries the appropriate coordinate should be given as a quoted time string according to the time
116. use is to read in csv comma separated value files written by spreadsheet or database programs By default data fields are separated by whitespace Syntax set datafile separator lt char gt whitespace Examples Input file contains tab separated fields set datafile separator t Input file contains comma separated values fields set datafile separator Set datafile commentschars The set datafile commentschars command allows you to tell gnuplot what characters are used in a data file to denote comments Gnuplot will ignore rest of the line behind the specified characters if either of them is the first non blank character on the line Syntax set datafile commentschars lt string gt show datafile commentschars unset commentschars Default value of the string is on VMS and otherwise Then the following line in a data file is completely ignored 1234 but the following 1 34 produces rather unexpected plot unless set datafile missing is specified as well Example set datafile commentschars Set datafile binary The set datafile binary command is used to set the defaults when reading binary data files The syntax matches precisely that used for commands plot and splot See binary matrix p 170 and binary general p for details about the keywords that can be present in lt binary list gt Syntax set datafile binary lt binary list gt show datafile binary show datafile un
117. value It may be convenient to track the statistics from more than one file at the same time The name option causes the default prefix STATS to be replaced by a user specified string For example the mean value of column 2 data from two different files could be compared by stats filel dat using 2 name A stats file2 dat using 2 name B if A_mean lt B_mean The index reported in STATS index xxx corresponds to the value of pseudo column 0 0 in plot commands Le the first point has index 0 the last point has index N 1 Data values are sorted to find the median and quartile boundaries If the total number of points N is odd then the median value is taken as the value of data point N 1 2 If N is even then the median is reported as the mean value of points N 2 and N 2 2 Equivalent treatment is used for the quartile boundaries For an example of using the stats command to help annotate a subsequent plot see The current implementation does not allow analysis if either the X or Y axis is set to log scaling This restriction may be removed in a later version System system command executes command using the standard shell See shell p 168 If called as a function system command returns the resulting character stream from stdout as a string One optional trailing newline is ignored This can be used to import external functions into gnuplot scripts f x real system sprintf somecommand f x
118. with boxes The sin plot will use pattern 0 the cos plot will use pattern 1 Any additional plots would cycle through the patterns supported by the terminal driver 5 To specify explicit fillstyles for each dataset plot file1 with boxes fs solid 0 25 file2 with boxes fs solid 0 50 gt file3 with boxes fs solid 0 75 file4 with boxes fill pattern 1 A fileb with boxes fill empty Boxplot Boxplots are a common way to represent a statistical dis nk tribution of values Quartile boundaries are determined sel i such that 1 4 of the points have a value equal or less rae than the first quartile boundary 1 2 of the points have 100 L a value equal or less than the second quartile median rae value etc A box is drawn around the region between eo L the first and third quartiles with a horizontal line at an T 4 the median value Whiskers extend from the box to z0 H user specified limits Points that lie outside these limits a gt are drawn individually Examples Place a boxplot at x coordinate 1 0 representing the y values in column 5 plot data using 1 0 5 Same plot but suppress outliers and force the width of the boxplot to 0 3 set style boxplot nooutliers plot data using 1 0 5 0 3 By default only one boxplot is produced that represents all y values from the second column of the using specification However an additional fou
119. x1min xlmax ylmin ylmax x2min x2max y2min y2max in plot coordinates can be obtained calling gnuplot_axisranges If the interactive option is specified mouse clicking on a line segment will print the coordinates of its midpoint to stdout Advanced actions can happen instead if the user supplies a procedure named user_gnuplot_coordinates which takes the following arguments win id xls yls x2s y2s xle yle x2e y2e xlm ylm x2m y2m the name of the canvas and the id of the line segment followed by the coordinates of its start and end point in the two possible axis ranges the coordinates of the midpoint are only filled for logarithmic axes The current version of tkcanvas supports neither multiplot nor replot Tpic The tpic terminal driver supports the LaTeX picture environment with tpic specials It is an alternative to the latex and eepic terminal drivers Options are the point size line width and dot dash interval Syntax set terminal tpic lt pointsize gt lt linewidth gt lt interval gt where pointsize and linewidth are integers in milli inches and interval is a float in inches If a non positive value is specified the default is chosen pointsize 40 linewidth 6 interval 0 1 All drivers for LaTeX offer a special way of controlling text positioning If any text string begins with you also need to include a at the end of the text and the whole text will be centered both horizontally and ve
120. 0 12 14 e si is a lot easier to type If you use with replot you may need to enter the data more than once See replot p 94 refresh p 94 A blank filename specifies that the previous filename should be reused This can be useful with things like plot a very long filename using 1 2 using 1 3 using 1 4 If you use both and on the same plot command you ll need to have two sets of inline data as in the example above On systems with a popen function the datafile can be piped through a shell command by starting the file name with a lt For example pop x 103x exp x 10 plot lt awk print 1 1965 2 population dat pop x would plot the same information as the first population example but with years since 1965 as the x axis If you want to execute this example you have to delete all comments from the data file above or substitute the following command for the first part of the command above the part up to the comma plot lt awk 0 print 1 1965 2 population dat While this approach is most flexible it is possible to achieve simple filtering with the using or thru keywords Thru The thru function is provided for backward compatibility Syntax plot file thru f x It is equivalent to plot file using 1 2 While the latter appears more complex it is much more flexible The more natural plot
121. 1 4 To set the number of levels to 10 changing an incremental end or possibly the number of auto levels set cntrparam levels 10 To set the start and increment while retaining the number of levels set cntrparam levels incremental 100 50 See also set contour p 105 for control of where the contours are drawn and set clabel p 102 for control of the format of the contour labels and linetypes See also contours demo contours dem and contours with user defined levels demo discrete dem Color box The color scheme i e the gradient of the smooth color with min z and max z values of pm3d s palette is drawn in a color box unless unset colorbox set colorbox set colorbox vertical horizontal default user origin x y size x y front back noborder bdefault border line style BAA AAS show colorbox unset colorbox Color box position can be default or user If the latter is specified the values as given with the origin and size subcommands are used The box can be drawn after front or before back the graph or the surface The orientation of the color gradient can be switched by options vertical and horizontal origin x y and size x y are used only in combination with the user option The x and y values are interpreted as screen coordinates by default and this is the only legal option for 3D plots 2D plots including splot with set view map allow any coordinate system to be
122. 108 compatibility 2 context 184 C C 0 0 0 0 e EE E contour 38 60 102 104 105 177 152 1 coordinates 123 131133 copyright corel cos 26 cosh csplines cubehelix cumulative cycle data 55 73 78 105 data file datafile BS 63 58 08 105 117 172 236 datastrings date specifiers 114 debug decimalsign defined degrees depthorder dgria3a 1 BO 109 135 252 A division do 151 671 dots dpu414 dumb dummy 99 ax Ba 7 dxf dxy800a 187 dy 4 77 edf 76 editing 22 editing postscript eepic ehf 76 ellipse 48 ne TE elliptic integrals 28 emf 1 emtex 199 emxvesa 189 emxvga ending EE TT 23 197 20 1 27 encodings since PTET SI TE 2 E environment eps 32 epscairo 189 epslatex epson 180dpi epson 60dpi epson 1x800 equal equal axes 157 erf erfe error estimates error state 30 errorbars errorlines errors evaluate every 79 173 example examples excl exists exit INDEX exp 26 expint exponentiation expressions factorial ae FAQ faq fig 1 file 78 Moala filledcurves fillsteps 19 fillstyle financebars fit 25 80 1631165 fit parameters fitting flipx floating point exceptions floor BITC 11211214 fonts 32 A 199 210 229 f
123. 2 1533 output 133 palette BJ P TA A A IH 15510511559 168 parametric pause 2 pbm pel5 197 pal 2208 9 pdfcairo 179 208 pi placement plot plotting pm pn 5 52 5 pm3d resources png pngcairo 211 pointinterval S ig 143 points 56 pointsize pla OJE AR Store polygon 132 132 pop rs position 135 positive 140 postscript practical guidelines prescribe print printing projection 60 prologue 25 100 212 215 219 psdir 144 B15 A ane SIS pslatex 179 191 pstex pstricks punctuation push pwd qms 217 at 217 quit quotes raise rand INDEX random 28 range frame 164 rangelimited ranges 63 88 ratio 145 raxis 144 real 27 rectangle refresh 84 87 ala regis 218 replot reread reset restore rgbalpha rgbcolor rgbformulae rgbimage rmargin 144 rotate 54 rrange 19 57 100 222 135 rtics samples BT 58 save 96 sbezier scansautomatic 136 scansbackward scansforward screendump 224 scrolling seeking assistance seeking assistance separator set sgn shell show sin sinh 27 27 size 2 29 55 105 105 109 ETO SJIS 111 skip smooth space special filenames special filenames specifiers 113 specify splot 73 0 E10 243 100 sprintf sqrt 27 square 57 105 148 starc
124. 2 axis label is placed to the right of the y2 axis The position is terminal dependent in the same manner as is the y axis label x2label The x2 axis label is placed above the plot but below the title It is also possible to create an x2 axis label by using new line characters to make a multi line plot title e g set title This is the title n nThis is the x2label Note that double quotes must be used The same font will be used for both lines of course The orientation rotation angle of the x x2 y and y2 axis labels in 2D plots can be changed by specifying rotate by lt degrees gt The orientation of the x and y axis labels in 3D plots defaults to horizontal but can be changed to run parallel to the axis by specifying rotate parallel If you are not satisfied with the default position of an axis label use set label instead that command gives you much more control over where text is placed Please see syntax p for further information about backslash processing and the difference between single and double quoted strings Xmtics The set xmtics command converts the x axis tic marks to months of the year where 1 Jan and 12 Dec Overflows are converted modulo 12 to months The tics are returned to their default labels by unset xmtics Similar commands perform the same duties for the other axes Syntax set xmtics unset xmtics show xmtics The same syntax applies to x2mtics ymtics y2mtics zmtics and cbmtics See also the
125. 3D Image data can be scaled to fill a particular rectangle within a 2D plot coordinate system by specifying the x and y extent of each pixel See binary keywords dx p and dy p 77 To generate the figure at the ae right the same input image was placed multiple times each with a specified dx dy and origin The input PNG 100 image of a building is 50x128 pixels The tall building was drawn by mapping this using dx 0 5 dy 1 5 The 50 short building used a mapping dx 0 5 dy 0 35 Rescaled image used as plot element bn cog y Euilding Heights The image style handles input pixels containing a Downtown 5 ME by Heizhborhood grayscale or color palette value Thus 2D plots plot command require 3 columns of data x y value while 3D plots splot command require 4 columns of data x y z value q 150 100 30 EEE a Suburtes The rgbimage style handles input pixels that are described by three separate values for the red green and blue components Thus 5D data x y r g b is needed for plot and 6D data x y z r g b for splot The individual red green and blue components are assumed to lie in the range 0 255 The rgbalpha style handles input pixels that contain alpha channel transparency information in addition to the red green and blue components Thus 6D data x y r g b a is needed for plot and 7D data x y z r g b a for splot The r g b and alpha components are assumed to
126. 6 O E ssp eaceeeeraeguaneresearaurses 76 DCAM 6 edad bbid shaw srta ra dal aid ee one a TT a aa oh og a ees E 77 A pe Se ee Gus a Gh Ge E Ae ae ee ee ey ee ee ce a Dee a at 77 ea ae aac iy Herein ag Gata oe dlp et ee A Ge pe es ee ea eet oh a we 77 fy RAMS he eee ee A ee IS A 77 COT A E ae SNe Re ee BB Be ee A G TE oe ah NN Bg ela OS Bowe De ah aca ee ees ee a 77 ites fle Rad case dd BS eR AR a AA ea E 77 un Gee A ee ele I ee A ae en Rs ee dette eee ns 78 A GOA ad deine oe oP ee a a dee eee EA Se ee eG 79 peed ang Geka ees aed eo oman sees Sense eoeen ee 80 Bde A dt de winavi Ae Ed Bk de da da Sew A e e lla das Je o ee 80 AA E NN 81 a bee 81 TA A NN 82 parate bd 4 444 enge dad dd EES 82 A aA 8 8 2 ae A eee RARE OSS See E 82 or Buea es EEE aed eae 82 PTCQUCHO WA fc aye a ete id a Bea a he ede amp Gee sn cease Ao ey ee ee A ee ae 82 Cumilativel oes sige e y Ra Vo eae ee SRE SO tO SE es 82 Chorma G i s ex ee ered AN 82 CONTENTS U pani m aici g e Oh a ds g e ar r y y a IS a ia Ge ee Gr aa a ade A UA at ido Oe E A A a A A A A tt da AA Pscudocolumasl ias e AE a a A ees PtIGIADElS e 4 40 ca ara e DS A AO a eee eG Si dd GbR RE RO a AAA NADO e Be ABE Ht hk De a oe Bw Rye ee ee ww Be ee hE Y Peed PRP EREG Ee a Yh BEM OEY ele a eee ae e ZtiClabels ic 4 ais apa re hE a Dee EE ERE A Bee ee EE Volatiles c a wae CEA OR ORR ee Doe eR Sy eee PE SEES ERS ob oy ip HA MR ROR GR a ee ah Re e
127. Aa hd Rann Ss OG EY 137 De EBS bh Oye me ee whee ee ase ae BEES ie blo ale ape EOE ae os oa 138 A 138 AI RE a RARA ek epee EROS AA ee amp 138 A ahhh tees 4 gui are nanan oe 140 si a hates wae o O Gh So a A Pe Pa aes ae oia ee ae de oes ae 140 Functions 29544 eae eee eee eee ee EEE ROR EE Ewe eae oe amp as 141 a aa ae a a cra dar 141 Bile 2 6 o a See eS BASE EOE EERE eee EEE EERO eee ee a Lee ne 142 ee ee AAA EA a a 142 IPOStSCLIDU ey a 6 4 6 Ge a A A es OS SS AA oe 142 CONTENTS ERAS RN 143 DRA A AOS A RA ek A E RN IA a BBA en e 4 143 Polati ias aa aa a a A e E 143 A A ER E Booed ee ee ee we 144 A sf amp Ga aati ee Nove iene aera Ge Ge wit Gk we Gees See ee A Ge 144 Wa ES he ee ae eee a ee ee he A RR NN 144 Rmargi j o ee eed EERE SA a Eee REE EE ee OES eS ee dee 8 144 A a a Be OY ee oe me AA le at te AS 145 ee EEE AAA ante es A ae Se can ae winds cta e eos 145 Samples is oo Sa eae ta dh Ge a a ee AA POS ESS e 145 oh AS A A Ne Oe A IRA A A E A ee amp OB Bod a A A 145 ARA A Ss oy Ge a ee ee ee Gis la ee A Siete Sy eee age eee Be Ge a 146 Pee yO epee e een eens 146 a a a A de a aa d da 147 a aa a AAA a ais 148 A oly ts O E AA 148 Set style fill transparent e ee ee 149 o e eo nia dd 149 Gish O NE AS A SE e os 149 E A 150 pra aa reia eee sas 151 A Aaa tennessee ss 151 SS e Po gee 66 osu bond ee ae bee act 152 Surtace as sse a a REG ee Oe ee ee hee Ee Sw Re Te OEE ee Oe aa
128. E Bee ee ee ee S 168 LA Brera A a es OS a oe Se y S 168 COUCE wea wae TENE EE 168 Shell 168 Splot 169 E es ee ee Be a ae ae eG PS Bee ee a es we ee as Se 169 RR Ahan ence ne as a 170 Example datafile a se sess 2 h48 644 e456 eee ea dee eyed a bea ees 171 Se MRR done BE eee I ee RO ARA A eee AS a G 172 fig AAA SS GAB ee a ad PA Oa he ee etn Gee ES 172 Stats Statistical Summary 173 System 174 174 174 174 175 175 IV Terminal types 175 Complete list of terminals 175 A A A TIA 175 Aife a e a a a ge hy ERA Ae E NN 176 certera iris catar dad 176 CA A A A A ee A ae eee ee 176 A E AE 177 REN ose Gah AA AAA A AA oe 177 Color PesOUrces 30 a AGS a A Ae ee a a a a 177 a eE E ee rar ae ea age apd as presage a Pe Sn ve ae a 178 hine resources lvl et ae ee ee ee ee ae EEE ROR EY Ee wed eae ee ew A 178 ee a ae a eae 179 Ganivash 2 9 vee Bae a RE RGR DO A A eee eS 181 pe MPa AAA a PARE EO EEO RDS eRe oe ee aed OO PS 182 CONTENTS gnuplot 4 7 13 Cem font A EII 182 A id A BOR AAA A AA A 183 Cam linewidth e edda PS ae a A A a 4 183 Oa Re RETA ae ee ae 184 cl AA wees Be Gas wt a Gis eae ee tee ae dy A AP eos ee es es a 184 RAN 184 Com width visir a ad A 184 Cem nofontlist s a i e s Bae nee Oe eee eae ew Kee ea A a Re me ek e 184 bE A AAA A Geena dl a ee ee eee cic ayy Pills ds Bete 184 UA POE p44 uo bse eee ee saee sean as 186 Calling gnuplot from ConTeXt 2 ee 186 Corell e a ae Ga eee eee oo on ape e
129. ERA ee ee ee eee amp 4 a 128 Scrolling 244 4444 ac 444444 04 fideo deed deeded ke oh eee ot tones 128 Bae Reba See ee pete a ee OR Bh ee ado et 128 AT fe A a hw weve Be eae te A es 128 Multipl b atada AR ow gaa bo Ba Re Sa eee SSS SS Ee ES gg 128 MA le ay die E AS 130 M GCSE ce a eters Se ee fae aires an eee Gee ee St sah Bae eee tes ee Eee ke a eases ae gs Gee Ga Ge A 130 Deets Bee E Ae Ae See ck Ge alee ea GE Sead et ys Beant oh he he 130 Seb hee ee ob bd ad bbe Eases tee eee Gee hb4 oe Eee Ee RE 131 MA N gt fo 4 28 ee wre ee we eee eae a ED we Ee ee A ee ee ee wt a deena ei are y N 131 PG Ge SOME eho OES e ee dad Oo GAM Aca a ee amp OG ies 131 Un daa NE E nn es ener E 131 ie HEHE ai he ee Dee TH iS la o AE SA Se ere Oa BO eee EN 132 Circles Save de dd BO ees a ee he A Nace ee ee ee OC ee Ge 132 ee Sree Be ok A a A 132 oa A Re ee SS a a Se a a ee ee 133 Ge shold tn platas ek Be ae Ae ee ea as ie ea ye 133 Output sae ee te eeer eek abe did ros sr fede ee wea e badd 2 8 sat 133 Parametric so 2 4 aeae A de eh ae ae ee Oe eee eee he ae 134 PIG 4 bb oe Bead dw GAAS bee ehh E Se OR Ee EEA ee Bae EPS 134 Pinot te atk ig he os SOA es a ND ee ee Pee ee ee ee e 135 a E eae ee een so oe 135 eee ee eee Ae A Gs a ee cere ee ee ee ee 136 A AI Se eo ee SEAS 136 Chipping 2 oa ee eed eee Dad a ee Renee da De be ee eee bb bd bade pe 137 Color_assignment ji 44444 ross opa RY YE eee ae Hew ee a 137 os beta eee GOR Pee tat A O A
130. Please see set xrange p 160 for details Urange The set urange and set vrange commands set the parametric ranges used to compute x y and z values when in splot parametric mode Please see set xrange p 160 for details Variables The show variables command lists the current value of user defined and internal variables Gnuplot internally defines variables whose names begin with GPVAL_ MOUSE_ FIT and TERM Syntax show variables show variables that do not begin with GPVAL_ show variables all show all variables including those beginning GPVAL_ show variables NAME show only variables beginning with NAME Version The show version command lists the version of gnuplot being run its last modification date the copyright holders and email addresses for the FAQ the gnuplot info mailing list and reporting bugs in short the information listed on the screen when the program is invoked interactively Syntax show version long When the long option is given it also lists the operating system the compilation options used when gnuplot was installed the location of the help file and again the useful email addresses View The set view command sets the viewing angle for splots It controls how the 3D coordinates of the plot are mapped into the 2D screen space It provides controls for both rotation and scaling of the plotted data but supports orthographic projections only It supports both 3D projection or ort
131. Position an empty rectangle no fill with a blue border set object 3 rect from 0 0 to 2 3 fs empty border rgb blue Return fill and color to the default style but leave vertices unchanged set object 2 rect default Rectangle corners specified in screen coordinates may extend beyond the edge of the current graph Otherwise the rectangle is clipped to fit in the graph Ellipse Syntax set object lt index gt ellipse fat center lt position gt size lt w gt lt h gt angle lt orientation gt units xy xxlyy lt other object properties gt The position of the ellipse is specified by giving the center followed by the width and the height actually the major and minor axes The keywords at and center are synonyms The center position may be given in axis graph or screen coordinates See coordinates p 22 The major and minor axis lengths must be given in axis coordinates The orientation of the ellipse is specified by the angle between the horizontal axis and the major diameter of the ellipse If no angle is given the default ellipse orientation will be used instead see set style ellipse p 152 The units keyword controls the scaling of the axes of the ellipse units xy means that the major axis is interpreted in terms of units along the x axis while the minor axis in that of the y axis units xx means that both axes of the ellipses are scaled in the units of the x axis while units yy means that both axes are in units
132. PostScript Level 2 features are condi tionally protected so that PostScript Level 1 interpreters do not issue errors but rather display a message or a PostScript Level 1 approximation The levell option substitutes PostScript Level 1 approximations of these features and uses no PostScript Level 2 code This may be required by some old printers and old versions of Adobe Illustrator The flag level1 can be toggled later by editing a single line in the PostScript output file to force PostScript Level 1 interpretation In the case of files containing level 2 code the above features will not appear or will be replaced by a note when this flag is set or when the interpreting program does not indicate that it understands level 2 PostScript or higher rounded sets line caps and line joins to be rounded butt is the default butt caps and mitered joins clip tells PostScript to clip all output to the bounding box noclip is the default palfuncparam controls how set palette functions are encoded as gradients in the output Analytic color component functions set via set palette functions are encoded as linear interpolated gradients in the postscript output The color component functions are sampled at lt samples gt points and all points are removed from this gradient which can be removed without changing the resulting colors by more than lt maxdeviation gt For almost every useful palette you may safely leave the defaults of lt samples gt 2000 and lt max
133. RAC_X SCREEN_X GPVAL_TERM_XSIZE FRAC_Y SCREEN_Y GPVAL_TERM_YSIZE The read only variable GPVAL_ERRNO is set to a non zero value if any gnuplot command terminates early due to an error The most recent error message is stored in the string variable GPVAL_ERRMSG Both GPVAL_ERRNO and GPVAL_ERRMSG can be cleared using the command reset errors Interactive terminals with mouse functionality maintain read only variables with the prefix MOUSE_ See mouse variables p for details The fit mechanism uses several variables with names that begin FIT_ It is safest to avoid using such names FIT_LIMIT however is one that you may wish to redefine Under set fit errorvariables a the error for each fitted parameter will be stored in a variable named like the parameter but with _err appended See the documentation on fit p for details See user defined variables p 81 reset errors p 95 mouse variables p 88 and fit p 63 User defined variables and functions New user defined variables and functions of one through twelve variables may be declared and used anywhere including on the plot command itself User defined function syntax lt func name gt lt dummy1 gt lt dummy2 gt lt dummy12 gt lt expression gt where lt expression gt is defined in terms of lt dummy1 gt through lt dummy12 gt User defined variable syntax lt variable name gt lt constant expression gt Examples
134. XYZ Using color names for set palette defined tables and a color space other than RGB will result in funny colors All explanation have been written for RGB color space so please note that R can be H C Y or X depending on the actual color space G and B accordingly All values for all color spaces are limited to 0 1 RGB stands for Red Green and Blue CMY stands for Cyan Magenta and Yellow HSV stands for Hue Saturation and Value YIQ is the color model used by the U S Commercial Color Television Broadcasting it is basically an RGB recoding with downward compatibility for black and white television XYZ are the three primary colors of the color model defined by the Commission Internationale de PEclairage CIE For more information on color models see 140 gnuplot 4 7 http en wikipedia org wiki Color_space Rgbformulae For rgbformulae three suitable mapping functions have to be chosen This is done via rgbformulae lt r gt lt g gt lt b gt The available mapping functions are listed by show palette rgbformulae Default is 7 5 15 some other examples are 3 11 6 21 23 3 or 3 23 21 Negative numbers like 3 11 6 mean inverted color i e 1 gray passed into the formula see also positive p and negative p options below Some nice schemes in RGB color space 7 5 15 traditional pm3d black blue red yellow 3 11 6 green red violet 23 28 3 ocean green blue white try also all other permutations
135. Y2range The set y2range command sets the vertical range that will be displayed on the y2 right hand axis Please see set xrange p 160 for details Y 2tics The set y2tics command controls major labeled tics on the y2 right hand axis Please see set xtics p for details Y 2zeroaxls The set y2zeroaxis command draws a line at the origin of the y2 right hand axis x2 0 For details please see set zeroaxis p 167 Ydata The set ydata commands sets y axis data to timeseries dates times Please see set xdata p 158 Ydtics The set ydtics command changes tics on the y axis to days of the week Please see set xdtics p 159 for details Ylabel This command sets the label for the y axis Please see set xlabel p 159 Y mtics The set ymtics command changes tics on the y axis to months of the year Please see set xmtics p 160 for details Yrange The set yrange command sets the vertical range that will be displayed on the y axis Please see set xrange p for details Ytics The set ytics command controls major labeled tics on the y axis Please see set xtics p 162 for details Yzeroaxis The set yzeroaxis command draws a line at x 0 For details please see set zeroaxis p 167 Zdata The set zdata command sets zaxis data to timeseries dates times Please see set xdata p 158 Zdtics The set zdtics command changes tics on the z axis to days of the wee
136. a color surface For functions interpolation makes little sense except to trade off precision for memory It would usually make more sense to use samples and isosamples when working with functions For positive m and n each quadrangle or triangle is interpolated m times and n times in the respective direction For negative m and n the interpolation frequency is chosen so that there will be at least m and n points drawn you can consider this as a special gridding function Zeros i e interpolate 0 0 will automatically choose an optimal number of interpolated surface points Deprecated_options There used to be an option transparent solid to this command Now you get the same effect from set grid front layerdefault respectively The command set pm3d map is equivalent to set pm3d at b set view map set style data pm3d set style func pm3d It is used for backwards compatibility when set view map was not available Take care that you properly use zrange and cbrange for input data point filtering and color range scaling respectively and also set no surface seems to have a side effect Palette Palette is a color storage for use by pm3d filled color contours or polygons color histograms color gradient background and whatever it is or it will be implemented Here it stands for a palette of smooth continuous colors or grays but let s call it just a palette Color palettes require terminal entries for filled color polygon
137. a palette having lt n gt discrete colors The default wide table can be limited to 3 columns of r g b float values 0 1 or integer values 0 255 by options float or int respectively This way the current gnuplot color palette can be loaded into other imaging applications for example Octave Additionally to this textual list of RGB table you can use the test palette command to plot the R G B profiles for the current palette The following options determine the coloring properties Figure using this palette can be gray or color For instance in pm3d color surfaces the gray of each small spot is obtained by mapping the averaged z coordinate of the 4 corners of surface quadrangles into the range min z max_z providing range of grays 0 1 This value can be used directly as the gray for gray maps The color map requires a transformation gray gt R G B i e a mapping 0 1 gt 0 1 0 1 0 1 Basically two different types of mappings can be used Analytic formulae to convert gray to color or discrete mapping tables which are interpolated palette rgbformulae and palette functions use analytic formulae whereas palette defined and palette file use interpolated tables palette rgbformulae reduces the size of postscript output to a minimum The command show palette fit2rgbformulae finds the best matching set palette rgbformulae for the current set palette Naturally it makes sense to use it for non rgbformulae palettes This command c
138. a set time unset time pair around one of the plot splot or replot commands within the set multiplot unset multiplot block The multiplot title is separate from the individual plot titles if any Space is reserved for it at the top of the page spanning the full width of the canvas The commands set origin and set size must be used to correctly position each plot if no layout is specified or if fine tuning is desired See set origin p 133 and set size p 145 for details of their usage Example set multiplot set size 0 4 0 4 set origin 0 1 0 plot sin x set size 0 2 0 2 set origin 0 5 0 5 plot cos x unset multiplot 1 This displays a plot of cos x stacked above a plot of sin x set size and set origin refer to the entire plotting area used for each plot Please also see set term size p 21 If you want to have the axes themselves line up you can guarantee that the margins are the same size with the set margin commands See set margin p for their use Note that the margin settings are absolute in character units so the appearance of the graph in the remaining space will depend on the screen size of the display device e g perhaps quite different on a video display and a printer With the layout option you can generate simple multiplots without having to give the set size and set origin commands before each plot Those are generated automatically but can be overridden at any time With layout the display will be divided
139. a single row of the input data file It is common in such input files that the first element of each row is a label Labels from this column may be placed along the x axis underneath the appropriate cluster of boxes with the xticlabels option to using The errorbars style is very similar to the clustered style except that it requires additional columns of input for each entry The first column holds the height y value of that box exactly as for the clustered style 2 columns y yerr bar extends from y yerr to yterr 3 columns y ymin yman bar extends from ymin to ymax The appearance of the error bars is controlled by the current value of set bars and by the optional lt linewidth gt specification Two styles of stacked histogram are supported chosen by the command set style histogram rowstacked columnstacked In these styles the data values from the selected columns are collected into stacks of boxes Positive values stack upwards from y 0 negative values stack downwards Mixed positive and negative values will produce both an upward stack and a downward stack The default stacking mode is rowstacked The rowstacked style places a box resting on the x axis for each data value in the first selected column the first data value results in a box a x 1 the second at x 2 and so on Boxes corresponding to the second and subsequent data columns are layered on top of these resulting in a stack of boxes at x 1 representing the first data value fr
140. abel The same syntax applies to x2label ylabel y2label zlabel and cblabel If lt offset gt is specified by either x y or x y z the label is moved by the given offset It may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system See coordinates p for details By default the character coordinate system is used For example set xlabel offset 1 0 will change only the x offset of the title moving the label roughly one character width to the left The size of a character depends on both the font and the terminal lt font gt is used to specify the font in which the label is written the units of the font lt size gt depend upon which terminal is used noenhanced requests that the label text not be processed by the enhanced text mode parser even if enhanced text mode is currently active To clear a label put no options on the command line e g set y2label The default positions of the axis labels are as follows xlabel The x axis label is centered below the bottom of the plot ylabel The y axis label is centered to the left of the plot defaulting to either horizontal or vertical orientation depending on the terminal type zlabel The z axis label is centered along the z axis and placed in the space above the grid level cblabel The color box axis label is centered along the box and placed below or to the right according to horizontal or vertical color box gradient y2label The y
141. above for the appropriate mode Once all those needed are specified no further ones must be listed but unneeded ones cannot be skipped use an empty range as a placeholder can be used to allow autoscaling of either of min and max See also set autoscale p 98 Ranges specified on the plot or splot command line affect only that graph use the set xrange set yrange etc commands to change the default ranges for future graphs With time data you must provide the range in the same manner as the time appears in the datafile within quotes gnuplot uses the timefmt string to read the value see set timefmt p 155 Examples This uses the current ranges plot cos x This sets the x range only plot 10 30 sin pi x pi x This is the same but uses t as the dummy variable plot t 10 30 sin pi t pi t This sets both the x and y ranges plot pi pi 3 3 tan x 1 x This sets only the y range and turns off autoscaling on both axes plot 2 sin 5 8 sin x besj0 x This sets xmax and ymin only plot 200 pi exp sin x This sets the x range for a timeseries set timefmt d m y H M plot 1 6 93 12 00 5 6 93 12 00 timedata dat Iteration If many similar files or functions are to be plotted together it may be convenient to do so by iterating over a shared plot command Syntax plot for lt variable gt lt start gt lt end gt lt increment gt plot for
142. actly how this missing value will be treated depends on the using specifier of the plot or splot command Syntax set datafile missing lt string gt show datafile missing unset datafile Example Ignore entries containing IEEE NaN Not a Number code set datafile missing NaN Example set style data linespoints plot 1 10 2 20 3 4 40 5 50 e set datafile missing plot 1 10 2 20 3 4 40 5 50 e plot using 1 2 1 10 2 20 3 4 40 5 50 e plot using 1 2 10 20 z 40 50 0 NM gt SAU0UNe The first plot will recognize only the first datum in the 3 line It will use the single datum on a line convention that the line number is x and the datum is y so the point will be plotted in this case erroneously at 2 3 The second and third plot commands will correctly ignore the middle line The plotted line will connect the points at 2 20 and 4 40 The fourth plot will also correctly ignore the middle line but the plotted line will not connect the points at 2 20 and 4 40 There is no default character for missing but in many cases any non parsible string of characters found where a numerical value is expected will be treated as missing data Set datafile separator The command set datafile separator lt char gt tells gnuplot that data fields in subsequent input files are separated by lt char gt rather than by whitespace The most common
143. al will write out just the terminal status without the comment marker in front of it This is mainly useful for switching the terminal setting for a short while and getting back to the previously set terminal afterwards by loading the saved terminal status Note that for a single gnuplot session you may rather use the other method of saving and restoring current terminal by the commands set term push and set term pop see set term p 153 The filename must be enclosed in quotes The special filename may be used to save commands to standard output On systems which support a popen function Unix the output of save can be piped through an external program by starting the file name with a This provides a consistent interface to gnuplot s internal settings to programs which communicate with gnuplot through a pipe Please see help for batch interactive p for more details Examples save work gnu save functions func dat save var var dat save set options dat save term myterm gnu save save grep title gt t gp Set show The set command can be used to set lots of options No screen is drawn however until a plot splot or replot command is given The show command shows their settings show all shows all the settings Options changed using set can be returned to the default state by giving the corresponding unset command See also the reset p command which returns all settable p
144. all linewidths by lt LW gt By default the generated PostScript code uses language features that were introduced in PostScript Level 2 notably filters and pattern fill of irregular objects such as filledcurves PostScript Level 2 features are condi tionally protected so that PostScript Level 1 interpreters do not issue errors but rather display a message or a PostScript Level 1 approximation The levell option substitutes PostScript Level 1 approximations of these features and uses no PostScript Level 2 code This may be required by some old printers and old versions of Adobe Illustrator The flag levell can be toggled later by editing a single line in the PostScript output file to force PostScript Level 1 interpretation In the case of files containing level 2 code the above features will not appear or will be replaced by a note when this flag is set or when the interpreting program does not indicate that it understands level 2 PostScript or higher rounded sets line caps and line joins to be rounded butt is the default butt caps and mitered joins clip tells PostScript to clip all output to the bounding box noclip is the default palfuncparam controls how set palette functions are encoded as gradients in the output Analytic color component functions set via set palette functions are encoded as linear interpolated gradients in the postscript output The color component functions are sampled at lt samples gt points and all points ar
145. am does not track the true aspect ratio of the x11 terminal window In order for commands such as set size ratio to work the x11 window must itself have equal height and width Only one color palette at a time is active for any given x11 plot window This means that multiplots whose constituent plots use different palettes will not display correctly in x11 Qt terminal If the local qt environment does not support opengl as a rendering mode then display of polygons and surfaces can be very slow External libraries External library GD used by PNG JPEG GIF drivers Versions of libgd through 2 0 33 contain various bugs in mapping the characters of Adobe s Symbol font Also it is possible to trigger a library segfault if an anti aliased line crosses an upper corner of the canvas External library PDFlib used by PDF driver Gnuplot can be linked against libpdf versions 4 5 or 6 However these versions differ in their handling of piped I O Therefore gnuplot scripts using piped output to PDF may work only for some versions of PDFlib External library svgalib used by linux and vgagl driver Requires gnuplot to be suid root bad and has many bugs that are specific to the video card or graphics driver used in X11 Internationalization locale settings Gnuplot uses the C runtime library routine setlocale to control locale specific formatting of input and output number times and date strings The locales available and the level of s
146. ample demonstrates time date plotting Suppose the file data contains records like 03 21 95 10 00 6 02e23 This file can be plotted by set xdata time set timefmt m d y set xrange 03 21 95 03 22 95 set format x m d set timefmt m 4d y H M plot data using 1 3 which will produce xtic labels that look like 03 21 See time_specifiers p 114 Part II Plotting styles There are many plotting styles available in gnuplot They are listed alphabetically below The commands set style data and set style function change the default plotting style for subsequent plot and splot commands You also have the option to specify the plot style explicitly as part of the plot or splot command If you want to mix plot styles within a single plot you must specify the plot style for each component Example plot data with boxes sin x with lines Each plot style has its own expected set of data entries in a data file For example by default the lines style expects either a single column of y values with implicit x ordering or a pair of columns with x in the first and y in the second For more information on how to fine tune how columns in a file are interpreted as plot data see using p 84 Boxerrorbars The boxerrorbars style is only relevant to 2D data plotting It is a combination of the boxes and yerror bars styles It uses 3 4 or 5 columns of data 3 columns x y ydelta 4 columns x y ydelta xd
147. an be found useful mainly for external programs using the same rgbformulae definition of palettes as gnuplot like zimg http zimg sourceforge net set palette gray switches to a gray only palette set palette rgbformulae set palette defined set palette file and set palette functions switch to a color mapping set palette color is an easy way to switch back from the gray palette to the last color mapping Automatic gamma correction via set palette gamma lt gamma gt can be done for gray maps set palette gray and for the cubehelix color palette schemes Gamma 1 produces a linear ramp of intensity See test palette p 174 Many terminals support only discrete number of colors e g 256 colors in gif After the default gnuplot linetype colors are allocated the rest of the available colors are by default reserved for pm3d Thus a multiplot using multiple palettes could fail because the first palette has used all the available color positions You can mitigate this limitation by using set palette maxcolors lt N gt with a reasonably small value of N This option causes N discrete colors to be selected from a continuous palette sampled at equally spaced intervals Tf you want unequal spacing of N discrete colors use set palette defined instead of a single continuous palette RGB color space might not be the most useful color space to work in For that reason you may change the color space with model to one of RGB HSV CMY YIQ and
148. and labels Setting behind will place the object behind everything including the axes and back rectangles thus set object rectangle from screen 0 0 to screen 1 1 behind can be used to provide a colored background for the entire graph or page The fill color of the object is taken from the lt colorspec gt fillcolor may be abbreviated fc The fill style is taken from lt fillstyle gt See colorspec p and fillstyle p 148 If the keyword default is given these properties are inherited from the default settings at the time a plot is drawn See set style rectangle p 151 Rectangle Syntax set object lt index gt rectangle from lt position gt to rto lt position gt center lt position gt size lt w gt lt h gt at lt position gt size lt w gt lt h gt The position of the rectangle may be specified by giving the position of two diagonal corners bottom left and top right or by giving the position of the center followed by the width and the height In either case the positions may be given in axis graph or screen coordinates See coordinates p 22 The options at and center are synonyms Examples Force the entire area enclosed by the axes to have background color cyan set object 1 rect from graph 0 graph O to graph 1 graph 1 back set object 1 rect fc rgb cyan fillstyle solid 1 0 Position a red square with lower left at 0 0 and upper right at 2 3 set object 2 rect from 0 0 to 2 3 fc 1t 1
149. and z axis for splot In 2D plots the border is normally drawn on top of all plots elements front If you want the border to be drawn behind the plot elements use set border back Using the optional lt line_style gt lt line type gt and lt line_width gt specifiers the way the border lines are drawn can be influenced limited by what the current terminal driver supports For plot tics may be drawn on edges other than bottom and left by enabling the second axes see set xtics p 162 for details If a splot draws only on the base as is the case with unset surface set contour base then the verticals and the top are not drawn even if they are specified The set grid options back front and layerdefault also control the order in which the border lines are drawn with respect to the output of the plotted data Examples Draw default borders set border Draw only the left and bottom plot or both front and back bottom left splot borders set border 3 Draw a complete box around a splot set border 4095 Draw a topless box around a splot omitting the front vertical set border 127 256 512 or set border 1023 128 Draw only the top and right borders for a plot and label them as axes unset xtics unset ytics set x2tics set y2tics set border 12 Boxwidth The set boxwidth command is used to set the default width of boxes in the boxes boxerrorbars boxplot candlesticks and histograms sty
150. ands like show xrange will re interpret the integer according to timefmt If you change timefmt and then show the quantity again it will be displayed in the new timefmt For that matter if you give the deactivation command like set xdata the quantity will be shown in its numerical form The commands set format or set tics format define the format that will be used for tic labels whether or not the specified axis is time date If time date information is to be plotted from a file the using option must be used on the plot or splot command These commands simply use white space to separate columns but white space may be embedded within the time date string If you use tabs as a separator some trial and error may be necessary to discover how your system treats them s The time function can be used to get the current system time This value can be converted to a date string with the strftime function or it can be used in conjunction with timecolumn to generate relative time date plots The type of the argument determines what is returned If the argument is an integer time returns the current time as an integer in seconds from 1 Jan 2000 If the argument is real or complex the result is real as well The precision of the fractional sub second part depends on your operating system If the argument is a string it is assumed to be a format string and it is passed to strftime to provide a formatted time date string The following ex
151. arameters to default values If a variable contains time date data show will display it according to the format currently defined by set timefmt even if that was not in effect when the variable was initially defined The set and unset commands may optionally contain an iteration clause See iteration p 71 Angles By default gnuplot assumes the independent variable in polar graphs is in units of radians If set angles degrees is specified before set polar then the default range is 0 360 and the independent variable has units of degrees This is particularly useful for plots of data files The angle setting also applies to 3D mapping as set via the set mapping command Syntax set angles degrees radians show angles 9 The angle specified in set grid polar is also read and displayed in the units specified by set angles set angles also affects the arguments of the machine defined functions sin x cos x and tan x and the outputs of asin x acos x atan x atan2 x and arg x It has no effect on the arguments of hyperbolic functions or Bessel functions However the output arguments of inverse hyperbolic functions of complex arguments are affected if these functions are used set angles radians must be in effect to maintain consistency between input and output arguments x 1 0 0 1 set angles radians y sinh x print y prints 1 16933 0 154051 print asinh y prints 1 0 0 1 but set angles degrees y
152. are loaded in the order specified and then gnuplot exits Lower Syntax lower plot_window_nb The lower command lowers opposite to raise plot window s associated with the interactive terminal of your gnuplot session i e pm win wxt or x11 It puts the plot window to bottom in the z order windows stack of the window manager of your desktop As x11 and wxt support multiple plot windows then by default they lower these windows in descending order of most recently created on top to the least recently created on bottom If a plot number is supplied as an optional parameter only the associated plot window will be lowered if it exists The optional parameter is ignored for single plot window terminals i e pm and win Pause The pause command displays any text associated with the command and then waits a specified amount of time or until the carriage return is pressed pause is especially useful in conjunction with load files Syntax pause lt time gt lt string gt pause mouse lt endcondition gt lt endcondition gt lt string gt lt time gt may be any constant or expression Choosing 1 will wait until a carriage return is hit zero 0 won t pause at all and a positive number will wait the specified number of seconds The time is rounded to an integer number of seconds if subsecond time resolution is not supported by the given platform pause 0 is synonymous with print If the current terminal supports mous
153. at determined by set isosamples and set samples while file data must either be in a grid format as described in data file or be used to generate a grid see set dgrid3d p 109 Contour lines may be displayed either on the surface or projected onto the base The base projections of the contour lines may be written to a file and then read with plot to take advantage of plot s additional formatting capabilities Stats Statistical Summary Syntax stats filename using N M name prefix no output This command prepares a statistical summary of the data in one or two columns of a file The using specifier is interpreted in the same way as for plot commands See plot p for details on the index p 80 every p 79 and using p directives Data points are filtered against both xrange and yrange before analysis See set xrange p 160 The summary is printed to the screen by default Output can be redirected to a file by prior use of the command set print or suppressed altogether using the nooutput option In addition to printed output the program stores the individual statistics into three sets of variables The first set of variables reports how the data is laid out in the file STATS_records total number of in range data records STATS_outofrange number of records filtered out by range limits STATS_invalid number of invalid incomplete missing records STATS_blank number of blank lines in the file
154. at compile time of the document Generating DVI and later postscript files requires to convert the PNGs into EPS files in a seperate step e g by using ImageMagick s convert Transparent bitmap images are always generated as an external PNGs The nobitmap option let images be rendered as filled rectangles instead of the nativ PS or PDF inline image format This option is ignored if images are externalized The providevars options makes gnuplot s internal and user variables available by using the gpgetvar lt var name gt commmand within the TeX script Use gnuplot s show variables all command to see the list of valid variables The lt fontdesc gt string may contain any valid TeX LaTeX ConTeXt font commands like e g small It is passed directly as a node parameter in form of font lt fontdesc gt This can be misused to add further code to a node e g small yshift 1lex or yshift lex are also valid while the latter does not change the current font settings One exception is the second argument of the list If it is a number of the form lt number gt unit it will be interpreted as a fontsize like in other terminals and will be appended to the first argument If the unit is omitted the value is interpreted as pt As an example the string sffamily 12 fill red sets the font to LaTeX s sans serif font at a size of 12pt and red background color The same applies to ConTeXt e g
155. ata and size as specified by the row col_size parameters is created for plotting and contouring The grid is equally spaced in x rows and in y columns the z values are computed as weighted averages or spline interpolations of the scattered points z values In other words a regularly spaced grid is created and the a smooth approximation to the raw data is evaluated for all grid points This approximation is plotted in place of the raw data The number of columns defaults to the number of rows which defaults to 10 Several algorithms are available to calculate the approximation from the raw data Some of these algorithms can take additional parameters These interpolations are such the closer the data point is to a grid point the more effect it has on that grid point The splines algorithm calculates an interpolation based on thin plate splines It does not take additional parameters The qnorm algorithm calculates a weighted average of the input data at each grid point Each data point is weighted inversely by its distance from the grid point raised to the norm power Actually the weights are given by the inverse of dx norm dy norm where dx and dy are the components of the separation of the grid point from each data point For some norms that are powers of two specifically 4 8 and 16 the computation is optimized by using the Euclidean distance in the weight calculation dx 2 dy 2 norm 2 However any non negative inte
156. atafile i with lines datafile 2 with points plot t 1 10 pi pi 2 tan t data 1 using tan 2 3 4 smooth csplines axes x1y2 notitle with lines 5 plot for datafile in spinach dat broccoli dat datafile See also show plot p 134 Axes There are four possible sets of axes available the keyword lt axes gt is used to select the axes for which a particular line should be scaled x1y1 refers to the axes on the bottom and left x2y2 to those on the top and right x1y2 to those on the bottom and right and x2y1 to those on the top and left Ranges specified on the plot command apply only to the first set of axes bottom left 5 Binary BINARY DATA FILES Some earlier versions of gnuplot automatically detected binary data files It is now necessary to provide the keyword binary after the filename Adequate details of the file format must be given on the command line or extracted from the file itself for a supported binary filetype In particular there are two structures for binary files binary matrix format and binary general format The binary matrix format contains a two dimensional array of 32 bit IEEE float values with an additional column and row of coordinate values As with ASCIT matrix in the using list enumeration of the coordinate row constitutes column 1 enumeration of the coordinate column constitutes column 2 and the array of values constitutes column 3 The binary general format contains an
157. ate by the corresponding unset command The unset command may contain an optional iteration clause See iteration p 71 Examples set xtics mirror rotate by 45 0 10 100 unset xtics Unset labels numbered between 100 and 200 unset for i 100 200 label i Update This command writes the current values of the fit parameters into the given file formatted as an initial value file as described in the fitsection This is useful for saving the current values for later use or for restarting a converged or stopped fit Syntax update lt filename gt lt filename gt If a second filename is supplied the updated values are written to this file and the original parameter file is left unmodified Otherwise if the file already exists gnuplot first renames it by appending old and then opens a new file That is update fred behaves the same as rename fred fred old update fred old fred On DOS and other systems that use the twelve character filename ext naming convention ext will be old and filename will be related hopefully recognizably to the initial name Renaming is not done at all on VMS systems since they use file versioning Please see fit p for more information While Syntax while lt expr gt lt commands gt Execute a block of commands repeatedly so long as lt expr gt evaluates to a non zero value This command cannot be mixed with old style un bracketed i
158. ate the default palette used by MATLAB set pal defined 1 00008f 8 H0000ff 24 00ffff 40 fff 00 56 Hff0000 64 800000 To produce a palette with only a few equally spaced colors set palette model RGB maxcolors 4 set palette defined 0 yellow 1 red Traffic light palette non smooth color jumps at gray 1 3 and 2 3 set palette model RGB set palette defined 0 dark green 1 green 1 yellow 2 dark yellow 2 red 3 dark red Functions Use set palette functions lt Rexpr gt lt Gexpr gt lt Bexpr gt to define three formulae for the R gray G gray and B gray mapping The three formulae may depend on the variable gray which will take values in 0 1 and should also produce values in 0 1 Please note that lt Rexpr gt might be a formula for the H value if HSV color space has been chosen same for all other formulae and color spaces Examples To produce a full color palette use set palette model HSV functions gray 1 1 A nice black to gold palette set palette model XYZ functions gray 0 35 gray 0 5 gray 0 8 A gamma corrected black and white palette gamma 2 2 color gray gray 1 gamma set palette model RGB functions color gray color gray color gray Cubehelix The cubehelix option defines a family of palettes in which color hue varies along the standard color wheel while at the same time the net intensity increases monotonica
159. atex Syntax set terminal latex emtex default courier roman lt fontsize gt size lt XX gt unit lt YY gt unit rotate norotate By default the plot will inherit font settings from the embedding document You have the option of forcing either Courier cmtt or Roman cmr fonts instead In this case you may also specify a fontsize Unless your driver is capable of building fonts at any size e g dvips stick to the standard 10 11 and 12 point sizes METAFONT users beware METAFONT does not like odd sizes All drivers for LaTeX offer a special way of controlling text positioning If any text string begins with you also need to include a at the end of the text and the whole text will be centered both horizontally and vertically If the text string begins with you need to follow this with a position specification up to two out of t b l r f the text itself and finally The text itself may be anything LaTeX can typeset as an LR box rule s may help for best positioning Points among other things are drawn using the LaTeX commands Diamond and Box These com mands no longer belong to the LaTeX2e core they are included in the latexsym package which is part of the base distribution and thus part of any LaTeX implementation Please do not forget to use this package Other point types use symbols from the amssymb package The default size for the plot is 5 inc
160. atex terminal changed between versions 4 0 and 4 2 to reach better consistency with the postscript terminal The plot size has been changed from 5 x 3 inches to 5 x 3 5 inches the character width is now estimated to be 60 of the font size while the old epslatex terminal used 50 now the larger number of postscript linetypes and symbols are used To reach an appearance that is nearly identical to the old one specify the option oldstyle In fact some small differences remain the symbol sizes are slightly different the tics are half as large as in the old terminal which can be changed using set tics scale and the arrows have all features as in the postscript terminal If you see the error message Can t find PostScript prologue file Please see and follow the instructions in postscript prologue p 215 The option color enables color while monochrome prefers black and white drawing elements Further monochrome uses gray palette but it does not change color of objects specified with an explicit colorspec solid draws all plots with solid lines overriding any dashed patterns dashlength or dl scales the length of the dashed line segments by lt DL gt which is a floating point number greater than zero linewidth or lw scales all linewidths by lt LW gt By default the generated PostScript code uses language features that were introduced in PostScript Level 2 notably filters and pattern fill of irregular objects such as filledcurves
161. ather crumply surfaces it can happen that the two triangles a surface cell is divided into are seen from opposite sides i e the original quadrangle is bent over as illustrated in the following ASCII art C B original quadrangle A B displayed quadrangle AN set view 0 0 Zi set view 75 75 perhaps 17 C D NI A D If the diagonal edges of the surface cells aren t generally made visible by bit 2 of the lt bitpattern gt there the edge CB above wouldn t be drawn at all normally making the resulting display hard to understand Therefore the default option of bentover will turn it visible in this case If you don t want that you may choose nobentover instead See also hidden line removal demo hidden dem and complex hidden line demo singulr dem Historysize Note the command set historysize is only available when gnuplot has been configured to use the GNU readline library Syntax set historysize lt int gt unset historysize When leaving gnuplot the value of historysize is used for truncating the history to at most that much lines The default is 500 unset historysize will disable history truncation and thus allow an infinite number of lines to be written to the history file Isosamples The isoline density grid for plotting functions as surfaces may be changed by the set isosamples command Syntax set isosamples lt iso_1 gt lt iso_2 gt show isosamples Each fun
162. ather than searching for a suitable temporary line style to substitute See set linetype p Syntax set style increment default userstyles show style increment By default successive plots within the same graph will use successive linetypes from the default set for the current terminal type However choosing set style increment user allows you to step through the user defined line styles rather than through the default linetypes Example set style line 1 lw 2 lc rgb gold set style line 2 lw 2 lc rgb purple set style line 4 lw 1 lc rgb sea green set style increment user plot f1 x 2 x 3 x f4 x should plot functions fl f2 f4 in your 3 newly defined line styles If a user defined line style is not found then the corresponding default linetype is used instead E g in the example above f3 x will be plotted using the default linetype 3 Set style line Each terminal has a default set of line and point types which can be seen by using the command test set style line defines a set of line types and widths and point types and sizes so that you can refer to them later by an index instead of repeating all the information at each invocation Syntax set style line lt index gt default set style line lt index gt linetype 1t lt line_type gt lt colorspec gt linecolor lc lt colorspec gt linewidth lw lt line_width gt pointtype pt lt point_type gt pointsize ps
163. be autoscaled but its final value will be between 0 and 200 both inclusive despite the lt sign If no lower or upper bound is specified the lt to also be ommited If lt ub gt is lower than lt lb gt the constraints will be turned off and full autoscaling will happen This feature is useful to plot measured data with autoscaling but providing a limit on the range to clip outliers or to guarantee a minimum range that will be displayed even if the data would not need such a big range The writeback option essentially saves the range found by autoscale in the buffers that would be filled by set xrange This is useful if you wish to plot several functions together but have the range determined by only some of them The writeback operation is performed during the plot execution so it must be specified before that command To restore the last saved horizontal range use set xrange restore For example set xrange 10 10 set yrange writeback plot sin x set yrange restore replot x 2 results in a yrange of 1 1 as found only from the range of sin x the 5 5 range of x 2 is ignored Executing show yrange after each command in the above example should help you understand what is going on In 2D xrange and yrange determine the extent of the axes trange determines the range of the parametric variable in parametric mode or the range of the angle in polar mode Similarly in parametric 3D xrange yrange and zrange govern
164. be used by fit Single blank records separate datablocks in a splot datafile splot treats datablocks as the equivalent of function y isolines No line will join points separated by a blank record If all datablocks contain the same number of points gnuplot will draw cross isolines between datablocks connecting corresponding points This is termed grid data and is required for drawing a surface for contouring set contour and hidden line removal set hidden3d See also splot grid_data p 172 It is no longer necessary to specify parametric mode for three column splots Matrix Gnuplot can interpret matrix input in two different ways The first of these assumes a uniform grid of x and y coordinates and assigns each value in the input matrix to one element of this uniform grid This is the default for ascii data input but not for binary input Example commands for plotting uniform matrix data splot file matrix using 1 2 3 ascii input splot file binary general using 1 2 3 binary input In a uniform grid matrix the z values are read in a row at a time i e zii z12 213 z14 z21 z22 223 224 z31 232 233 234 and so forth For ascii input a blank line or comment line ends the matrix and starts a new surface mesh You can select among the meshes inside a file by the index option to the splot command as usual The second interpretation assumes a non uniform grid with explicit x and y coordinates The fir
165. be used to compose or modify subsequent plotting commands See stats p 173 New or revised terminal drivers The qt driver implements an interactive terminal on top of the Qt graphics layer It can function either as a window in a full featured desktop enviroment or as a full screen application on a Qt based embedded device The qt terminal is new and may still have some rough edges Two terminal types support web based interactive display The HTML5 canvas terminal was introduced in version 4 4 The svg terminal has been extensively revised to include support for mousing and better incorporation of svg plots from gnuplot into larger svg xml documents The canvas terminal driver produces javascript output that draws onto the HTML canvas element of a web page It can produce either a complete web page containing a single plot or a script that can be embedded as part of an externally generated HTML document that perhaps contains multiple plots The embedded plots support browser side mousing including zoom unzoom x The lua terminal driver creates data intended to be further processed by a script in the lua programming language At this point only one such lua script gnuplot tikz lua is available It produces a TeX document suitable for use with the latex TikZ package Other lua scripts could be written to process the gnuplot output for use with other TeX packages or with other non TeX tools set term tikz is shorthand for set term l
166. bindings bind ctrl alt a removes binding for ctrl alt a note that builtins cannot be removed reset bind installs default builtin bindings bind deprecated form of reset bind bind a key to toggle something v 0 bind ctrl r v y 1 if v 2 set term x11 noraise else set term x11 raise Modifiers ctrl alt are case insensitive keys not ctrl alt a CtRl alT a ctrl alt a ctrl alt A List of modifiers alt meta ctrl alt List of supported special keys BackSpace Tab Linefeed Clear Return Pause Scroll_Lock Sys_Req P Escape Delete Home Left k Up Right Down P PageUp PageDown End Begin KP_Space KP_Tab KP_Enter KP_F1 KP_F2 KP_F3 KP_F4 KP_Home KP_Left KP_Up KP_Right KP_Down KP_PageUp KP_PageDown KP_End KP_Begin KP_Insert KP_Delete KP_Equal KP_Multiply KP_Add KP_Separator KP_Subtract KP_Decimal KP_Divide KP_1 KP_9 5 pi F12 The following are window events rather than actual keys Close See also help for mouse p 127 Bind space If gnuplot was built with configuration option enable raise console then typing lt space gt in the plot window raises gnuplot s command window This hotkey can be changed to ctrl space by starting gnuplot as gnuplot ctrlq or by setting the XResource gnuplot ctrlq See x11 command line options p 229 s
167. ce The algorithm used to remove the hidden parts of the surfaces has some additional features controllable by this command Specifying defaults will set them all to their default settings as detailed below If defaults is not given only explicitly specified options will be influenced all others will keep their previous values so you can turn on off hidden line removal via set no hidden3d without modifying the set of options you chose The first option offset influences the linetype used for lines on the back side Normally they are drawn in a linetype one index number higher than the one used for the front to make the two sides of the surface distinguishable You can specify a different linetype offset to add instead of the default 1 by offset lt offset gt Option nooffset stands for offset 0 making the two sides of the surface use the same linetype Next comes the option trianglepattern lt bitpattern gt lt bitpattern gt must be a number between 0 and 7 interpreted as a bit pattern Each bit determines the visibility of one edge of the triangles each surface is split up into Bit 0 is for the horizontal edges of the grid Bit 1 for the vertical ones and Bit 2 for the diagonals that split each cell of the original grid into two triangles The default pattern is 3 making all horizontal and vertical lines visible but not the diagonals You may want to choose 7 to see those diagonals as well The undefined lt level gt
168. column function can be used to select an input column by label rather than by column number For example if the data file contains s Height Weight Age val val valli then the following plot commands are all equivalent plot datafile using 3 1 using 3 2 plot datafile using column Age column 1 A gt using column Age column 2 plot datafile using Age Height using Age Weight To use the column labels in the plot legend use set key autotitle columnhead In addition to the actual columns 1 N in the input data file gnuplot presents data from several pseudo columns that hold bookkeeping information E g 0 or column 0 returns the sequence number of this data record within a dataset Please see pseudocolumns p 86 An empty lt entry gt will default to its order in the list of entries For example using 4 is interpreted as using 1 2 4 Tf the using list has only a single entry that lt entry gt will be used for y and the data point number pseudo column 0 is used for x for example plot file using 1 is identical to plot file using 0 1 If the using list has two entries these will be used for x and y See set style p and fit p for details about plotting styles that make use of data from additional columns of input scanf accepts several numerical specifications but gnuplot requires all inputs to be double precision floating point variables
169. command line Syntax plot lt file_name gt binary lt binary list gt nonuniform matrix index lt index list gt index lt name gt every lt every list gt thru lt thru expression gt using lt using list gt smooth lt option gt volatile noautoscale The modifiers binary index every thru using and smooth are discussed separately In brief binary allows data entry from a binary file default is ASCII index selects which data sets in a multi data set file are to be plotted every specifies which points within a single data set are to be plotted using determines how the columns within a single record are to be interpreted thru is a special case of using and smooth allows for simple interpolation and approximation splot has a similar syntax but does not support the smooth and thru options The noautoscale keyword means that the points making up this plot will be ignored when automatically determining axis range limits ASCII DATA FILES Data files should contain at least one data point per record using can select one data point from the record Records beginning with and also with on VMS will be treated as comments and ignored Each data point represents an x y pair For plots with error bars or error bars with lines see set style errorbars p or set style errorlines p 60 each data point is x y ydelta x y ylow yhigh x y xdelta x y xlow xhigh or x y xlow xhigh ylow
170. control characters in the text gnuplot simply counts the number of characters in the string when computing the box width this allows you to correct it Label Arbitrary labels can be placed on the plot using the set label command Syntax set label lt tag gt lt label text gt fat lt position gt left center right norotate rotate by lt degrees gt font lt name gt lt size gt noenhanced front back textcolor lt colorspec gt point lt pointstyle gt nopoint offset lt offset gt unset label lt tag gt show label The lt position gt is specified by either x y or x y z and may be preceded by first second graph screen or character to select the coordinate system See coordinates p 22 for details The tag is an integer that is used to identify the label If no lt tag gt is given the lowest unused tag value is assigned automatically The tag can be used to delete or modify a specific label To change any attribute of an existing label use the set label command with the appropriate tag and specify the parts of the label to be changed The lt label text gt can be a string constant a string variable or a string valued expression See strings p 39 sprintf p 27 and gprintf p 113 By default the text is placed flush left against the point x y z To adjust the way the label is positioned with respect to the point x y z add the justification parameter whic
171. controls all ranges t u v x y and z and allows x y and z to be fully autoscaled Autoscaling works the same way for polar mode as it does for parametric mode for plot with the extension that in polar mode set dummy can be used to change the independent variable from t see set dummy p 111 When tics are displayed on second axes but no plot has been specified for those axes x2range and y2range are inherited from xrange and yrange This is done before xrange and yrange are autoextended to a whole number of tics which can cause unexpected results You can use the fixmin or fixmax options to avoid this Examples This sets autoscaling of the y axis other axes are not affected set autoscale y This sets autoscaling only for the minimum of the y axis the maximum of the y axis and the other axes are not affected set autoscale ymin This disables extension of the x2 axis tics to the next tic mark thus keeping the exact range as found in the plotted data and functions set autoscale x2fixmin set autoscale x2fixmax This sets autoscaling of the x and y axes set autoscale xy This sets autoscaling of the x y z x2 and y2 axes set autoscale This disables autoscaling of the x y z x2 and y2 axes unset autoscale This disables autoscaling of the z axis only unset autoscale z Parametric mode When in parametric mode set parametric the xrange is as fully scalable as the y range In other words in parametric mode
172. cs at the border tics text with an offset of 0 0 5 characters and sets the start increment and end to 5 1 and 5 as requested The set grid options front back and layerdefault affect the drawing order of the xtics too Examples Make tics at 0 0 5 1 1 5 9 5 10 set xtics 0 5 10 Make tics at 10 5 0 5 10 set xtics 5 Make tics at 1 100 1e4 1e6 1e8 set logscale x set xtics 1 100 1e8 The explicit lt label gt lt pos gt lt level gt form allows arbitrary tic positions or non numeric tic labels In this form the tics do not need to be listed in numerical order Each tic has a position optionally with a label Note that the label is a string enclosed by quotes It may be a constant string such as hello may contain formatting information for converting the position into its label such as 3f clients or may be empty See set format p 113 for more information If no string is given the default label numerical is used An explicit tic mark has a third parameter the level The default is level 0 a major tic A level of 1 generates a minor tic If the level is specified then the label must also be supplied Examples set xtics low 0 medium 50 high 100 set xtics 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 set ytics bottom 0 10 top 20 set ytics bottom 0 10 1 top 20 In the second example all tics are labeled In the t
173. ction surface plot will have lt iso_1 gt iso u lines and lt iso_2 gt iso v lines If you only specify lt iso_1 gt lt iso_2 gt will be set to the same value as lt iso_1 gt By default sampling is set to 10 isolines per u or v axis A higher sampling rate will produce more accurate plots but will take longer These parameters have no effect on data file plotting An isoline is a curve parameterized by one of the surface parameters while the other surface parameter is fixed Isolines provide a simple means to display a surface By fixing the u parameter of surface s u v the iso u lines of the form c v s u0 v are produced and by fixing the v parameter the iso v lines of the form c u s u v0 are produced When a function surface plot is being done without the removal of hidden lines set samples controls the number of points sampled along each isoline see set samples p and set hidden3d p 116 The contour algorithm assumes that a function sample occurs at each isoline intersection so change in samples as well as isosamples may be desired when changing the resolution of a function surface contour Key The set key command enables a key or legend describing plots on a plot The contents of the key i e the names given to each plotted data set and function and samples of the lines and or symbols used to represent them are determined by the title and with options of the s plot command Please see plot title p and plo
174. culated for the grid points are not divided by the sum of the weights z Sumi w d_i zi If all zi are constant this effectively plots a bivariate kernel density estimate a kernel function one of the five defined above is placed at each data point the sum of these kernels is evaluated at every grid point and this smooth surface is plotted instead of the original data This is similar in principle to what the smooth kdensity option does to 1D datasets See kdensity2d dem for usage demo A slightly different syntax is also supported for reasons of backwards compatibility If no interpolation algorithm has been explicitly selected the qnorm algorithm is assumed Up to three comma separated optional parameters can be specified which are interpreted as the the number of rows the number of columns and the norm value respectively The dgrid3d option is a simple scheme which replaces scattered data with weighted averages on a regular grid More sophisticated approaches to this problem exist and should be used to preprocess the data outside gnuplot if this simple solution is found inadequate See also dgrid3d dem dgrid3d demo and scatter dem dgrid3d demo Dummy The set dummy command changes the default dummy variable names Syntax set dummy lt dummy var gt lt dummy var gt show dummy By default gnuplot assumes that the independent or dummy variable for the plot command is t if in parametric or po
175. d Cgm fontsize Fonts are scaled assuming the page is 6 inches wide If the size command is used to change the aspect ratio of the page or the CGM file is converted to a different width the resulting font sizes will be scaled up or down accordingly To change the assumed width use the width option Cgm linewidth The linewidth option sets the width of lines in pt The default width is 1 pt Scaling is affected by the actual width of the page as discussed under the fontsize and width options Cgm rotate The norotate option may be used to disable text rotation For example the CGM input filter for Word for Windows 6 0c can accept rotated text but the DRAW editor within Word cannot If you edit a graph for example to label a curve all rotated text is restored to horizontal The Y axis label will then extend beyond the clip boundary With norotate the Y axis label starts in a less attractive location but the page can be edited without damage The rotate option confirms the default behavior Cgm solid The solid option may be used to disable dashed line styles in the plots This is useful when color is enabled and the dashing of the lines detracts from the appearance of the plot The dashed option confirms the default behavior which gives a different dash pattern to each line type Cgm size Default size of a CGM plot is 32599 units wide and 23457 units high for landscape or 23457 units wide by 32599 units high for portrait
176. d you will find that the surface is drawn inside out Actually for grid data it is not necessary to keep the x values constant within a datablock nor is it necessary to keep the same sequence of y values gnuplot requires only that the number of points be the same for each datablock However since the surface mesh from which contours are derived connects sequentially corresponding points the effect of an irregular grid on a surface plot is unpredictable and should be examined on a case by case basis Grid data The 3D routines are designed for points in a grid format with one sample datapoint at each mesh inter section the datapoints may originate from either evaluating a function see set isosamples p 118 or reading a datafile see splot datafile p 169 The term isoline is applied to the mesh lines for both functions and data Note that the mesh need not be rectangular in x and y as it may be parameterized in u and v see set isosamples p 118 However gnuplot does not require that format In the case of functions samples need not be equal to isosamples i e not every x isoline sample need intersect a y isoline In the case of data files if there are an equal number of scattered data points in each datablock then isolines will connect the points in a datablock and cross isolines will connect the corresponding points in each datablock to generate a surface In either case contour and hidden3d modes
177. d places the text string at the corresponding 2D Bastia or 3D position 3 or 4 input columns of basic data are required Additional input columns may be used to pro vide information such as variable font size or text color see rgbcolor variable p 35 Y EA 3 columns x y string 2D version a tase 4 columns x y z string 3D version i TRH hte prizitres The font color rotation angle and other properties of the printed text may fjspecified as additional command options see set label p 122 The example below generates a 2D plot with text labels constructed from the city whose name is taken from column 1 of the input file and whose geographic coordinates are in columns 4 and 5 The font size is calculated from the value in column 3 in this case the population CityName String Size sprintf d s Scale Size String plot cities dat using 5 4 CityName stringcolumn 1 3 with labels If we did not want to adjust the font size to a different size for each city name the command would be much simpler plot cities dat using 5 4 1 with labels font Times 8 The labels style can also be used in 3D plots In this case four input column specifiers are required corresponding to X Y Z and text splot datafile using 1 2 3 4 with labels See also datastrings p 23 set style data p 148 Lines s The lines style connects adjacent points with straight line segments It may be used i
178. d to two decimals because those are the most available sizes of fonts in TeX systems All the options are optional If font information is given it must be at the end with size if present last The size is needed to select a size for the font even if the font name includes size information For example set term mp cmtt12 selects cmtt12 shrunk to the default size 10 This is probably not what you want or you would have used cmtt10 The following common ascii characters need special treatment in TeX hs 3 1 lt gt 7 Md and The five characters amp and can simply be escaped e g The three characters lt gt and can be wrapped in math mode e g lt The remainder require some TeX work arounds Any good book on TeX will give some guidance If you type your labels inside double quotes backslashes in TeX code need to be escaped doubled Using single quotes will avoid having to do this but then you cannot use n for line breaks As of this writing ver sion 3 7 of gnuplot processes titles given in a plot command differently than in other places and backslashes in TeX commands need to be doubled regardless of the style of quotes Metapost pictures are typically used in TeX documents Metapost deals with fonts pretty much the same way TeX does which is different from most other document preparation programs If the picture is included in a LaTeX document using the graphics package or i
179. d variable NaN to achieve the same result See using p for an example The real and imaginary parts of complex expressions are always real whatever the form in which they are entered in 3 2 the 3 and 2 are reals not integers Gnuplot can also perform simple operations on strings and string variables For example the expression A B eq AB evaluates as true illustrating the string concatenation operator and the string equality operator A string which contains a numerical value is promoted to the corresponding integer or real value if used in a numerical expression Thus 3 4 7 and 6 78 6 78 both evaluate to true An integer but not a real or complex value is promoted to a string if used in string concatenation A typical case is the use of integers to construct file names or other strings e g file 4 eq file4 is true Substrings can be specified using a postfixed range descriptor beg end For example ABCDEF 3 4 CD and ABCDEF 4 DEF The syntax string beg end is exactly equivalent to calling the built in string valued function substr string beg end except that you cannot omit either beg or end from the function call Functions The math functions in gnuplot are the same as the corresponding functions in the Unix math library except that all functions accept integer real and complex arguments unless otherwise noted Functions that accept or return angles e g sin x
180. de command substitutions etc In short it works anywhere it makes sense to work See also set datafile commentschars p 108 for specifying comment characters in data files Note that if a comment line ends in then the subsequent line is also treated as a comment Coordinates The commands set arrow set key set label and set object allow you to draw something at an arbitrary position on the graph This position is specified by the syntax lt system gt lt x gt lt system gt lt y gt lt system gt lt z gt 28 Each lt system gt can either be first second graph screen or character first places the x y or z coordinate in the system defined by the left and bottom axes second places it in the system defined by the second axes top and right graph specifies the area within the axes 0 0 is bottom left and 1 1 is top right for splot 0 0 0 is bottom left of plotting area use negative z to get to the base see set xyplane p 165 screen specifies the screen area the entire area not just the portion selected by set size with 0 0 at bottom left and 1 1 at top right and character gives the position in character widths and heights from the bottom left of the screen area screen 0 0 character coordinates depend on the chosen font size If the coordinate system for x is not specified first is used If the system for y is not specified the one used for x is adopted In some cases the
181. default size for ellipses with the size keyword This default size applies to data plots with only 2 columns of data x y and to function plots The two values are interpreted as the major and minor diameters as opposed to semi major and semi minor axes of the ellipse The default is set style ellipse size graph 0 05 0 03 Last but not least it is possible to set the default orientation with the angle keyword The orientation which is defined as the angle between the major axis of the ellipse and the plot s x axis must be given in degrees For defining ellipse objects see set object ellipse p 132 for the 2D plot style see ellipses p 47 Surface The command set surface controls the display of surfaces by splot Syntax set surface unset surface show surface The surface is drawn with the style specified by with or else the appropriate style data or function unset surface will cause splot to not draw points or lines corresponding to any of the function or data file points If you want to turn off the surface for an individual function or data file while leaving the others active use the nosurface keyword in the splot command Contours may still be drawn on the surface depending on the set contour option The combination unset surface set contour base is useful for displaying contours on the grid base See also set contour p 105 Table When table mode is enabled plot and splot commands print out a multicolum
182. default style of the plot elements in plots with boxes histograms candlesticks and filledcurves This default can be superseded by fillstyles attached to individual plots See also set style rectangle Syntax set style fill empty transparent solid lt density gt transparent pattern lt n gt border 1t lc lt colorspec gt noborder The default fillstyle is empty The solid option causes filling with a solid color if the terminal supports that The lt density gt parameter specifies the intensity of the fill color At a lt density gt of 0 0 the box is empty at lt density gt of 1 0 the inner area is of the same color as the current linetype Some terminal types can vary the density continuously others implement only a few levels of partial fill If no lt density gt parameter is given it defaults to 1 The pattern option causes filling to be done with a fill pattern supplied by the terminal driver The kind and number of available fill patterns depend on the terminal driver If multiple datasets using filled boxes are plotted the pattern cycles through all available pattern types starting from pattern lt n gt much as the line type cycles for multiple line plots The empty option causes filled boxes not to be filled This is the default By default border the box is bounded by a solid line of the current linetype border lt colorspec gt allows you to change the color of the border noborder
183. deg 164 A A 165 DAA S ee ee oR ea ed A a de 165 ce ey A tates EY OS ee sd de A ee oe ee a ee i ee ee e E 165 IYZOUGICSWY 2 4 ice oe See Re A ek SA Oe ek es ee 165 alaba a Xen A aes 2 a eee ee ee E D 165 EDMBIES gt i iy ee ee ee ee Ae eee a ee a a oe ee ee 165 pene de epd peepee esd ous sassy 44 Seah aweuieae beg o08 166 NAT ine oi we a ERR Pe ae ee eee ew eee eee eee ead 166 Be Git ht dr dy Grea Gee bee ae a a Ee A ane ae oe 166 oH fae aes te te as Ae en eens we ee BO ee ek a ee ee ee eo 166 NE a e e ER RR Bee aA eS Bae ee A 166 Ada belji 2 xo a SAA EE E A A AE A eee ee amp 166 gore ate epee SRR ee Re at he ee hea a ee a gee ee ee ee ee ee 166 Heb eeeeeaee eo oad eee ddd 4c beaeeaa obeys a pos 166 ee bo ahd Bete a Ae aa eee a ee EERE RIM AA Sew ae A 166 Sit A Ae be eee e Phd dR Oe Soe Ae Be oe EE Y 166 SEERA A See she Pe ee eS eS Soe ew E Se ble ele alee Ee ek ad 166 O A eR Ue or Oh A AL ke HA A 167 LAETA ia A ARA a A SAE Oe PO ASS ee be 167 A a ate ys oh A ee eee aaa e eects a 167 AT 4 ee eee Se CE eng tg ee ee ce Gs we Gees ee ee eee ae ee ee ee 167 eee Boe bay a ee AN 167 ACTOAXIS 2 e 2 Fb SEER Gere AEAGE A wee Ped eRe Eee bE Hered dae oe doers 5 167 Alabel sega bee ee oe Pee ES a ee EEE SE Dee ee eee a Gee eS 168 IES Ht 2 ae fh A ae eh a www RA O A O ae nn Go eee 168 DE avg ea eo eee Go ah da eg OSA ee 168 12 gnuplot 4 7 CONTENTS E ada we me e a eo ey tan aa 168 babel rs IR BOR a a RD OS RR AA Be BO Se GRE 168 A A
184. derives the TeX LaTeX ConTeXt styles from the script and writes them to the appropriate files fulldoc or standalone produces a full LaTeX document for direct compilation preamble or header may be used to put any additional LaTeX code into the document preamble in standalone mode With the tikzplot option the Apath plot command will be used instead of only path The following list of numbers of linetypes lt ltn gt defines the affected plotlines There exists a plotstyle for every linetype The default plotstyle is smooth for every linetype gt 1 By using the tikzarrows option the gnuplot arrow styles defined by the user will be mapped to TikZ arrow styles This is done by misusing the angle value of the arrow definition E g an arrow style with the angle 7 will be mapped to the TikZ style gp arrow 7 ignoring all the other given values By default the TikZ terminal uses the stealth arrow tips for all arrows To obtain the default gnuplot behaviour please use the gparrows option With cmykimages the CMYK color model will be used for inline image data instead of the RGB model All other colors like line colors etc are not affected by this option since they are handled e g by LaTeX s xcolor package This option is ignored if images are externalized By using the externalimages option all bitmap images will be written as external PNG images and included
185. deviation gt 0 003 untouched The default size for postscript output is 10 inches x 7 inches The default for eps output is 5 x 3 5 inches The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in inches but other units are possibly currently only cm The BoundingBox of the plot is correctly adjusted to contain the resized image Screen coordinates always run from 0 0 to 1 0 along the full length of the plot edges as specified by the size option NB this is a change from the previously recommended method of using the set size command prior to setting the terminal type The old method left the BoundingBox unchanged and screen coordinates did not correspond to the actual limits of the plot blacktext forces all text to be written in black even in color mode The epslatex driver offers a special way of controlling text positioning a If any text string begins with you also need to include a at the end of the text and the whole text will be centered both horizontally and vertically by LaTeX b If the text string begins with you need to continue it with a position specification up to two out of t b l r c the text itself and finally The text itself may be anything LaTeX can typeset as an LR box rule s may help for best positioning See also the documentation for the pslatex p terminal driver To create multiline labels use shortstack for
186. dex is not specified the entire file is plotted as a single data set Example s plot file index 4 5 For each point in the file the index value of the data set it appears in is available via the pseudo column column 2 This leads to an alternative way of distinguishing individual data sets within a file as shown below This is more awkward than the index command if all you are doing is selecting one data set for plotting but is very useful if you want to assign different properties to each data set See pseudocolumns p 86 lc variable p 35 Example plot file using 1 column 2 4 2 NaN very awkward plot file using 1 2 column 2 linecolor variable very useful index lt name gt selects the data set with name lt name gt Names are assigned to data sets in comment lines The comment character and leading white space are removed from the comment line If the resulting line starts with lt name gt the following data set is now named lt name gt and can be selected Example plot file index Population Please note that every comment that starts with lt name gt will name the following data set To avoid problems it may be useful to choose a naming scheme like Population or Population Smooth gnuplot includes a few general purpose routines for interpolation and approximation of data these are grouped under the smooth option More sophist
187. ding in height to the values found in columns 2 and 4 of the datafile Finally the commands set style histogram columnstacked plot file dat using 2 using 4 i Rovwstacked ClassE Clasif EE 5 will produce two vertical stacks one for each column of i __Gelurnnstacked data The stack at x 1 will contain a box for each entry 16 in column 2 of the datafile The stack at x 2 will contain 14 a box for each parallel entry in column 4 of the datafile 12 Because this interchanges gnuplot s usual interpretation 10 of input rows and columns the specification of key titles and x axis tic labels must also be modified accordingly See the comments given below 2 mo p a t set style histogram columnstacked plot u 5 key 1 uses first column to genecHate key titles plot u 5 title columnhead uses first row to generate xtic labels Note that the two examples just given present exactly the same data values but in different formats Newhistogram Syntax newhistogram lt title gt lt lt linetype gt fs lt fillstyle gt at lt x coord gt More than one set of histograms can appear in a single plot In this case you can force a gap between them and a separate label for each set by using the newhistogram command For example set style histogram cluster plot newhistogram Set A a using 1 using 2 using 3 newhistogram S
188. direction from which the graph is seen with set view When discussing data files the term record will be resurrected and used to denote a single line of text in the file that is the characters between newline or end of record characters A point is the datum extracted from a single record A datablock is a set of points from consecutive records delimited by blank records A line when referred to in the context of a data file is a subset of a datablock Linetypes colors and styles Each gnuplot terminal type provides a set of distinct linetypes These may differ in color in thickness in dot dash pattern or in some combination of color and dot dash The default linetypes for a particular terminal can be previewed by issuing the test command after setting the terminal type The pre defined colors and dot dash patterns are not guaranteed to be consistent for all terminal types but all terminals use Z the special linetype 1 to mean a solid line in the primary foreground color normally black Most terminals also recognize the special linetype bgnd to mean a solid line in the background color You can redefine the default linetype properties either interactively or via an initialization file This allows you to customize the colors and other properties of the lines used by all gnuplot plotting commands See set linetype p 124 By default successive functions or datafiles plotted by a single command will be assigned
189. e p 168 set colorbox p 105 and definitely the demo file demo pm3d dem Algorithm Let us first describe how a map surface is drawn The input data come from an evaluated function or from an splot data file Each surface consists of a sequence of separate scans isolines The pm3d algorithm fills the region between two neighbouring points in one scan with another two points in the next scan by a gray or color according to z values or according to an additional color column see help for using p 84 of these 4 corners by default the 4 corner values are averaged but this can be changed by the option corners2color In order to get a reasonable surface the neighbouring scans should not cross and the number of points in the neighbouring scans should not differ too much of course the best plot is with scans having same number of points There are no other requirements e g the data need not be gridded Another advantage is that the pm3d algorithm does not draw anything outside of the input measured or calculated region Surface coloring works with the following input data 1 splot of function or of data file with one or three data columns The gray color scale is obtained by mapping the averaged or corners2color z coordinate of the four corners of the above specified quadrangle into the range min_color_z max _color_z of zrange or cbrange providing a gray value in the range 0 1 This value can be used directly as
190. e set for each line style separately dashed default uses different dash patterns for different line types solid draws all plots with solid lines dashlength or dl scales the length of the dashed line segments by lt dl gt linewidth or lw scales all linewidths by lt lw gt lw 1 stands for 0 5bp which is the default line width when drawing with Metapost fontscale scales text labels for factor lt fontscale gt relative to default document font mppoints uses predefined point shapes drawn in Metapost texpoints uses easily configurable set of symbols defined with ConTeXt in the following way defineconversion my own points ss x mathematics circ setupGNUPLOTterminal context points tex pointset my own points inlineimages writes binary images to a string and only works in ConTeXt MKIV externalimages writes PNG files to disk and also works with ConTeXt MKII Gnuplot needs to have support for PNG images built in for this to work With font you can set font name and size in standalone graphics In non standalone input mode only the font size is important to reserve enough space for text labels The command set term context font myfont ss 10 will result in setupbodyfont myfont ss 10pt If you additionaly set fontscale to 0 8 for example then the resulting font will be 8pt big and set label font myfont 12 will come out as 9 6pt It is your own responsibility to provide proper typescripts a
191. e 2D mode works for plot commands and for splot maps i e set view with z rotation 0 90 180 270 or 360 degrees including set view map In this mode the mouse position is tracked and you can pan or zoom using the mouse buttons or arrow keys Some terminals support toggling individual plots on off by clicking on the corresponding key title or on a separate widget For 3D graphs splot the view and scaling of the graph can be changed with mouse buttons 1 and 2 respectively A vertical motion of Button 2 with the shift key held down changes the xyplane If additionally to these buttons the modifier lt ctrl gt is held down the coordinate axes are displayed but the data are suppressed This is useful for large data sets Mousing is not available inside multiplot mode When multiplot is completed using unset multiplot then the mouse will be turned on again but acts only on the most recent plot within the multiplot like replot does Syntax set mouse doubleclick lt ms gt nodoubleclick no zoomcoordinates noruler ruler at x y polardistance deg tan nopolardistance format lt string gt clipboardformat lt int gt lt string gt mouseformat lt int gt lt string gt no labels labeloptions no zoomjump no verbose unset mouse The options noruler and ruler switch the ruler off and on the latter optionally setting the origin at the given coordinates While the ruler is on the distance in u
192. e Go eR dd op ehh eh OEE PERS eee A Ya aE A Ee a ee Bee end oe amp GN CHONS AA Paramet s ose gee Sh Se Se RR Oe Oh ee A a NI ER BRT Yh ta ws hk A a ee epee el eee a Oe Be ee a oh ay A A eae OS Bowe eh cars ee nines Gee a Sb dig PR Ra Oe eh A a RRR EO ae EOS BEE Bee With fee eae AR AAA II OS 2 ee em et show Gray hei ete ears eevee dd ES Rd E ee cee ah Be wy ed O a btu ho Mega day ey ow Et ree ee a ee GO i ee ee 93 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 96 CONTENTS Bmareinj Yew ae Sag ed ee ewe OE a Gea ee DRE WS Bee eee ee me So 100 E aa se A Gedy ah OB ee A 100 Se RR a a ich ey ee cope et ee ee eee ee 102 label coi ra oka an hk A a Oe AE OE ee eo ae ARR aS 102 2 ae aa a aer ee SS ee arg neg se ea eee nae Ge Gt an ee ee ee eee ee game ee ee 103 D bone ae ee a eh SA ER ee ete a amp a A 103 Dh GS bb b44 AA DEALER asa en EE PRD EEL ARERR ee a 105 Colornames sido cia tae bea eg ee hee ea eae ee SERB OEE Oe eR Ee bee Glad a 105 A EE ded erties BE Oe ee De ee ted SALA ey Gedo Gh A 105 hed oa Whee sod eee 99 da See see es sae e e 106 E A A eB de eee ee eee A BBs Ge AU 106 Ee radio oes Gah AG Gin A A ee ae E ara Go Bs Ge a 106 mk BR eRe NA 106 Lidia idad eee eed eee heb oe Bees ea Shae 107 ee ee ee Te RCC Se E re eres 108 hk RO bebe Rad Peed Be AAA ae de ee Beg 108 aaea wie tees GC ke Se ea ae Se ee a a es ee 108 PO rrr eee rer eee ere Tee errr re 109 eee eee tate tes OO ee sde de A ee oe A ee i ee e e 109
193. e as the point it belongs to xticlabels may be shortened to xtic and so on Example splot data using 2 4 6 xtic 1 ytic 3 ztic 6 In this example the x and y axis tic labels are taken from different columns than the x and y coordinate values The z axis tics however are generated from the z coordinate of the corresponding point Example plot data using 1 2 xtic 3 gt 10 A B This example shows the use of a string valued function to generate x axis tick labels Each point in the data file generates a tick mark on x labeled either A or B depending on the value in column 3 X2ticlabels See plot using xticlabels p 86 Yticlabels See plot using xticlabels p 86 Y2ticlabels See plot using xticlabels p 86 s7 Zticlabels See plot using xticlabels p 86 Volatile The volatile keyword indicates that the data previously read from the input stream or file may not be available for re reading This tells the program to use refresh rather than replot commands whenever possible See refresh p 94 Errorbars Error bars are supported for 2D data file plots by reading one to four additional columns or using entries these additional values are used in different ways by the various errorbar styles In the default situation gnuplot expects to see three four or six numbers on each line of the data file either x y ydelta x y ylow yhigh x y xdelta x y xlo
194. e command executes the commands given as an argument string Newline characters are not allowed within the string Syntax eval lt string expression gt This is especially useful for a repetition of similar commands Example set_label x y text sprintf set label s at f f point pt 5 text x y eval set_label 1 1 one one eval set_label 2 1 two one eval set_label 1 2 one two Please see substitution macros p for another way to execute commands from a string Exit The commands exit and quit as well as the END OF FILE character usually Ctrl D terminate input from the current input stream terminal session pipe and file input pipe If input streams are nested inherited load scripts then reading will continue in the parent stream When the top level stream is closed the program itself will exit The command exit gnuplot will immediately and unconditionally cause gnuplot to exit even if the input stream is multiply nested In this case any open output files may not be completed cleanly Example of use bind ctrl x unset output exit gnuplot See help for batch interactive p for more details Fit The fit command can fit a user supplied expression to a set of data points x z or x y z using an imple mentation of the nonlinear least squares NLLS Marquardt Levenberg algorithm Any user defined variable occurring in the expression may serve as a fit parameter but t
195. e enhanced p for more details The width of all lines in the plot can be modified by the factor lt lw gt rounded sets line caps and line joins to be rounded butt is the default butt caps and mitered joins The default size for the output is 640 x 480 pixels The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in pixels but other units are possible currently cm and inch A size given in centimeters or inches will be converted into pixels assuming a resolution of 72 dpi Screen coordinates always run from 0 0 to 1 0 along the full length of the plot edges as specified by the size option lt font gt is in the format FontFace FontSize i e the face and the size comma separated in a single string FontFace is a usual font face name such as Arial If you do not provide FontFace the pngcairo terminal will use Sans FontSize is the font size in points If you do not provide it the pngcairo terminal will use a size of 12 points For example set term pngcairo font Arial 12 set term pngcairo font Arial to change the font face only set term pngcairo font 12 to change the font size only set term pngcairo font to reset the font name and size The fonts are retrieved from the usual fonts subsystems Under Windows those fonts are to be found and configured in the entry Fonts of the control panel Under UNIX they are handled by fontconfig Pango the library u
196. e font TeX handles the pictures as characters and uses minimal time to place them and the documents you make change more often than the pictures do It also saves a lot of TeX memory One last advantage of using the METAFONT driver is that the DVI file really remains device independent because no special commands are used as in the eepic and tpic drivers Mif The mif terminal driver produces Frame Maker MIF format version 3 00 It plots in MIF Frames with the size 15 10 cm and plot primitives with the same pen will be grouped in the same MIF group Plot primitives in a gnuplot page will be plotted in a MIF Frame and several MIF Frames are collected in one large MIF Frame The MIF font used for text is Times Several options may be set in the MIF 3 00 driver Syntax set terminal mif color colour monochrome polyline vectors help colour plots lines with line types gt 0 in colour MIF sep 2 7 and monochrome plots all line types in black MIF sep 0 polyline plots curves as continuous curves and vectors plots curves as collections of vectors help and print online help on standard error output both print a short description of the usage help also lists the options Examples set term mif colour polylines defaults set term mif defaults set term mif vectors set term mif help Mp The mp driver produces output intended to be input to the Metapost program Running Metapost on the file creates EPS files
197. e next y isoline and so on A single blank line a line containing no characters other than blank spaces and a carriage return and or a line feed separates one y isoline from the next See also splot datafile p 169 See also contours demo contours dem and contours with user defined levels demo discrete dem Data style This form of the command is deprecated Please see set style data p 148 Datafile The set datafile command options control interpretation of fields read from input data files by the plot splot and fit commands Six such options are currently implemented Set datafile fortran The set datafile fortran command enables a special check for values in the input file expressed as Fortran D or Q constants This extra check slows down the input process and should only be selected if you do in fact have datafiles containing Fortran D or Q constants The option can be disabled again using unset datafile fortran Set datafile nofpe_trap The set datafile nofpe_trap command tells gnuplot not to re initialize a floating point exception handler before every expression evaluation used while reading data from an input file This can significantly speed data input from very large files at the risk of program termination if a floating point exception is generated Set datafile missing The set datafile missing command allows you to tell gnuplot what character string is used in a data file to denote missing data Ex
198. e parametric function has been completed plot sin t t 2 title Parametric example with linespoints See also Parametric Mode Demos Ranges The optional ranges specify the region of the graph that will be displayed Note that if you specify the range as part of a plot command rather than using a separate set range statement you will not be able to pan or zoom the plot interactively and will not be able to change the range later and then replot Syntax so lt dummy var gt lt min gt lt max gt lt min gt lt max gt The first form applies to the independent variable xrange or trange if in parametric mode The second form applies to the dependent variable yrange and xrange too if in parametric mode lt dummy var gt is a new name for the independent variable The defaults may be changed with set dummy The optional lt min gt and lt max gt terms can be constant expressions or In non parametric mode the order in which ranges must be given is xrange and yrange In parametric mode the order for the plot command is trange xrange and yrange The following plot command shows setting the trange to pi pi the xrange to 1 3 1 3 and the yrange to 1 1 for the duration of the graph plot pi pi 1 3 1 3 1 1 sin t t 2 Note that the x2range and y2range cannot be specified here set x2range and set y2range must be used Ranges are interpreted in the order listed
199. e relative distances The default for acceleration is 7 Examples set term ggi acc 10 set term ggi acc 1 mode V1024x768 set term ggi V1024x768 Gif Syntax set terminal gif no enhanced no transparent rounded butt linewidth lt lw gt dashlength lt dl gt tiny small medium large giant font lt face gt lt pointsize gt fontscale lt scale gt size lt x gt lt y gt no crop animate delay lt d gt loop lt n gt no optimize background lt rgb_color gt PNG JPEG and GIF images are created using the external library libgd GIF plots may be viewed inter actively by piping the output to the display program from the ImageMagick package as follows set term gif set output display gif You can view the output from successive plot commands interactively by typing lt space gt in the display window To save the current plot to a file left click in the display window and choose save transparent instructs the driver to make the background color transparent Default is notransparent The linewidth and dashlength options are scaling factors that affect all lines drawn i e they are multiplied by values requested in various drawing commands butt instructs the driver to use a line drawing method that does not overshoot the desired end point of a line This setting is only applicable for line widths greater than 1 This setting is most useful when drawing horizontal o
200. e removed from this gradient which can be removed without changing the resulting colors by more than lt maxdeviation gt For almost every useful palette you may safely leave the defaults of lt samples gt 2000 and lt maxdeviation gt 0 003 untouched The default size for postscript output is 10 inches x 7 inches The default for eps output is 5 x 3 5 inches The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in inches but other units are possibly currently only cm The BoundingBox of the plot is correctly adjusted to contain the resized image Screen coordinates always run from 0 0 to 1 0 along the full length of the plot edges as specified by the size option NB this is a change from the previously recommended method of using the set size command prior to setting the terminal type The old method left the BoundingBox unchanged and screen coordinates did not correspond to the actual limits of the plot Fonts listed by fontfile or fontfile add encapsulate the font definitions of the listed font from a postscript Type 1 or TrueType font file directly into the gnuplot output postscript file Thus the enclosed font can be used in labels titles etc See the section postscript fontfile p for more details With fontfile delete a fontfile is deleted from the list of embedded files nofontfiles cleans the list of embedded fonts Examples set terminal postscript default set terminal postscript e
201. e rotated text by 90 degrees Otherwise rotated text will be typeset with letters stacked above each other If you use this option you must include usepackage graphicx in the preamble small will use scriptsize symbols as point markers Probably does not work with TeX only LaTeX2e Default is to use the default math size tiny uses scriptscriptstyle symbols default resets all options to their defaults no color no dashed lines pseudo rotated stacked text large point symbols lt fontsize gt is a number which specifies the font size inside the picture environment the unit is pt points i e 10 pt equals approx 3 5 mm If fontsize is not specified then all text inside the picture will be set in footnotesize Notes Remember to escape the character or other chars meaningful to La TeX by 2 backslashes It seems that dashed lines become solid lines when the vertices of a plot are too close I do not know if that is a general problem with the tpic specials or if it is caused by a bug in eepic sty or dvips dvipdfm The default size of an eepic plot is 5x3 inches You can change this using the size terminal option Points among other things are drawn using the LaTeX commands Diamond Box etc These commands no longer belong to the LaTeX2e core they are included in the latexsym package which is part of the base distribution and thus part of any LaTeX implementation Please do not forget to use this packa
202. e same thing as the previous example but uses the string iterator form of the command rather than an integer iterator Title By default each plot is listed in the key by the corresponding function or file name You can give an explicit plot title instead using the title option Syntax title lt text gt notitle lt ignored text gt title columnheader title columnheader N where lt text gt is a quoted string or an expression that evaluates to a string The quotes will not be shown in the key There is also an option that will interpret the first entry in a column of input data i e the column header as a text field and use it as the key title See datastrings p 23 This can be made the default by specifying set key autotitle columnhead 9 The line title and sample can be omitted from the key by using the keyword notitle A null title title gt is equivalent to notitle If only the sample is wanted use one or more blanks title Tf notitle is followed by a string this string is ignored If key autotitles is set which is the default and neither title nor notitle are specified the line title is the function name or the file name as it appears on the plot command If it is a file name any datafile modifiers specified will be included in the default title The layout of the key itself position title justification etc can be controlled by set key Please see set key p 119 for details Examples
203. e set isosamples p for information about defining the grid for a 3D function See splot datafile p for information about the requisite file structure for 3D data values set contour p and set cntrparam p for information about contours In splot control over the scales and labels of the axes are the same as with plot except that commands and options controlling the x2 and y2 axes have no effect whereas of course those controlling the z axis do take effect 9 Start up initialization When gnuplot is run it first looks for a system wide initialization file named gnuplotrc The location of this file is determined when the program is built and is reported by show loadpath The program then looks in the user s HOME directory for a file called gnuplot on Unix like systems or GNUPLOT INI on other systems Windows and OS 2 will look for it in the directory named in the environment variable GNUPLOT Windows will use USERPROFILE if GNUPLOT is not defined Note The program can be configured to look first in the current directory but this is not recommended because it is bad security practice String constants and string variables In addition to string constants most gnuplot commands also accept a string variable a string expression or a function that returns a string For example the following four methods of creating a plot all result in the same plot title four 4 graph4 Title for plot 4 graph n sprintf Title
204. e size of the PostScript font defaults sets all options to their defaults portrait 1 1 color linwidth 1 0 dashed Helvetica 18 The solid option is usually prefered if lines are colored as they often are in the editor Hardcopy will be black and white so dashed should be chosen for that Multiplot is implemented in two different ways The first multiplot implementation is the standard gnuplot multiplot feature set terminal tgif set output file obj set multiplot set origin x01 y01 set size xs ys plot set origin x02 y02 plot unset multiplot See set multiplot p 128 for further information The second version is the x y option for the driver itself The advantage of this implementation is that everything is scaled and placed automatically without the need for setting origins and sizes the graphs keep their natural x y proportions of 3 2 or whatever is fixed by set size If both multiplot methods are selected the standard method is chosen and a warning message is given Examples of single plots or standard multiplot set terminal tgif defaults set terminal tgif Times Roman 24 set terminal tgif landscape set terminal tgif landscape solid Examples using the built in multiplot mechanism set terminal tgif portrait 2 4 portrait 2 plots in the x and 4 in the y direction set terminal tgif 1 2 portrait 1 plot in the x and 2 in the y direction set terminal tgif landscape 3 3
205. e than one surface is plotted Contours drawn on the surface set contour surface don t work Labels and arrows are always visible and are unaffected The key box is never hidden by the surface As of gnuplot version 4 6 hidden3d also affects 3D plotting styles points labels vectors and impulses even if no surface is present in the graph Individual plots within the graph may be explicitly excluded from this processing by appending the extra option nohidden3d to the with specifier Hidden3d does not affect solid surfaces drawn using the pm3d mode To achieve a similar effect purely for pm3d surfaces use instead set pm3d depthorder To mix pm3d surfaces with normal hidden3d processing use the option set hidden3d front to force all elements included in hidden3d processing to be drawn after any remaining plot elements Then draw the surface twice once with lines lt 2 and a second time with pm3d The first instance will include the surface during calculation of occluded elements but will not draw the surface itself Functions are evaluated at isoline intersections The algorithm interpolates linearly between function points or data points when determining the visible line segments This means that the appearance of a function may be different when plotted with hidden3d than when plotted with nohidden3d because in the latter case functions are evaluated at each sample Please see set samples p and set isosamples p for discussion of the differen
206. e the red green and blue components in hexadecimal For example xO00ff00 is green The specification of additional colors other than the background is deprecated Examples set terminal png medium size 640 480 xffffff Use the medium size built in non scaleable non rotatable font Use white xffffff for the non transparent background set terminal png font arial 14 size 800 600 Searches for a scalable font with face name arial and sets the font size to 14pt Please see fonts p for details of how the font search is done set terminal png transparent truecolor enhanced Use 24 bits of color information per pixel with a transparent background Use the enhanced text mode to control the layout of strings to be printed Pngcairo The pngcairo terminal device generates output in png The actual drawing is done via cairo a 2D graphics library and pango a library for laying out and rendering text Syntax set term pngcairo no enhanced mono color solid dashed no transparent no crop background lt rgbcolor gt font lt font gt fontscale lt scale gt linewidth lt lw gt rounded butt dashlength lt d1 gt size lt XxX gt unit lt YY gt unit This terminal supports an enhanced text mode which allows font and other formatting commands sub scripts superscripts etc to be embedded in labels and other text strings The enhanced text mode syntax is shared with other gnuplot terminal types Se
207. ea to one side of the bounding line or curve Note Not all terminal types support this plotting mode Zooming a filled curve drawn from a datafile may produce empty or incorrect areas because gnuplot is clipping points and lines and not areas If the values of lt a gt lt x gt lt y gt are out of the drawing boundary then they are moved to the graph boundary Then the actually filled area in the case of option xy lt x gt lt y gt will depend on xrange and yrange Financebars The financebars style is only relevant for 2D data plotting of financial data It requires 1 x coordinate usually a date and 4 y values prices 5 columns date open low high close An additional 6th input column may be used to provide variable per record color information see line color p and rgbcolor variable p 35 s The symbol is a vertical line segment located horizon tally at the x coordinate and limited vertically by the high and low prices A horizontal tic on the left marks the opening price and one on the right marks the closing price The length of these tics may be changed by set l T with finane bars bars The symbol will be unchanged if the high and low prices are interchanged See set bars p 100 and candlesticks p 46 and also the inance demo Fsteps The fsteps style is only relevant to 2D plotting It con nects consecutive points with two line segments the first
208. ecified The close command can be used to close individual plot windows by number However after a reset those plot windows left due to persist cannot be closed with the command close A close without a number closes the current active plot window The gnuplot outboard driver gnuplot_x11 is searched in a default place chosen when the program is compiled You can override that by defining the environment variable GNUPLOT_DRIVER_DIR to point to a different location Plot windows will automatically be closed at the end of the session unless the persist option was given The options persist and raise are unset by default which means that the defaults persist no and raise yes or the command line options persist raise or the Xresources are taken If no persist or no raise are specified they will override command line options and Xresources Setting one of these options takes place immediately so the behaviour of an already running driver can be modified If the window does not get raised see discussion in raise p 94 The option title lt title name gt will supply the title name of the window for the current plot window or plot window lt n gt if a number is given Where or if this title is shown depends on your X window manager The size option can be used to set the size of the plot window The size option will only apply to newly created windows The position option can be used to set the position of the plot window T
209. ed Colored quadrangles are plotted one after another When plotting surfaces at s the later quadrangles overlap overdraw the previous ones Gnuplot is not virtual reality tool to calculate intersections of filled polygon meshes You may try to switch between scansforward and scansbackward to force the first scan of the data to be plotted first or last The default is scansautomatic where gnuplot makes a guess about scans order On the other hand the depthorder option completely reorders the quadrangles The rendering is performed after a depth sorting which allows to visualize even complicated surfaces see pm3d depthorder p for more details Scanorder By default the quadrangles making up a pm3d solid surface are rendered in the order they are encountered along the surface grid points This order may be controlled by the options scansautomatic scansforward scansbackward These scan options are not in general compatible with hidden surface removal If two successive scans do not have same number of points then it has to be decided whether to start taking points for quadrangles from the beginning of both scans flush begin from their ends flush end or to center them flush center Note that flush center end are incompatible with scansautomatic if you specify flush center or flush end and scansautomatic is set it is silently switched to scansforward If two subsequent scans do not have the same number of points the option ftrian
210. ed text The second text will be horizontally centered on the first Thus a will result in an a with a slash through it You can also shift the second text vertically by preceding the second text with a number which will define the fraction of the current fontsize by which the text will be raised or lowered In this case the number and text must be enclosed in brackets because more than one character is necessary If the overprinted text begins with a number put a space between the vertical offset and the text abc 5 000 otherwise no space is needed abc 5 You can change the font for one or both strings 7 a 5 2 oP an a with a one fifth size o on top and the space between the number and the slash is necessary but you can t change it after the beginning of the string Neither can you use any other special syntax within either string You can of course use control characters by escaping them see below such as a 7 You can access special symbols numerically by specifying character code in octal e g Symbol 245 is the symbol for infinity This does not work for multibyte encodings like UTF 8 however In a UTF 8 environment you should be able to enter multibyte sequences implicitly by typing or otherwise selecting the character you want You can escape control characters using e g and so on But be aware that strings in double quotes are parsed differen
211. elements Similarly the keyword nocontours will turn off contouring for an individual plot even if the global property set contour is active Similarly the keyword nosurface will turn off the 3D surface for an individual plot even if the global property set surface is active The keywords may be abbreviated as indicated Note that the linewidth pointsize and palette options are not supported by all terminals Examples This plots sin x with impulses plot sin x with impulses This plots x with points x 2 with the default plot x w points x 2 This plots tan x with the default function style file data 1 with lines plot 2 5 tan x data 1 with 1 This plots leastsq dat with impulses plot leastsq dat w i This plots the data file population with boxes plot population with boxes This plots exper dat with errorbars and lines connecting the points errorbars require three or four columns 0 plot exper dat w lines exper dat notitle w errorbars Another way to plot exper dat with errorlines errorbars require three or four columns plot exper dat w errorlines This plots sin x and cos x with linespoints using the same line type but different point types plot sin x with linesp 1t 1 pt 3 cos x with linesp 1t 1 pt 4 This plots file data with points of type 3 and twice usual size plot data with points pointtype 3 pointsize 2 This plots
212. elta boxwidth 2 4 columns x y ylow yhigh boxwidth 2 5 columns x y ylow yhigh xdelta u The boxwidth will come from the fourth column if the y errors are given as ydelta and the boxwidth was not previously set to 2 0 set boxwidth 2 0 or from the fifth column if the y errors are in the form of ylow yhigh The special case boxwidth 2 0 is for four column data with y errors in the form ylow yhigh In this case the boxwidth will be calculated so that each box touches the adjacent boxes The width will also be calculated in cases where three column data are used 1 I An additional 4th 5th or 6th input column may be used to provide variable per datapoint color information see linecolor p and rgbcolor variable p 35 The error bar will be drawn in the same color as the border of the box The box height is determined from the y error in the same way as it is for the yerrorbars style either from y ydelta to y ydelta or from ylow to yhigh depending on how many data columns are provided See also With box errorbars LA a KA m tH a H errorbar demo Boxes The boxes style is only relevant to 2D plotting It draws a box centered about the given x coordinate that extends from the x axis not from the graph border to the given y coordinate It uses 2 or 3 columns
213. ems Some terminals have many additional options The options used by a previous invocation set term lt term gt lt options gt of a given lt term gt are remembered thus subsequent set term lt term gt does not reset them This helps in printing for instance when switching among different terminals previous options don t have to be repeated The command set term push remembers the current terminal including its settings while set term pop restores it This is equivalent to save term and load term but without accessing the filesystem Therefore they can be used to achieve platform independent restoring of the terminal after printing for instance After gnuplot s startup the default terminal or that from startup file is pushed automatically Therefore portable scripts can rely that set term pop restores the default terminal on a given platform unless another terminal has been pushed explicitly For more information see the complete list of terminals p 175 Termoption The set termoption command allows you to change the behaviour of the current terminal without requiring a new set terminal command Only one option can be changed per command and only a small number of options can be changed this way Currently the only options accepted are set termoption no enhanced set termoption font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt set termoption fontscale lt scale gt set termoption solid dashed set termoption linewidth lt
214. ent interlace instructs the driver to generate interlaced PNGs Default is nointerlace The linewidth and dashlength options are scaling factors that affect all lines drawn i e they are multiplied by values requested in various drawing commands By default output png images use 256 indexed colors The truecolor option instead creates TrueColor images with 24 bits of color information per pixel Transparent fill styles require the truecolor option See fillstyle p 148 A transparent background is possible in either indexed or TrueColor images butt instructs the driver to use a line drawing method that does not overshoot the desired end point of a line This setting is only applicable for line widths greater than 1 This setting is most useful when drawing horizontal or vertical lines Default is rounded The details of font selection are complicated Two equivalent simple examples are given below set term png font arial 11 set term png font arial 11 For more information please see the separate section under fonts p 32 The output plot size lt x y gt is given in pixels it defaults to 640x480 Please see additional information under canvas p and set size p 145 Blank space at the edges of the finished plot may be trimmed using the crop option resulting in a smaller final image size Default is nocrop The background color must be given in the form xrrggbb where x is the literal character x and rrggbb ar
215. enu inserts a horizontal menu separator I inserts a vertical menu separator Button puts the next macro on a push button instead of a menu Macros take two lines with the macro name menu entry on the first line and the macro on the second line Leading spaces are ignored Macro commands INPUT Input string with prompt terminated by E0S or ENTER EOS End Of String terminator Generates no output OPEN Get name of a file to open with the title of the dialog terminated by EOS followed by a default filename terminated by EOS or ENTER SAVE Get name of a file to save Parameters like OPEN DIRECTORY Get name of a directory with the title of the dialog terminated by EOS or ENTER Macro character substitutions ENTER Carriage Return r TAB Tab 011 ESC Escape 033 A 001 031 Macros are limited to 256 characters after expansion Wenuplot ini The Windows text window and the windows terminal will read some of their options from the WGNU PLOT section of wgnuplot ini This file is located in the user s application data directory Here s a sample wgnuplot ini file WGNUPLOT TextOrigin 0 0 TextSize 640 150 TextFont Terminal 9 TextWrap 1 TextLines 400 SysColors 0 GraphOrigin 0 150 GraphSize 640 330 GraphFont Arial 10 GraphColor 1 GraphToTop 1 GraphDoublebuffer 1 GraphOversampling 0 GraphAntialiasing 1 GraphBackground 255 255 255 Border
216. er initialized by the parameter file but not adjusted by fit For clarity it may be useful to designate variables as fixed parameters so that their values are reported by fit The keyword FIXED has to appear in exactly this form Short introduction fit is used to find a set of parameters that best fits your data to your user defined function The fit is judged on the basis of the sum of the squared differences or residuals SSR between the input data points and the function values evaluated at the same places This quantity is often called chisquare i e the Greek letter chi to the power of 2 The algorithm attempts to minimize SSR or more precisely WSSR as the residuals are weighted by the input data errors or 1 0 before being squared see fit error_estimates p for details That s why it is called least squares fitting Let s look at an example to see what is meant by non linear but first we had better go over some terms Here it is convenient to use z as the dependent variable for user defined functions of either one independent variable z f x or two independent variables z f x y A parameter is a user defined variable that fit will adjust i e an unknown quantity in the function declaration Linearity non linearity refers to the relationship of the dependent variable z to the parameters which fit is adjusting not of z to the independent variables x and or y To be technical the seco
217. er eee ee ee ae ee eG 220 whee dt cae de ood dd cir AAN te oS 220 POUT wg ee eek Boers A A A RA 220 Da Dh EAE Ra aie EAA ee A EERE SORES Se Oe eS 221 TkeanVAS s g05 0 8 ee go He OOO ee a ee REE ww gle le SS ae ee a SY 221 Se AB OER ein ale ath hea tea ata feos a UNG A oh ah S Ae eA a ge ne on ae ee A 222 Soe ee ota fe ARA EA a AA OA oe 222 NWS p aa adi Pati Oe wt A A ee a A ee Pine ae eR A a 223 A feta We oe E ee Ge ues ea ee tee ae ata a Se ge 223 Wind wsj s EROS eee ee eee ee AAA eee e a A 223 ans Era co E taa 224 A EN 224 RURAL A A II ic he A O dB ES 224 Wenuploteminily sec a a aa A A eee a 225 CONTENTS 15 A IIA Command lIne OPpbions 2 4 44 eu eee EEA RR Ree a we y Monochrome options over eee hey ee eee EEE bee ees Color TESOUTGES ee Soar ac A ha a e ee we a we a EA AER a a a ave ene a 4 Grayscale resources o aaee a p a a a A eS ee ee de i Line resources cas rr aa a a a Aa A Be a A a we aw 1 1 pm3d _resources 23 4 22404 Gs o AA we Ee eee eee RR Be LT Other TeSOUrCES coco sae aad ana 4 4 Gy Sa are RR eee Gace AAAS HR i 6 da Known limitations External libraries VI Index 225 226 227 229 229 230 230 231 231 232 232 233 233 233 233 233 T Part I Gnuplot Copyright Copyright C 1986 1993 1998 2004 2007 Thomas Williams Colin Kelley Permission to use copy and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose with or without fee i
218. ere is also a group of names which attempt to be machine independent Endian Often the endianess of binary data in the file does not agree with the endianess used by the platform on which gnuplot is running Several words can direct gnuplot how to arrange bytes For example endian little means treat the binary file as having byte significance from least to greatest The options are little least significant to greatest significance big greatest significance to least significance default assume file endianess is the same as compiler swap swab Interchange the significance If things don t look right try this Gnuplot can support middle pdp endian if it is compiled with that option Filetype For some standard binary file formats gnuplot can extract all the necessary information from the file in question As an example format edf will read ESRF Header File format files For a list of the currently supported file formats type show datafile binary filetypes There is a special file type called auto for which gnuplot will check if the binary file s extension is a quasi standard extension for a supported format Command line keywords may be used to override settings extracted from the file The settings from the file override any defaults See set datafile binary p 108 for details Avs avs is one of the automatically recognized binary file types for images AVS is an extremely simple format suitable mostly for s
219. erwise metapost will try and use TeX to process the text and it won t work Changing font sizes in TeX has no effect on the size of mathematics and there is no foolproof way to make such a change except by globally setting a magnification factor This is the purpose of the magnification option It must be followed by a scaling factor All text NOT the graphs will be scaled by this factor Use this if you have math that you want at some size other than the default 10pt Unfortunately all math will be the same size but see the discussion below on editing the MP output mag will also work under notex but there seems no point in using it as the font size option below works as well The option psnfss uses postscript fonts in combination with LaTeX Since this option only makes sense if LaTeX is being used the latex option is selected automatically This option includes the following packages for LaTeX inputenc latin1 fontenc T1 mathptmx helvet scaled 09 2 courier latexsym and textcomp The option psnfss version7 uses also postscript fonts in LaTeX option latex is also automatically selected but uses the following packages with LaTeX inputenc latin1 fontenc T1 times mathptmx helvet and courier The option nopsnfss is the default and uses the standard font cmr10 if not otherwise specified The option prologues takes a value as an additional argument and adds the line prologues lt value gt to the metapost file If a value of
220. es in a manner very similar to the plot command splot provides only a single x y and z axis there is no equivalent to the x2 and y2 secondary axes provided by plot See the plot p command for many options available in both 2D and 3D plots Syntax splot lt ranges gt lt iteration gt lt function gt lt datafile gt datafile modifiers lt title spec gt with lt style gt definitions lt function gt where either a lt function gt or the name of a data file enclosed in quotes is supplied The function can be a mathematical expression or a triple of mathematical expressions in parametric mode By default splot draws the xy plane completely below the plotted data The offset between the lowest ztic and the xy plane can be changed by set xyplane The orientation of a splot projection is controlled by set view See set view p 157 and set xyplane p 165 for more information The syntax for setting ranges on the splot command is the same as for plot In non parametric mode the order in which ranges must be given is xrange yrange and zrange In parametric mode the order is urange vrange xrange yrange and zrange The title option is the same as in plot The operation of with is also the same as in plot except that the plotting styles available to splot are limited to lines points linespoints dots and impulses the error bar capabilities of plot are not available for splot The datafile options
221. et B b using 1 using 2 using 3 The labels Set A and Set B will appear beneath the respective sets of histograms under the overall x axis label The newhistogram command can also be used to force histogram coloring to begin with a specific color linetype By default colors will continue to increment successively even across histogram boundaries Here is an example using the same coloring for multiple histograms plot newhistogram Set A lt 4 a using 1 using 2 using 3 newhistogram Set B lt 4 b using 1 using 2 using 3 Similarly you can force the next histogram to begin with a specified fillstyle If the fillstyle is set to pattern then the pattern used for filling will be incremented automatically The at lt x coord gt option sets the x coordinate position a of the following histogram to lt x coord gt For example eb Chia set style histogram cluster Pro m 7 set style data histogram br Phas set style fill solid 1 0 border 1 a 7 set xtic 1 offset character 0 0 3 ma plot newhistogram Set A a file dat u 1t 1 u2t2 ST 7 newhistogram Set B at 8 a o file dat u2t2 u2t2 do 0 2 2 4 5 F 4 40 di 42 Set A Set E will position the second histogram to start at x 8 Automated iteration over multiple columns If you want to create a histogram from many columns of data in a single file it
222. exp x Instead fit either a exp x or exp x b A technical issue the parameters must not be too different in magnitude The larger the ratio of the largest and the smallest absolute parameter values the slower the fit will converge If the ratio is close to or above the inverse of the machine floating point precision it may take next to forever to converge or refuse to converge at all You will have to adapt your function to avoid this e g replace parameter by 1e9 parameter in the function definition and divide the starting value by 1e9 If you can write your function as a linear combination of simple functions weighted by the parameters to be fitted by all means do so That helps a lot because the problem is no longer nonlinear and should converge with only a small number of iterations perhaps just one Some prescriptions for analysing data given in practical experimentation courses may have you first fit some functions to your data perhaps in a multi step process of accounting for several aspects of the underlying theory one by one and then extract the information you really wanted from the fitting parameters of those functions With fit this may often be done in one step by writing the model function directly in terms of the desired parameters Transforming data can also quite often be avoided though sometimes at the cost of a more difficult fit problem If you think this contradicts the previous paragraph about simplifyin
223. ext window 3 If set output PRN is used output will go to a temporary file When you exit from gnuplot or when you change the output with another set output command a dialog box will appear for you to select a printer port If you choose OK the output will be printed on the selected port passing unmodified through the print manager It is possible to accidentally or deliberately send printer output meant for one printer to an incompatible printer Text menu The gnuplot text window has the following options on a pop up menu accessed by pressing the right mouse button or selecting Options from the system menu Copy to Clipboard copies marked text to the clipboard Paste copies text from the clipboard as if typed by the user Choose Font selects the font used in the text window System Colors when selected makes the text window honor the System Colors set using the Control Panel When unselected text is black or blue on a white background Wrap long lines when selected lines longer than the current window width are wrapped Update wgnuplot ini saves the current settings to the initialisation file wgnuplot ini which is located in the user s application data directory 225 Wenuplot mnu If the menu file wgnuplot mnu is found in the same directory as gnuplot then the menu specified in wgnuplot mnu will be loaded Menu commands Menu starts a new menu with the name on the following line EndMenu ends the current m
224. f else statements See if p 70 Part IV Terminal types Complete list of terminals Gnuplot supports a large number of output formats These are selected by choosing an appropriate terminal type possibly with additional modifying options See set terminal p 153 This document may describe terminal types that are not available to you because they were not configured or installed on your system To see a list of terminals available on a particular gnuplot installation type set terminal with no modifiers Aed767 The aed512 and aed767 terminal drivers support AED graphics terminals The two drivers differ only in their horizontal ranges which are 512 and 768 pixels respectively Their vertical range is 575 pixels There are no options for these drivers Aifm NOTE Outdated terminal originally written for Adobe Illustrator 3 0 Since Adobe Illustrator un derstands PostScript level 1 commands directly you should use set terminal post levell instead Syntax set terminal aifm color monochrome lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt Aqua This terminal relies on AquaTerm app for display on Mac OS X Syntax set terminal aqua lt n gt title lt wintitle gt size lt x gt lt y gt font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt no enhanced solid dashed dl lt dashlength gt where lt n gt is the number of the window to draw in default is 0 lt wintitle gt is the name shown in the title
225. fier specifies which parameters are to be adjusted either directly or by referencing a parameter file Examples f x a x 2 b x c g x y a x 2 b y 2 c x y FIT_LIMIT 1e 6 fit f x measured dat via start par fit f x measured dat using 3 7 5 via start par fit f x data trash dat using 1 2 3 via a b c fit g x y surface dat using 1 2 3 1 via a b c fit a0 al x 1 a2 x 1 a3 x measured dat via a0 al a2 a3 fit a x bxy surface dat using 1 2 3 1 via a b fit yaks a x b yaks surface dat u 1 2 3 1 via a b fit a x bxy c t foo dat using 1 2 3 4 1 via a b c h x y t u v a x b y c t d u exv fit h x y t u v foo dat using 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 via a b c d e After each iteration step detailed information about the current state of the fit is written to the display The same information about the initial and final states is written to a log file fit log This file is always appended to so as to not lose any previous fit history it should be deleted or renamed as desired By using the command set fit logfile the name of the log file can be changed If gnuplot was built with this option and you activated it using set fit errorvariables the error for each fitted parameter will be stored in a variable named like the parameter but with _err appended Thus the errors can be used as input for further computations The
226. file thru f y also works i e you can use y as the dummy variable thru is parsed for splot and fit but has no effect Using The most common datafile modifier is using It tells the program which columns of data in the input file are to be plotted Syntax plot file using lt entry gt lt entry gt lt entry gt format If a format is specified it is used to read in each datafile record using the C library scanf function Otherwise the record is interpreted as consisting of columns fields of data separated by whitespace spaces and or tabs but see datafile separator p 108 Each lt entry gt may be a simple column number that selects the value from one field of the input file a string that matches a column label in the first line of a data set an expression enclosed in parentheses or a special function not enclosed in parentheses such as xticlabels 2 If the entry is an expression in parentheses then the function column N may be used to indicate the value in column N That is column 1 refers to the first item read column 2 to the second and so on The special symbols 1 2 are shorthand for column 1 column 2 The function valid N tests whether the value in the Nth column is a valid number If each column of data in the input file contains a label in the first row rather than a data value this label can be used to identify the column on input and or in the plot legend The
227. fitted function has on the final values Some of the fit output information including the parameter error estimates is more meaningful if accurate data error estimates have been provided The statistical overview describes some of the fit output and gives some background for the practical guidelines Statistical overview The theory of non linear least squares NLLS is generally described in terms of a normal distribution of errors that is the input data is assumed to be a sample from a population having a given mean and a Gaussian normal distribution about the mean with a given standard deviation For a sample of sufficiently large size and knowing the population standard deviation one can use the statistics of the chisquare dis tribution to describe a goodness of fit by looking at the variable often called chisquare Here it is sufficient to say that a reduced chisquare chisquare degrees of freedom where degrees of freedom is the number of datapoints less the number of parameters being fitted of 1 0 is an indication that the weighted sum of squared deviations between the fitted function and the data points is the same as that expected for a random sample from a population characterized by the function with the current value of the parameters and the given standard deviations If the standard deviation for the population is not constant as in counting statistics where variance counts then each point should be individual
228. fmt format string See set xdata p 158 and set timefmt p 155 The EEPIC Imagen LaTeX and TPIC drivers allow in a string to specify a newline Label coordinates and text can also be read from a data file see labels p 55 Examples To set a label at 1 2 to y x use set label y x at 1 2 To set a Sigma of size 24 from the Symbol font set at the center of the graph use set label S at graph 0 5 0 5 center font Symbol 24 To set a label y x 2 with the right of the text at 2 3 4 and tag the label as number 3 use set label 3 y x 2 at 2 3 4 right To change the preceding label to center justification use set label 3 center To delete label number 2 use unset label 2 To delete all labels use unset label To show all labels in tag order use show label To set a label on a graph with a timeseries on the x axis use for example set timefmt d m y H M set label Harvest at 25 8 93 1 To display a freshly fitted parameter on the plot with the data and the fitted function do this after the fit but before the plot set label sprintf a 3 5g par_a at 30 15 bfit gprintf b s 1077 S par_b set label bfit at 30 20 To display a function definition along with its fitted parameters use f x atb x fit f x datafile via a b set label GPFUN_f at graph 05 95 set label sprintf a 4g a at graph 05 90 set label sprintf b g b at graph 05 85 T
229. font_size gt is the size in pts of the desired font If auxfile is specified it directs the driver to put the PostScript commands into an auxiliary file instead of directly into the LaTeX file This is useful if your pictures are large enough that dvips cannot handle them The name of the auxiliary PostScript file is derived from the name of the TeX file given on the set output command it is determined by replacing the trailing tex actually just the final extent in the file name with ps in the output file name or if the TeX file has no extension ps is appended The ps is included into the tex file by a special psfile command Remember to close the output file before next plot unless in multiplot mode Gnuplot versions prior to version 4 2 generated plots of the size 5 x 3 inches using the ps la tex terminal while the current version generates 5 x 3 5 inches to be consistent with the postscript eps terminal In addition the character width is now estimated to be 60 of the font size while the old epslatex terminal used 50 To reach the old format specify the option oldstyle The pslatex driver offers a special way of controlling text positioning a If any text string begins with you also need to include a at the end of the text and the whole text will be centered both horizontally and vertically by LaTeX b If the text string begins with you need to continue it with a position specification up to t
230. found at 18 gnuplot 4 7 http www gnuplot info Before seeking help please check file FAQ pdf or the above website for FAQ Frequently Asked Questions list If you need help as a gnuplot user please use the newsgroup comp graphics apps gnuplot We prefer that you read the messages through the newsgroup rather than subscribing to the mailing list which is also available and carries the same set of messages Instructions for subscribing to gnuplot mailing lists may be found via the gnuplot development website on SourceForge http sourceforge net projects gnuplot The address for mailing to list members is gnuplot info lists sourceforge net Bug reports and code contributions should be uploaded to the trackers at http sourceforge net projects gnuplot support Please check previous bug reports if the bug you want to report has not been already fixed in a newer version of gnuplot A mailing list for those interested in development version of gnuplot is gnuplot beta lists sourceforge net When posting a question please include full details of the gnuplot version the terminal type and the operating system you are using A small script demonstrating the problem may be useful Function plots are preferable to datafile plots New features This section lists major additions since version 4 4 For a more exhaustive list see the NEWS file New syntax This version of gnuplot introduces command iteration and bloc
231. from x1 y1 to x1 y2 and the second from x1 y2 to x2 y2 The input column requires are the same as for plot styles lines and points The difference between fsteps and steps is that fsteps traces first the change in y and then the change in x steps traces first the change in x and then the change in y with fsbepes See also Fillsteps The fillsteps style is exactly like steps except that the area between the curve and y 0 is filled in the current fill style See steps p 57 Histeps The histeps style is only relevant to 2D plotting It is intended for plotting histograms Y values are as sumed to be centered at the x values the point at x1 is represented as a horizontal line from x0 x1 2 y1 to x1 x2 2 y1 The lines representing the end points are extended so that the step is centered on at x Adja cent points are connected by a vertical line at their aver age x that is from x1 x2 2 y1 to x1 x2 2 y2 The input column requires are the same as for plot styles lines and points with histeps If autoscale is in effect it selects the xrange from the data rather than the steps so the end points will appear only half as wide as the others See also histeps is only a plotting style gnuplot does not have the ability to create bins and determine their population
232. from some data set 5 Histograms The histograms style is only relevant to 2D plotting It produces a bar chart from a sequence of parallel data columns Each element of the plot command must specify a single input data source e g one column of the input file possibly with associated tic values or key titles Four styles of histogram layout are currently supported set style histogram clustered gap lt gapsize gt set style histogram errorbars gap lt gapsize gt lt linewidth gt set style histogram rowstacked set style histogram columnstacked The default style corresponds to set style histogram clustered gap 2 In this style each set of parallel data values is collected into a group of boxes clustered at the x axis coordinate corresponding to their sequential position row in the selected datafile columns Thus if lt n gt datacolumns are selected the first cluster is centered about x 1 and contains lt n gt boxes whose heights are taken from the first entry in the corresponding lt n gt data columns This is followed by a gap and then a second cluster of boxes centered about x 2 corresponding to the second entry in the respective data columns and so on The default gap width of 2 indicates that the empty space between clusters is equivalent to the width of 2 boxes All boxes derived from any one column are given the same fill color and or pattern see set style fill p 148 Each cluster of boxes is derived from
233. fy restores the default behavior set xtics with no options restores the default border or axis if xtics are being displayed otherwise it has no effect Any previously specified tic frequency or position and labels are retained Positions of the tics are calculated automatically by default or if the autofreq option is given otherwise they may be specified in either of two forms The implicit lt start gt lt incr gt lt end gt form specifies that a series of tics will be plotted on the axis between the values lt start gt and lt end gt with an increment of lt incr gt If lt end gt is not given it is assumed to be infinity The increment may be negative If neither lt start gt nor lt end gt is given lt start gt is assumed to be negative infinity lt end gt is assumed to be positive infinity and the tics will be drawn at integral multiples of lt incr gt If the axis is logarithmic the increment will be used as a multiplicative factor If you specify to a negative lt start gt or lt incr gt after a numerical value e g rotate by lt angle gt or offset lt offset gt the parser fails because it subtracts lt start gt or lt incr gt from that value As a workaround specify O0 lt start gt resp 0 lt incr gt in that case Example set xtics border offset 0 0 5 5 1 5 Fails with invalid expression at the last comma set xtics border offset 0 0 5 0 5 1 5 or set xtics offset 0 0 5 border 5 1 5 Sets ti
234. g the fit function you are correct A singular matrix message indicates that this implementation of the Marquardt Levenberg algorithm can t calculate parameter values for the next iteration Try different starting values writing the function in another form or a simpler function Finally a nice quote from the manual of another fitting package fudgit that kind of summarizes all these n issues Nonlinear fitting is an art Help The help command displays built in help To specify information on a particular topic use the syntax help lt topic gt If lt topic gt is not specified a short message is printed about gnuplot After help for the requested topic is given a menu of subtopics is given help for a subtopic may be requested by typing its name extending the help request After that subtopic has been printed the request may be extended again or you may go back one level to the previous topic Eventually the gnuplot command line will return If a question mark is given as the topic the list of topics currently available is printed on the screen History history command lists or saves previous entries in the history of the command line editing or executes an entry Here you find usage by examples history show the complete history history 5 show last 5 entries in the history history quiet 5 show last 5 entries without entry numbers history hist gp write the complete history to file h
235. g the requested aspect ratio depends on the terminal selected The graph area will be the largest rectangle of aspect ratio lt r gt that will fit into the specified portion of the output leaving adequate margins of course set size square is a synonym for set size ratio 1 Both noratio and nosquare return the graph to the default aspect ratio of the terminal but do not return lt xscale gt or lt yscale gt to their default values 1 0 ratio and square have no effect on 3D plots but do affect 3D projections created using set view map See also set view equal p 157 which forces the x and y axes of a 3D onto the same scale Examples To set the size so that the plot fills the available canvas set size 1 1 To make the graph half size and square use set size square 0 5 0 5 To make the graph twice as high as wide use set size ratio 2 Style Default plotting styles are chosen with the set style data and set style function commands See plot with p for information about how to override the default plotting style for individual functions and data sets See plotting styles p for a complete list of styles Syntax set style function lt style gt set style data lt style gt show style function show style data Default styles for specific plotting elements may also be set Syntax set style arrow lt n gt lt arrowstyle gt set style fill lt fillstyle gt set style histogram lt histogram style options gt
236. ge Instead of latexsym you can also include the amssymb package All drivers for LaTeX offer a special way of controlling text positioning If any text string begins with you also need to include a at the end of the text and the whole text will be centered both horizontally and vertically If the text string begins with you need to follow this with a position specification up to two out of t b l r f the text itself and finally The text itself may be anything LaTeX can typeset as an LR box rule s may help for best positioning Examples set term eepic output graphs as eepic macros inside a picture environment input the resulting file in your LaTeX document set term eepic color tiny rotate 8 eepic macros with color macros scripscriptsize point markers true rotated text and all text set with 8pt About label positioning Use gnuplot defaults mostly sensible but sometimes not really best set title LaTeX gamma Force centering both horizontally and vertically set label LaTeX gamma at 0 0 Specify own positioning top here set xlabel t LaTeX gamma 7 The other label account for long ticlabels set ylabel r LaTeX gamma rule 7mm Opt Emf The emf terminal generates an Enhanced Metafile Format file This file format is recognized by many Windows applications Syntax set terminal emf color monochrome
237. ger can be used The power of the norm can be specified as a single optional parameter This algorithm is the default Finally several smoothing kernels are available to calculate weighted averages z Sumi w d_i zi Sumi w d_i where zi is the value of the i th data point and di is the distance between the current grid point and the location of the i th data point All kernels assign higher weights to data points that are close to the current grid point and lower weights to data points further away The following kernels are available gauss w d exp d d cauchy w d 1 1 d d exp w d exp d box w d 1 if d lt 1 0 otherwise hann w d 0 5 1 cos 2 pixd if d lt 1 w d 0 otherwise When using one of these five smoothing kernels up to two additional numerical parameters can be specified dx and dy These are used to rescale the coordinate differences when calculating the distance di sqrt x x_i dx 2 y yi dy 2 where x y are the coordinates of the current grid point and x_i yi are the coordinates of the i th data point The value of dy defaults to the value of dx which defaults to 1 The parameters dx and dy make it possible to control the radius over which data points contribute to a grid point IN THE UNITS OF THE DATA ITSELF The optional keyword kdensity2d which must come after the name of the kernel but before the optional scale parameters modifies the algorithm so that the values cal
238. given coordinate is not an absolute position but a relative value e g the second position in set arrow rto In most cases the given value serves as difference to the first position If the given coordinate resides in a logarithmic axis the value is interpreted as factor For example set logscale x set arrow 100 5 rto 10 2 plots an arrow from position 100 5 to position 1000 7 since the x axis is logarithmic while the y axis is linear If one or more axis is timeseries the appropriate coordinate should be given as a quoted time string according to the timefmt format string See set xdata p 158 and set timefmt p 155 Gnuplot will also accept an integer expression which will be interpreted as seconds from 1 January 2000 Datastrings Data files may contain string data consisting of either an arbitrary string of printable characters containing no whitespace or an arbitrary string of characters possibly including whitespace delimited by double quotes The following sample line from a datafile is interpreted to contain four columns with a text field in column 3 1 000 2 000 Third column is all of this text 4 00 Text fields can be positioned within a 2 D or 3 D plot using the commands plot datafile using 1 2 4 with labels splot datafile using 1 2 3 4 with labels A column of text data can also be used to label the ticmarks along one or more of the plot axes The example below plots a line through a series of points
239. gle_visibility fishplot_plot_2 Cgi The cgi and hegi terminal drivers support SCO CGI drivers hegi is for printers the environment variable CGIPRNT must be set cgi may be used for either a display or hardcopy the environment variable CGIDISP is checked first then CGIPRNT These terminals have no options Cgm The cgm terminal generates a Computer Graphics Metafile Version 1 This file format is a subset of the ANSI X3 122 1986 standard entitled Computer Graphics Metafile for the Storage and Transfer of Picture Description Information Syntax set terminal cgm color monochrome solid dashed no rotate lt mode gt width lt plot_width gt linewidth lt line_width gt font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt background lt rgb_color gt deprecated lt color0 gt lt color1 gt lt color2 gt solid draws all curves with solid lines overriding any dashed patterns lt mode gt is landscape portrait or default lt plot_width gt is the assumed width of the plot in points lt line_width gt is the line width in points default 1 lt fontname gt is the name of a font see list of fonts below lt fontsize gt is the size of the font in points default 12 The first six options can be in any order Selecting default sets all options to their default values The mechanism of setting line colors in the set term command is deprecated Instead you should set the background using a separate keywo
240. gles specifies whether color triangles are drawn at the scan tail s where there are not enough points in either of the scan This can be used to draw a smooth map boundary Gnuplot does not do true hidden surface removal for solid surfaces but often it is sufficient to render the component quadrangles in order from furthest to closest T his mode may be selected using the options set pm3d depthorder hidden3d The depthorder option orders the solid quadrangles the hidden3d option similarly orders the bounding lines if drawn Note that the global option set hidden3d does not affect pm3d surfaces Clipping Clipping with respect to x y coordinates of quadrangles can be done in two ways cliplin all 4 points of each quadrangle must be defined and at least 1 point of the quadrangle must lie in the x and y ranges clip4in all 4 points of each quadrangle must lie in the x and y ranges Color_assignment 3 columns of data x y z The coloring setup as well as the color box drawing are determined by set palette There can be only one palette for the current plot Drawing of several surfaces with different palettes can be achieved by multiplot with fixed origin and size don t forget to use set palette maxcolors when your terminal is running out of available colors There is a single gray color value associated to each drawn pm3d quadrangle no smooth color change among vertices The value is calculated from z coordinates from the sur
241. gnuplot 4 7 An Interactive Plotting Program Thomas Williams amp Colin Kelley Version 4 7 organized by Hans Bernhard Broker Ethan A Merritt and others Major contributors alphabetic order Hans Bernhard Broker John Campbell Robert Cunningham David Denholm Gershon Elber Roger Fearick Carsten Grammes Lucas Hart Lars Hecking P ter Juh sz Thomas Koenig David Kotz Ed Kubaitis Russell Lang Timoth e Lecomte Alexander Lehmann Alexander Mai Bastian Markisch Ethan A Merritt Petr Mikul k Carsten Steger Shigeharu Takeno Tom Tkacik Jos Van der Woude James R Van Zandt Alex Woo Johannes Zellner Copyright 1986 1993 1998 2004 Thomas Williams Colin Kelley Copyright 2004 2011 various authors Mailing list for comments gnuplot info lists sourceforge net Mailing list for bug reports gnuplot bugs lists sourceforge net Web access preferred http sourceforge net projects gnuplot This manual was originally prepared by Dick Crawford 2012 Version 4 7 cvs N CONTENTS Contents Gnuplo 16 Copyright 16 a ct ntroduction 16 Seeking assistance 17 18 E eee ae Ye Baan AS do hd ek de de ee HU a a who amp OS eg 18 asta shasta ENGR ce Se Se Be te rae Gs RB a ee Ch e 19 D eei A Us Dd de SP Pe ee a OS Ee ee OO Sea Be ES 19 O E NN 19 AAA 19 New time date handlingl a 19 a eae Ba et ce Ae a Bee AAA 19 New or revised terminal drivers ee 19
242. gnuplot contains either a built in copy of those files or a default hardcoded path You can use this variable have the postscript terminal use custom prologue files rather than the default files See postscript prologue p 215 Expressions In general any mathematical expression accepted by C FORTRAN Pascal or BASIC is valid The prece dence of these operators is determined by the specifications of the C programming language White space spaces and tabs is ignored inside expressions Complex constants are expressed as lt real gt lt imag gt where lt real gt and lt imag gt must be numerical constants For example 3 2 represents 3 2i 0 1 represents i itself The curly braces are explicitly required here Note that gnuplot uses both real and integer arithmetic like FORTRAN and C Integers are entered as 1 10 etc reals as 1 0 10 0 lel 3 5e 1 etc The most important difference between the two forms is in division division of integers truncates 5 2 2 division of reals does not 5 0 2 0 2 5 In mixed expressions integers are promoted to reals before evaluation 5 2e0 2 5 The result of division of a negative integer by a positive one may vary among compilers Try a test like print 5 2 to determine if your system chooses 2 or 3 as the answer The integer expression 1 0 may be used to generate an undefined flag which causes a point to ignored x Or you can use the pre define
243. h antialiasing provides subpixel accuracy so that gnuplot can draw a line from non integer coordinates This avoids wobbling effects on diagonal lines plot x for example Postscript Several options may be set in the postscript driver Syntax set terminal postscript default set terminal postscript landscape portrait eps enhanced noenhanced defaultplex simplex duplex fontfile add delete lt filename gt nofontfiles no adobeglyphnames level1 leveldefault color colour monochrome background lt rgbcolor gt nobackground solid dashed dashlength dl lt DL gt linewidth lw lt LW gt rounded butt clip noclip palfuncparam lt samples gt lt maxdeviation gt size lt XX gt unit lt YY gt unit blacktext colortext colourtext font fontname fontsize lt fontsize gt fontscale lt scale gt If you see the error message Can t find PostScript prologue file Please see and follow the instructions in postscript prologue p 215 landscape and portrait choose the plot orientation eps mode generates EPS Encapsulated PostScript output which is just regular PostScript with some additional lines that allow the file to be imported into a variety of other applications The added lines are PostScript comment lines so the file may still be printed by itself To get EPS output use the eps mode and make only one plot per file In eps m
244. h may be left right or center indicating that the point is to be at the left right or center of the text Labels outside the plotted boundaries are permitted but may interfere with axis labels or other text If rotate is given the label is written vertically if the terminal can do so of course If rotate by lt degrees gt is given conforming terminals will try to write the text at the specified angle non conforming terminals will treat this as vertical text Font and its size can be chosen explicitly by font lt name gt lt size gt if the terminal supports font settings Otherwise the default font of the terminal will be used Normally the enhanced text mode string interpretation if enabled for the current terminal is applied to all text strings including label text The noenhanced property can be used to exempt a specific label from the enhanced text mode processing The can be useful if the label contains underscores for example See enhanced text p 24 Tf front is given the label is written on top of the graphed data Tf back is given the default the label is written underneath the graphed data Using front will prevent a label from being obscured by dense data textcolor lt colorspec gt changes the color of the label text lt colorspec gt can be a linetype an rgb color or a palette mapping See help for colorspec p and palette p 138 textcolor may be abbreviated tc tc default resets the text color
245. h ylow yhigh If data are provided in an unsupported mixed form the using filter on the plot command should be used to set up the appropriate form For example if the data are of the form x y xdelta ylow yhigh then you can use plot data using 1 2 1 3 1 3 4 5 with xyerrorbars An additional input column 5th or 7th may be used to provide variable per datapoint color information Yerrorbars The yerrorbars or errorbars style is only relevant to 2D data plots yerrorbars is like points except that a vertical error bar is also drawn At each point x y a line is drawn from x y ydelta to x y ydelta or from x ylow to x yhigh depending on how many data columns are provided A tic mark is placed at the ends of the error bar unless set bars is used see set bars p for details Either 3 or 4 input columns are required 3 columns x y ydelta 4 columns x y ylow yhigh 59 with yerrorbars H heads An additional input column 4th or 5th may be used to provide information such as variable point color See also errorbar demo Xerrorlines The xerrorlines style is only relevant to 2D data plots xerrorlines is like linespoints except that a horizontal error line is also drawn At each point x y a line is drawn from xlow y to xhigh y or from x xdelta y to x xdelta y depending on how many data columns are provided A tic mark is placed at the ends of the err
246. he active plot window the one selected by set term wxt lt n gt is interactive Its behaviour is shared with other terminal types See mouse p 127 for details It also has some extra icons which are supposed to be self explanatory This terminal supports an enhanced text mode which allows font and other formatting commands sub scripts superscripts etc to be embedded in labels and other text strings The enhanced text mode syntax is shared with other gnuplot terminal types See enhanced p for more details lt font gt is in the format FontFace FontSize i e the face and the size comma separated in a single string FontFace is a usual font face name such as Arial If you do not provide FontFace the wxt terminal will use Sans FontSize is the font size in points If you do not provide it the wxt terminal will use a size of 10 points For example set term wxt font Arial 12 set term wxt font Arial to change the font face only set term wxt font 12 to change the font size only set term wxt font to reset the font name and size The fonts are retrieved from the usual fonts subsystems Under Windows those fonts are to be found and configured in the entry Fonts of the control panel Under UNIX they are handled by fontconfig Pango the library used to layout the text is based on utf 8 Thus the wxt terminal has to convert from your encoding to utf 8 The default input encoding is based on yo
247. he position option will only apply to newly created windows The size or aspect ratio of a plot may be changed by resizing the gnuplot window Linewidths and pointsizes may be changed from within gnuplot with set linestyle For terminal type x11 gnuplot accepts when initialized the standard X Toolkit options and resources such as geometry font and name from the command line arguments or a configuration file See the X 1 man page or its equivalent for a description of such options A number of other gnuplot options are available for the x11 terminal These may be specified either as command line options when gnuplot is invoked or as resources in the configuration file Xdefaults They are set upon initialization and cannot be altered during a gnuplot session except persist and raise X11_fonts Upon initial startup the default font is taken from the X11 resources as set in the system or user Xdefaults file or on the command line Example gnuplot font lucidasans bold 12 A new default font may be specified to the x11 driver from inside gnuplot using set term x11 font lt fontspec gt The driver first queries the X server for a font of the exact name given If this query fails then it tries to interpret lt fontspec gt as lt font gt lt size gt lt slant gt lt weight gt and to construct a full X11 font name of the form lt font gt lt weight gt lt s gt lt size gt lt encoding g
248. he return type of the expression must be real Syntax fit lt ranges gt lt expression gt lt datafile gt datafile modifiers via lt parameter file gt lt var1 gt lt var2 gt Ranges may be specified to temporarily limit the data which is to be fitted any out of range data points are ignored The syntax is dummy_variable lt min gt lt max gt analogous to plot see plot ranges p 88 lt expression gt is any valid gnuplot expression although it is usual to use a previously user defined function of the form f x or f x y lt datafile gt is treated as in the plot command All the plot datafile modifiers using every except smooth and the deprecated thru are applicable to fit See plot datafile p 78 The default data formats for fitting functions with a single independent variable z f x are z or x z That is if there is only a single column then it is the dependent variable and the line numbers is the independent variable If there are two columns the first is the independent variable and the second is the dependent variable a Those formats can be changed with the datafile using qualifier for example to take the z value from a different column or to calculate it from several columns A third using qualifier a column number or an expression if present is interpreted as the standard deviation of the corresponding z value and is used to compute a weight for the datum 1 s 2 O
249. he trange is contained within one quadrant autoscaling will produce a polar plot of only that single quadrant Explicitly setting one or two ranges but not others may lead to unexpected results See also Bars The set bars command controls the tics at the ends of error bars and also at the end of the whiskers belonging to a boxplot Syntax set bars small large fullwidth lt size gt front back unset bars show bars small is a synonym for 0 0 and large for 1 0 The default is 1 0 if no size is given The keyword fullwidth is relevant only to boxplots and to histograms with errorbars It sets the width of the errorbar ends to be the same as the width of the associated box It does not change the width of the box itself The front and back keywords are relevant only to errorbars attached to filled rectangles boxes candlesticks histograms Bind Show the current state of all hotkey bindings See bind p 36 Bmargin The command set bmargin sets the size of the bottom margin Please see set margin p 126 for details Border The set border and unset border commands control the display of the graph borders for the plot and splot commands Note that the borders do not necessarily coincide with the axes with plot they often do but with splot they usually do not Syntax set border lt integer gt front back linewidth lw lt line_width gt linestyle ls lt line_style gt linetype 1t lt l
250. hes by 3 inches The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in inches but other units are possible currently only cm If rotate is specified rotated text especially a rotated y axis label is possible the packages graphics or graphicx are needed The stacked y axis label mechanism is then deactivated Examples About label positioning Use gnuplot defaults mostly sensible but sometimes not really best set title LaTeX gamma Force centering both horizontally and vertically set label LaTeX gamma at 0 0 Specify own positioning top here set xlabel t LaTeX gamma 7 The other label account for long ticlabels set ylabel r LaTeX gamma rule 7mm Opt Linux The linux driver has no additional options to specify It looks at the environment variable GSVGAMODE for the default mode if not set it uses 1024x768x256 as default mode or if that is not possible 640x480x16 standard VGA Lua The lua generic terminal driver works in conjunction with an external Lua script to create a target specific plot file Currently the only supported target is TikZ gt pdflatex Information about Lua is available at http www lua org Syntax set terminal lua lt target name gt lt file name gt lt script_args gt help A target name or file name in quotes for a scr
251. hird only the end tics are labeled In the fourth the unlabeled tic is a minor tic Normally if explicit tics are given they are used instead of auto generated tics Conversely if you specify set xtics auto or the like it will erase any previously specified explicit tics You can mix explicit and auto generated tics by using the keyword add which must appear before the tic style being added Example set xtics 0 5 10 set xtics add Pi 3 14159 This will automatically generate tic marks every 0 5 along x but will also add an explicit labeled tic mark at pi However they are specified tics will only be plotted when in range Format or omission of the tic labels is controlled by set format unless the explicit text of a label is included in the set xtics lt label gt form Minor unlabeled tics can be added automatically by the set mxtics command or at explicit positions by the set xtics lt pos gt 1 form Xtics time_data In case of timeseries data axis tic position values must be given as quoted dates or times according to the format timefmt If the lt start gt lt incr gt lt end gt form is used lt start gt and lt end gt must be given according to timefmt but lt incr gt must be in seconds Times will be written out according to the format given on set format however Examples set xdata time set timefmt d m set xtics format b d set xrange 01 12 06 12 set xtics 01 12
252. hly maps a single numerical value onto a particular color Two such mappings are always in effect palette frac maps a fractional value between 0 and 1 onto the full range of the color palette palette cb maps the range of the color axis onto the same palette See set cbrange p 168 See also set colorbox p 105 You can use either of these to select a constant color from the current palette palette z maps the z value of each plot segment or plot element into the cbrange mapping of the palette This allows smoothly varying color along a 3d line or surface It also allows coloring 2D plots by palette values read from an extra column of data not all 2D plot styles allow an extra column Background color Most terminals now allow you to set an explicit background color for the plot The special linetype bgnd will draw in this color and bgnd is also recognized as a color Examples This will erase a section of the canvas by writing over it in the background color set term wxt background rgb gray75 set object 1 rectangle from x0 y0 to x1 y1 fillstyle solid fillcolor bgnd This will draw an invisible line along the x axis plot O 1t bgnd Linecolor variable lc variable tells the program to use the value read from one column of the input data as a linetype index and use the color belonging to that linetype This requires a corresponding additional column in the using specifier Text colors can be set similarly using tc variable
253. hogonal 2D projection into a 2D plot like map Syntax set view lt rot_x gt lt rot_z gt lt scale gt lt scale_z gt set view map set view no equal xy xyz show view where lt rotx gt and lt rot_z gt control the rotation angles in degrees in a virtual 3D coordinate system aligned with the screen such that initially that is before the rotations are performed the screen horizontal axis is x screen vertical axis is y and the axis perpendicular to the screen is z The first rotation applied is lt rot_x gt around the x axis The second rotation applied is lt rot_z gt around the new z axis Command set view map is used to represent the drawing as a map It can be used for contour plots or for color pm3d maps In the latter take care that you properly use zrange and cbrange for input data point filtering and color range scaling respectively lt rot_x gt is bounded to the 0 180 range with a default of 60 degrees while lt rot_z gt is bounded to the 0 360 range with a default of 30 degrees lt scale gt controls the scaling of the entire splot while lt scale_z gt scales the z axis only Both scales default to 1 0 Examples set view 60 30 1 1 set view 0 5 The first sets all the four default values The second changes only scale to 0 5 Equal_axes The command set view equal xy forces the unit length of the x and y axes to be on the same scale and chooses that scale so that the plot will fit on
254. icated data processing may be performed by preprocessing the data externally or by using fit with an appropriate model Syntax smooth unique frequency cumulative cnormal kdensity csplines acsplines bezier sbezier unique frequency cumulative and cnormal plot the data after making them monotonic Each of the other routines uses the data to determine the coefficients of a continuous curve between the endpoints of the data This curve is then plotted in the same manner as a function that is by finding its value at uniform intervals along the abscissa see set samples p L45 and connecting these points with straight line segments if a line style is chosen If autoscale is in effect the ranges will be computed such that the plotted curve lies within the borders of the graph If autoscale is not in effect and the smooth option is either acspline or cspline the sampling of the generated curve is done across the intersection of the x range covered by the input data and the fixed abscissa range as defined by set xrange If too few points are available to allow the selected option to be applied an error message is produced The minimum number is one for unique and frequency four for acsplines and three for the others The smooth options have no effect on function plots Acsplines The acsplines option approximates the data with a natural smoothing spline After the data are made monotonic in x see smooth unique p
255. ide of the color range use color of the nearest extreme If the cb axis is autoscaled in splot then the colorbox range is taken from zrange Points drawn in splot pm3d palette can be filtered by using different zrange and cbrange Please see set xrange p 160 for details on set cbrange p 168 syntax See also set palette p 138 and set colorbox p 105 Cbtics The set cbtics command controls major labeled tics on the color box axis Please see set xtics p 162 for details Shell The shell command spawns an interactive shell To return to gnuplot type logout if using VMS exit or the END OF FILE character if using Unix or exit if using MS DOS or OS 2 There are two ways of spawning a shell command using system command or via if using VMS The former command takes a string as a parameter and thus it can be used anywhere among other gnuplot commands while the latter syntax requires to be the only command on the line Control will return immediately to gnuplot after this command is executed For example in MS DOS or OS 2 dir or system dir prints a directory listing and then returns to gnuplot Other examples of the former syntax system date set time plot a dat print 1 if print replot set out system lpr x ps Splot splot is the command for drawing 3D plots well actually projections on a 2D surface but you knew that It can create a plot from functions or data read from fil
256. idth lt lw gt rounded butt dashlength lt d1 gt size lt XxX gt unit lt YY gt unit The cairolatex terminal prints a plot like terminal epscairo or terminal pdfcairo but transfers the texts to LaTeX instead of including them in the graph For reference of options not explained here see pdfcairo p 208 eps and pdf select the type of grahics output Use eps with latex dvips and pdf for pdflatex blacktext forces all text to be written in black even in color mode The cairolatex driver offers a special way of controlling text positioning a If any text string begins with you also need to include a at the end of the text and the whole text will be centered both horizontally and vertically by LaTeX b If the text string begins with you need to continue it with a position specification up to two out of t b l r c the text itself and finally The text itself may be anything LaTeX can typeset as an LR box rule s may help for best positioning See also the documentation for the pslatex p terminal driver To create multiline labels use shortstack for example set ylabel r shortstack first line second line The back option of set label commands is handled slightly different than in other terminals Labels using back are printed behind all other elements of the plot while labels using front are printed above everything else The driver produces two different fi
257. ies the format to all axes The following two commands are equivalent set format y 2f set ytics format 2f The length of the string is restricted to 100 characters The default format is g but other formats such as 2f or 3 0em are often desirable The format g is often desirable for LaTeX If no format string is given the format will be returned to the default If the empty string is given tics will have no labels although the tic mark will still be plotted To eliminate the tic marks use unset xtics or set tics scale 0 Newline n and enhanced text markup is accepted in the format string Use double quotes rather than single quotes in this case See also syntax p 41 Characters not preceded by are printed verbatim Thus you can include spaces and labels in your format string such as g m which will put m after each number If you want itself double it g See also set xtics p 162 for more information about tic labels and set decimalsign p 109 for how to use non default decimal separators in numbers printed this way See also electron demo electron dem Gprintf The string function gprintf format x uses gnuplot s own format specifiers as do the gnuplot commands set format set timestamp and others These format specifiers are not the same as those used by the standard C language routine sprintf gprintf accepts only a single variable to be formatted Gnuplot also
258. ill be appended to the window title unless a title has been supplied manually and the icon will be labeled Gnuplot lt n gt The active window may be distinguished by a change in cursor from default to crosshair The x11 terminal can connect to X windows previously created by an outside application via the option window followed by a string containing the X ID for the window in hexadecimal format Gnuplot uses that external X window as a container since X does not allow for multiple clients selecting the ButtonPress event In this way gnuplot s mouse features work within the contained plot window set term x11 window 220001e The x11 terminal supports enhanced text mode see enhanced p 24 subject to the available fonts In order for font size commands embedded in text to have any effect the default x11 font must be scalable Thus the first example below will work as expected but the second will not set term x11 enhanced font arial 15 set title 20 Big Medium 5 Small set term x11 enhanced font terminal 14 set title 20 Big Medium 5 Smal1 Plot windows remain open even when the gnuplot driver is changed to a different device A plot window can be closed by pressing the letter q while that window has input focus or by choosing close from a window manager menu All plot windows can be closed by specifying reset which actually terminates the subprocess which maintains the windows unless persist was sp
259. ils of each A default style may be chosen by set style function and set style data 0 By default each function and data file will use a different line type and point type up to the maximum number of available types All terminal drivers support at least six different point types and re use them in order if more are required To see the complete set of line and point types available for the current terminal type test p 174 If you wish to choose the line or point type for a single plot lt line_type gt and lt point_type gt may be specified These are positive integer constants or expressions that specify the line type and point type to be used for the plot Use test to display the types available for your terminal You may also scale the line width and point size for a plot by using lt line width gt and lt point_size gt which are specified relative to the default values for each terminal The pointsize may also be altered globally see set pointsize p for details But note that both lt point_size gt as set here and as set by set pointsize multiply the default point size their effects are not cumulative That is set pointsize 2 plot x w p ps 3 will use points three times default size not six It is also possible to specify pointsize variable either as part of a line style or for an individual plot In this case one extra column of input is required i e 3 columns for a 2D plot and 4 columns for a 3D splot
260. imal point after floats that have only zeroes following the decimal point a positive integer which defines the field width 0 the digit not the letter immediately preceding the field width which indicates that leading zeroes are to be used instead of leading blanks and a decimal point followed by a non negative integer which defines the precision the minimum number of digits of an integer or the number of digits following the decimal point of a float Some systems may not support all of these modifiers but may also support others in case of doubt check the appropriate documentation and then experiment Examples set format Zt set ytics 5 10 5 0 and 1 0 Zs set ytics 500 1000 500 and 1 0 12 3 set ytics 12345 12345 000 set format y 2t 10 03T set ytic 12345 1 23 107 04 y set format y y y set format y s 10 1 S set ytic 12345 12 345 10 3 y y y set format set format y Zs cg set ytic 12345 12 345 kg 0P pi set ytic 6 283185 2 pi 50 set format set format y 0f set ytic 50 set log y 2 set format y 1 set ytics 1 2 3 displays 1 0 1 0 and 1 5 since 3 is 1 5 271 There are some problem cases that arise when numbers like 9 999 are printed with a format that requires both rounding and a power If the data type for the axis is time date the format string must contain valid codes for the strftime functi
261. imation using external utilities and this post processing can yield a smaller file than gnuplot s internal optimization mode The default is nooptimize The output plot size lt x y gt is given in pixels it defaults to 640x480 Please see additional information under canvas p and set size p 145 Blank space at the edges of the finished plot may be trimmed using the crop option resulting in a smaller final image size Default is nocrop The background color must be given in the form xrrggbb where x is the literal character x and rrggbb are the red green and blue components in hexadecimal For example x00ff00 is green The specification of additional colors other than the background is deprecated Examples set terminal gif medium size 640 480 xffffff Use the medium size built in non scaleable non rotatable font Use white xffffff for the non transparent background set terminal gif font arial 14 enhanced Searches for a scalable font with face name arial and sets the font size to 14pt Please see fonts p 32 for details of how the font search is done Because this is a scalable font we can use enhanced text mode set term gif animate transparent opt delay 10 size 200 200 x000000 load animate2 dem Open the gif terminal for creation of an animated gif file The individual frames of the animation sequence are created by the script file animate2 dem from the standard collection of demos
262. inate is to be interpreted as a geographic coordinate measured in degrees Use set format x to establish how the coordinate appears as an axis tick label The format specifiers for geographic data are as follows 7D integer degrees lt width precision d floating point degrees 7M integer minutes lt width precision m floating point minutes 8 integer seconds lt width precision s floating point seconds hE label with E W instead of AN label with N S instead of For example the command set format x Ddeg 5 2mmin E will cause x coordinate 1 51 to be labeled as 1deg 30 60min W If no special format is provided the coordinate will be reported as a decimal number of degrees Xdtics The set xdtics commands converts the x axis tic marks to days of the week where 0 Sun and 6 Sat Overflows are converted modulo 7 to dates set noxdtics returns the labels to their default values Similar commands do the same things for the other axes Syntax set xdtics unset xdtics show xdtics The same syntax applies to ydtics zdtics x2dtics y2dtics and cbdtics See also the set format p 113 command Xlabel The set xlabel command sets the x axis label Similar commands set labels on the other axes Syntax set xlabel lt label gt offset lt offset gt font lt font gt lt size gt textcolor lt colorspec gt no enhanced rotate by lt degrees gt rotate parallel norotate show xl
263. indows can be in use at the same time If widelines is specified all plots will be drawn with wide lines If enhanced is specified sub and superscripts and multiple fonts are enabled see enhanced text p for details Font names for the core PostScript fonts may be abbreviated to a single letter T H C S for Times Helvetica Courier Symbol If title is specified it will be used as the title of the plot window It will also be used as the name of the server instance and will override the optional numerical argument Linewidths may be changed with set linestyle Png Syntax set terminal png no enhanced no transparent no interlace no truecolor rounded butt linewidth lt lw gt dashlength lt dl gt tiny small medium large giant font lt face gt lt pointsize gt fontscale lt scale gt size lt x gt lt y gt no crop background lt rgb_color gt PNG JPEG and GIF images are created using the external library libgd PNG plots may be viewed interactively by piping the output to the display program from the ImageMagick package as follows set term png set output display png You can view the output from successive plot commands interactively by typing lt space gt in the display window To save the current plot to a file left click in the display window and choose save transparent instructs the driver to make the background color transparent Default is notranspar
264. ine_type gt unset border show border With a splot displayed in an arbitrary orientation like set view 56 103 the four corners of the x y plane can be referred to as front back left and right A similar set of four corners exist for the top surface of course Thus the border connecting say the back and right corners of the x y plane is the bottom right back border and the border connecting the top and bottom front corners is the front vertical This nomenclature is defined solely to allow the reader to figure out the table that follows The borders are encoded in a 12 bit integer the bottom four bits control the border for plot and the sides of the base for splot the next four bits control the verticals in splot the top four bits control the edges on top of the splot In detail lt integer gt should be the sum of the appropriate entries from the following table Graph Border Encoding Bit plot splot 1 bottom bottom left front 2 left bottom left back 4 top bottom right front 8 right bottom right back 16 no effect left vertical 32 no effect back vertical 64 no effect right vertical 128 no effect front vertical 256 no effect top left back 512 no effect top right back 1024 no effect top left front 2048 no effect top right front Various bits or combinations of bits may be added together in the command The default is 31 which is all four sides for plot and base
265. ing p 111 Logscale Syntax set logscale lt axes gt lt base gt unset logscale lt axes gt show logscale where lt axes gt may be any combinations of x x2 y y2 z cb and r in any order lt base gt is the base of the log scaling default is base 10 If no axes are specified the command affects all axes except r The command unset logscale turns off log scaling for all axes Examples To enable log scaling in both x and z axes set logscale xz To enable scaling log base 2 of the y axis set logscale y 2 To enable z and color log axes for a pm3d plot set logscale zcb To disable z axis log scaling unset logscale z Macros If command line macro substitution is enabled then tokens in the command line of the form lt stringvariablename gt will be replaced by the text string contained in lt stringvariablename gt See sub stitution p 39 Syntax set macros Mapping If data are provided to splot in spherical or cylindrical coordinates the set mapping command should be used to instruct gnuplot how to interpret them Syntax set mapping cartesian spherical cylindrical A cartesian coordinate system is used by default For a spherical coordinate system the data occupy two or three columns or using entries The first two are interpreted as the azimuthal and polar angles theta and phi or longitude and latitude in the units specified by set angles The radius r i
266. ing then pause mouse will terminate on either a mouse click or on ctrl C For all other terminals or if mousing is not active pause mouse is equivalent to pause 1 If one or more end conditions are given after pause mouse then any one of the conditions will terminate the pause The possible end conditions are keypress button1 button2 button3 close and any If the pause terminates on a keypress then the ascii value of the key pressed is returned in MOUSE_KEY The character itself is returned as a one character string in MOUSE_CHAR Hotkeys bind command are disabled if keypress is one of the end conditions Zooming is disabled if button3 is one of the end conditions In all cases the coordinates of the mouse are returned in variables MOUSE_X MOUSE_Y MOUSE_X2 MOUSE_Y2 See mouse variables p 38 Note Since pause communicates with the operating system rather than the graphics it may behave differ ently with different device drivers depending upon how text and graphics are mixed Examples n pause 1 Wait until a carriage return is hit pause 3 Wait three seconds pause 1 Hit return to continue pause 10 Isn t this pretty It s a cubic spline pause mouse Click any mouse button on selected data point pause mouse keypress Type a letter from A F in the active window pause mouse button1 keypress pause mouse any Any key or button will terminate The variant pause mouse key will resume after any keyp
267. ings for axis border and no mirror specified for the major tics Please see set xtics p 162 for information about these My2tics Minor tic marks along the y2 right hand axis are controlled by set my2tics Please see set mxtics p 130 Mytics Minor tic marks along the y axis are controlled by set mytics Please see set mxtics p 130 M lt ztics Minor tic marks along the z axis are controlled by set mztics Please see set mxtics p 130 Object The set object command defines a single object which will appear in all subsequent 2D plots You may define as many objects as you like Currently the supported object types are rectangle circle ellipse and polygon Rectangles inherit a default set of style properties fill color border from those set by the command set style rectangle but each object can also be given individual style properties Circles ellipses and polygons inherit the fill style from set style fill Syntax set object lt index gt lt object type gt lt object properties gt front back behind fclfillcolor lt colorspec gt fs lt fillstyle gt default lw linewidth lt width gt lt object type gt is either rectangle ellipse circle or polygon Each object type has its own set of characteristic properties Setting front will draw the object in front of all plot elements but behind any labels that are also marked front Setting back will place the object behind all plot curves
268. inition Each fit iteration will display information which can be used to evaluate the progress of the fit An indicates that it did not find a smaller WSSR and is trying again The sum of squares of residuals also called chisquare is the WSSR between the data and your fitted function fit has minimized that At this stage with weighted data chisquare is expected to approach the number of degrees of freedom data points minus parameters The WSSR can be used to calculate the reduced chisquare WSSR ndf or stdfit the standard deviation of the fit sqrt WSSR ndf Both of these are reported for the final WSSR If the data are unweighted stdfit is the rms value of the deviation of the data from the fitted function in user units If you supplied valid data errors the number of data points is large enough and the model is correct the reduced chisquare should be about unity For details look up the chi squared distribution in your favourite statistics reference If so there are additional tests beyond the scope of this overview for determining how well the model fits the data A reduced chisquare much larger than 1 0 may be due to incorrect data error estimates data errors not normally distributed systematic measurement errors outliers or an incorrect model function A plot of the residuals e g plot datafile using 1 2 f 1 may help to show any systematic trends Plotting both the data points and
269. int test validity of column x during datafile manip value name string returns the value of the named variable Elliptic integrals The EllipticK k function returns the complete elliptic integral of the first kind i e the definite integral between 0 and pi 2 of the function 1 k sin p 2 0 5 The domain of k is 1 to 1 exclusive The EllipticE k function returns the complete elliptic integral of the second kind i e the definite integral between 0 and pi 2 of the function 1 k sin p 2 0 5 The domain of k is 1 to 1 inclusive The EllipticPi n k function returns the complete elliptic integral of the third kind i e the definite integral between 0 and pi 2 of the function 1 k sin p 2 0 5 1 n sin p 2 The parameter n must be less than 1 while k must lie between 1 and 1 exclusive Note that by definition EllipticPi 0 k EllipticK k for all possible values of k Random number generator The function rand produces a sequence of pseudo random numbers between 0 and 1 using an algorithm from P L Ecuyer and S Cote Implementing a random number package with splitting facilities ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software 17 98 111 1991 rand 0 returns a pseudo random number in the interval 0 1 generated from the current value of two internal 32 bit seeds rand 1 resets both seeds to a standard value rand x for integer 0 lt x lt 2 31 1 sets both internal
270. ipt is mandatory If a target name for the script is given the terminal will look for gnuplot lt target name gt lua in the local directory and on failure in the environmental variable GNUPLOT_LUA_DIR All arguments will be provided to the selected script for further evaluation E g set term lua tikz help will cause the script itself to print additional help on options and choices for the script Lua tikz The TikZ driver is one output mode of the generic Lua terminal Syntax set terminal lua tikz latex tex context color monochrome dashed solid nooriginreset originreset nogparrows gparrows nogppoints gppoints picenvironment nopicenvironment noclip clip notightboundingbox tightboundingbox background lt colorpec gt size lt x gt unit lt y gt unit scale lt x gt lt y gt plotsize lt x gt unit lt y gt unit charsize lt x gt unit lt y gt unit font lt fontdesc gt fontscale textscale lt scale gt nofulldoc nostandalone fulldoc standalone preamble header lt preamble_string gt tikzplot lt ltn gt notikzarrows tikzarrows rgbimages cmykimages noexternalimages externalimages bitmap nobitmap providevars lt var name gt createstyle help For all options that expect lengths as their arguments they will default to cm if no unit is specified For all lengths the following uni
271. is draw in addition to the mesh produced by the style specified in the plot command E g splot fred dat with lines lola dat with lines would draw both a mesh of lines and a pm3d surface for each data set If the option explicit is on or implicit is off only plots specified by the with pm3d attribute are plotted with a pm3d surface e g splot fred dat with lines lola dat with pm3d would plot fred dat with lines only and lola dat with a pm3d surface On gnuplot start up the mode is explicit For historical and compatibility reasons the commands set pm3d i e no options and set pm3d at X i e at is the first option change the mode to implicit The command set pm3d sets other options to their default state If you set the default data or function style to pm3d e g set style data pm3d then the options implicit and explicit have no effect Note that when plotting several plots they are plotted in the order given on the command line This can be of interest especially for filled surfaces which can overwrite and therefore hide part of earlier plots The pm3d coloring can be drawn at any or all of three different positions top bottom or surface See pm3d position p 136 The following command draws three color surfaces at different altitudes set border 4095 set pm3d at s splot 10 x with pm3d at b x x y y x x y y with pm3d at t See also help for set palette p 138 set cbrang
272. is either two or five depending on the major tics so there are one or four minor tics between major tics Selecting default will return the number of minor ticks to its default value If the axis is logarithmic the number of sub intervals will be set to a reasonable number by default based upon the length of a decade This will be overridden if lt freq gt is given However the usual minor tics 2 3 8 9 between 1 and 10 for example are obtained by setting lt freq gt to 10 even though there are but nine sub intervals To set minor tics at arbitrary positions use the lt label gt lt pos gt lt level gt form of set x x2 y y2 z tics with lt label gt empty and lt level gt set to 1 The set m x x2 y y2 z tics commands work only when there are uniformly spaced major tics If all major tics were placed explicitly by set x x2 y y2 z tics then minor tic commands are ignored Implicit major tics and explicit minor tics can be combined using set x x2 y y2 z tics and set x x2 y y2 z tics add Examples set xtics 0 5 10 set xtics add 7 5 set mxtics 5 Major tics at 0 5 7 5 10 minor tics at 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 set logscale y set ytics format set ytics le 6 10 1 set ytics add 1 1 1 0 1 01 0 01 107 3 0 001 107 4 0 0001 set mytics 10 Major tics with special formatting minor tics at log positions By default minor tics are off for linear axes and on for logarithmic axes They inherit the sett
273. is the second line will produce This is the first line of text nThis is the second line Enhanced text processing is performed for both double quoted text and single quoted text but only by terminals supporting this mode See enhanced text p 24 Back quotes are used to enclose system commands for substitution into the command line See substitution p B9 Time Date data gnuplot supports the use of time and or date information as input data This feature is activated by the commands set xdata time set ydata time etc Internally all times and dates are converted to the number of seconds from the year 2000 The command set timefmt defines the format for all inputs data files ranges tics label positions in short anything that accepts a data value must receive it in this format Since only one input format can be in force at a given time all time date quantities being input at the same time must be presented in the same format Thus if both x and y data in a file are time date they must be in the same format The conversion to and from seconds assumes Universal Time which is the same as Greenwich Standard Time There is no provision for changing the time zone or for daylight savings If all your data refer to the same time zone and are all either daylight or standard you don t need to worry about these things But if the absolute time is crucial for your application you ll need to convert to UT yourself Comm
274. ist gp history hist gp append append the complete history to file hist gp history 10 hist gp write last 10 commands to file hist gp history 10 head 5 gt gt diary gp write 5 history commands using pipe history load show all history entries starting with load history set c like above several words enclosed in quotes hi reread execute last entry starting with reread hist set xr like above several words enclosed in quotes hi hi guess yourself On systems which support a popen function Unix the output of history can be piped through an external program by starting the file name with a as one of the above examples demonstrates If New syntax if lt condition gt lt commands gt lt commands gt lt commands gt else lt commands gt Old syntax if lt condition gt lt command line gt else if lt condition gt else This version of gnuplot supports block structured if else statements If the keyword if or else is immediately followed by an opening then conditional execution applies to all statements possibly on multiple input lines until a matching terminates the block If commands may be nested The old single line if else syntax is still supported but can not be mixed with the new block structured syntax See if old p 71 n If old Through gnuplot version 4 4 the scope of the if else commands was limited to a single inpu
275. it to standard output TrueType fonts are converted into Type 1 pfa format e g by using the tool ttf2pt1 which is available from http ttf2pt1 sourceforge net If the builtin conversion does not work the conversion command can be changed by the environment variable GNUPLOT_TTFTOPFA For usage with ttf2pt1 it may be set to ttf2ptl a e W 0 s Here again s stands for the file name For special purposes you also can use a pipe if available for your operating system Therefore you start the file name definition with the character lt and append a program call This program has to write pfa data to standard output Thus a pfa file may be accessed by set fontfile lt cat garamond pfa For example including Type 1 font files can be used for including the postscript output in LaTeX documents The european computer modern font which is a variant of the computer modern font is available in pfb format from any CTAN server e g ftp ftp dante de tex archive fonts ps typel cm super For example the file sfrm1000 pfb contains the normal upright fonts with serifs in the design size 10pt font name SFRM1000 The computer modern fonts which are still necessary for mathematics are available from ftp ftp dante de tex archive fonts cm ps typel bluesky With these you can use any character available in TeX However the computer modern fonts have a strange encoding This is why you should not use cmr10 pfb for text
276. justify restores the default behavior set tics with no options restores to place tics inwards Every other options are retained See also set xtics p 162 for more control of major labeled tic marks and set mxtics for control of minor tic marks These commands provide control at a axis by axis basis Ticslevel Deprecated See set xyplane p 165 Ticscale The set ticscale command is deprecated use set tics scale instead Timestamp The command set timestamp places the time and date of the plot in the left margin Syntax set timestamp lt format gt top bottom no rotate offset lt xoff gt lt yoff gt font lt fontspec gt unset timestamp show timestamp The format string allows you to choose the format used to write the date and time Its default value is what asctime uses a b d H M S Y weekday month name day of the month hours minutes seconds four digit year With top or bottom you can place the timestamp at the top or bottom of the left margin default bottom rotate lets you write the timestamp vertically if your terminal supports vertical text The constants lt xoff gt and lt yoff gt are offsets that let you adjust the position more finely lt font gt is used to specify the font with which the time is to be written The abbreviation time may be used in place of timestamp Example set timestamp d m y H 4M offset 80 2 font Helvetica See set timefmt p
277. k Please see set xdtics p 159 for details Zzeroaxis The set zzeroaxis command draws a line through x 0 y 0 This has no effect on 2D plots including splot with set view map For details please see set zeroaxis p 167 and set xyplane p 165 Cbdata Set color box axis data to timeseries dates times Please see set xdata p 158 Cbdtics The set cbdtics command changes tics on the color box axis to days of the week Please see set xdtics p for details Zero The zero value is the default threshold for values approaching 0 0 Syntax set zero lt expression gt show zero gnuplot will not plot a point if its imaginary part is greater in magnitude than the zero threshold This threshold is also used in various other parts of gnuplot as a crude numerical error threshold The default zero value is le 8 zero values larger than 1e 3 the reciprocal of the number of pixels in a typical bitmap display should probably be avoided but it is not unreasonable to set zero to 0 0 Zeroaxis The x axis may be drawn by set xzeroaxis and removed by unset xzeroaxis Similar commands behave similarly for the y x2 y2 and z axes Syntax set x x2lyly2 z zeroaxis linestyle ls lt line_style gt linetype 1t lt line_type gt linewidth lw lt line_width gt unset x x2lyly2 z zeroaxis show xly z zeroaxis By default these options are off The selected zero axis is drawn with a line of type lt line_ty
278. k structured if else while do constructs See if al p 70 while p 175 and do p 62 Simple it eration is possible inside plot or set commands See al Med iteration p 71 General iteration spanning multiple commands is possible using a block construct as shown below For a related new feature see the summation Mm p expression type Here is an example using sev eral of these new syntax features LJ L L A A E E k pan MA d term Fourier series 10 term Fourier series MM ie set multiplot layout 2 2 fourier k x sin 3 2 k k 2 3 cos k x do for power 0 3 TERMS 10 power set title sprintf g term Fourier series TERMS plot 0 5 sum k 1 TERMS fourier k x notitle 100 berm Fourier series 1000 kerm Fourier series unset multiplot It is now possible to select a column of data from a data file by matching a label in the first row of the file See columnhead p 27 For example plot for crop in Oats Peas Beans data using Year crop 1 Local customization of linetypes You can now customize properties color linewidth point type of the default sequence of linetypes used in plotting See set linetype p 124 This is normally done in an initialization file either the system wide file gnuplotrc or a private file gnuplot See initialization p 39 Most terminals now allow you to set an explicit background color for the plot The special li
279. ks fhacktext nohacktext unit nounit The first option invokes an ugly hack that gives nicer numbers the second has to do with plot scaling The defaults are hacktext and nounit Qms The qms terminal driver supports the QMS QUIC Laser printer the Talaris 1200 and others It has no options Qt The qt terminal device generates output in a separate window with the Qt library Syntax set term qt lt n gt size lt width gt lt height gt no enhanced font lt font gt title title no persist no raise no ctrl close widget lt id gt Multiple plot windows are supported set terminal qt lt n gt directs the output to plot window number n The default window title is based on the window number This title can also be specified with the keyword title Plot windows remain open even when the gnuplot driver is changed to a different device A plot window can be closed by pressing the letter q while that window has input focus by choosing close from a window manager menu or with set term qt lt n gt close The size of the plot area is given in pixels it defaults to 640x480 In addition to that the actual size of the window also includes the space reserved for the toolbar and the status bar When you resize a window the plot is immediately scaled to fit in the new size of the window The qt terminal scales the whole plot including fonts and linewidths and keeps its global aspect ratio cons
280. l circle will be drawn It is possible to e plot arc segments instead of full circles by specifying a E5 20 15 10 05 00 05 10 15 start and end angle in the 4th and 5th columns An optional 4th or 6th column can specify per circle color The start and end angles of the circle segments must be specified in degrees See set style circle p 151 and set style fill p 148 Examples draws circles whose area is proportional to the value in column 3 set style fill transparent solid 0 2 noborder plot data using 1 2 sqrt 3 with circles data using 1 2 with linespoints draws Pac men instead of circles plot data using 1 2 10 40 320 with circles draw a pie chart with inline data set xrange 15 15 set style fill transparent solid 0 9 noborder plot using 1 2 3 4 5 6 with circles lc var 0 0 5 0 30 1 0 0 5 30 70 2 0 0 5 70 120 3 0 0 5 120 230 4 0 0 5 230 360 5 e The result is similar to using a points plot with variable size points and pointstyle 7 except that the circles will scale with the x axis range See also set object circle p 132 and fillstyle p 148 Ellipses i The ellipses style plots an ellipse at each data point This style is only relevant for 2D plotting Each ellipse with ellipses lt gt is described in terms of its center major and minor di ameters and the angle between its major diameter and the x axis 2 columns x y 3 columns x y
281. l to find prologue ps and character encoding files You can use this mechanism to switch between different sets of locally customized prolog files The search order is 1 The directory specified by set psdir if any 2 The directory specified by environmental variable GNUPLOT_PS_DIR 3 A built in header or one from the default system directory 4 Directories set by set loadpath Raxis The commands set raxis and unset raxis toggle whether the polar axis is drawn separately from grid lines and the x axis If the minimum of the current rrange is non zero and not autoscaled then a white circle is drawn at the center of the polar plot to indicate that the plot lines and axes do not reach 0 The axis line is drawn using the same line type as the plot border See polar p 143 rrange p 145 rtics p 145 set grid p 116 Rmargin The command set rmargin sets the size of the right margin Please see set margin p 126 for details Rrange The set rrange command sets the range of the radial coordinate for a graph in polar mode This has the effect of setting both xrange and yrange as well The resulting xrange and yrange are both rmax rmin rmax rmin However if you later change the x or y range for example by zooming this does not change rrange so data points continue to be clipped against rrange Autoscaling of rmin always results in rmin 0 Rtics The set rtics command places tics along the pola
282. label p for details Examples This places the key at the default location set key default This disables the key unset key This places a key at coordinates 2 3 5 2 in the default first coordinate system set key at 2 3 5 2 This places the key below the graph set key below This places the key in the bottom left corner left justifies the text gives it a title and draws a box around it in linetype 3 set key left bottom Left title Legend box 3 Key placement To understand positioning the best concept is to think of a region i e inside outside or one of the margins Along with the region keywords left center right 1 c r and top center bottom t c b control where within the particular region the key should be placed When in inside mode the keywords left 1 right r top t bottom b and center c push the key out toward the plot boundary as illustrated t l t c t r c 1 c c r b 1 b c b r When in outside mode automatic placement is similar to the above illustration but with respect to the view rather than the graph boundary That is a border is moved inward to make room for the key outside of the plotting area although this may interfere with other labels and may cause an error on some devices The particular plot border that is moved depends upon the position described above and the stacking direction For options centered in one of the dimensions there is no ambiguity about which bo
283. lar mode or x otherwise Similarly the independent variables for the splot command are u and v in parametric mode splot cannot be used in polar mode or x and y otherwise It may be more convenient to call a dummy variable by a more physically meaningful or conventional name For example when plotting time functions set dummy t plot sin t cos t At least one dummy variable must be set on the command set dummy by itself will generate an error message Examples set dummy u v set dummy s The second example sets the second variable to s Encoding The set encoding command selects a character encoding Syntax set encoding lt value gt set encoding locale show encoding Valid values are default tells a terminal to use its default encoding iso_8859_1 the most common Western European encoding used by many Unix workstations and by MS Windows This encoding is known in the PostScript world as ISO Latin1 iso_8859_15 a variant of iso_8859_1 that includes the Euro symbol iso_8859_2 used in Central and Eastern Europe iso_8859_9 used in Turkey also known as Latin5 koi8r popular Unix cyrillic encoding koi8u ukrainian Unix cyrillic encoding cp437 codepage for MS DOS cp850 codepage for 0S 2 Western Europe cp852 codepage for 0S 2 Central and Eastern Europe cp950 MS version of Big5 emf terminal only cp1250 codepage for MS Windows Central and Eastern Europe cp1251 codepage for
284. lease see set margin p 126 for details Loadpath The loadpath setting defines additional locations for data and command files searched by the call load plot and splot commands If a file cannot be found in the current directory the directories in loadpath are tried Syntax set loadpath pathlisti pathlist2 show loadpath Path names may be entered as single directory names or as a list of path names separated by a platform specific path separator eg colon on Unix semicolon on DOS Windows OS 2 platforms The show loadpath save and save set commands replace the platform specific separator with a space character If the environment variable GNUPLOT_LIB is set its contents are appended to loadpath However show loadpath prints the contents of set loadpath and GNUPLOT_LIB separately Also the save and save set commands ignore the contents of GNUPLOT_LIB Locale The locale setting determines the language with which x y z d m tics will write the days and months Syntax set locale lt locale gt lt locale gt may be any language designation acceptable to your installation See your system documentation for the available options The command set locale will try to determine the locale from the LC_TIME LC_ALL or LANG environment variables To change the decimal point locale see set decimalsign p 109 To change the character encoding to the current locale see set encod
285. les Syntax set boxwidth lt width gt absolute relative show boxwidth By default adjacent boxes are extended in width until they touch each other A different default width may be specified using the set boxwidth command Relative widths are interpreted as being a fraction of this default width An explicit value for the boxwidth is interpreted as being a number of units along the current x axis absolute unless the modifier relative is given If the x axis is a log scale see set log p 125 then the value of boxwidth is truly absolute only at x 1 this physical width is maintained everywhere along the axis i e the boxes do not become narrower the value of x increases If the range spanned by a log scale x axis is far from x 1 some experimentation may be required to find a useful value of boxwidth The default is superseded by explicit width information taken from an extra data column in styles boxes or boxerrorbars In a four column data set the fourth column will be interpreted as the box width unless the width is set to 2 0 in which case the width will be calculated automatically See style boxes p and style boxerrorbars p for more details To set the box width to automatic use the command set boxwidth or for four column data set boxwidth 2 The same effect can be achieved with the using keyword in plot plot file using 1 2 3 4 2 To set the box width to half of the automatic size use set b
286. les one for the eps or pdf part of the figure and one for the LaTeX part The name of the LaTeX file is taken from the set output command The name of the eps pdf file is derived by replacing the file extension normally tex with eps or pdf instead There is no LaTeX output if no output file is given Remember to close the output file before next plot unless in multiplot mode In your LaTeX documents use input filename to include the figure The eps or pdf file is included by the command includegraphics so you must also include usepackage graphicx in the LaTeX preamble If you want to use coloured text option colourtext you also have to include usepackage color in the LaTeX preamble The behaviour concerning font selection depends on the header mode In all cases the given font size is used for the calculation of proper spacing When not using the standalone mode the actual LaTeX font and font size at the point of inclusion is taken so use LaTeX commands for changing fonts If you use e g 12pt as font size for your LaTeX document use 12 as options The font name is ignored If using standalone the given font and font size are used see below for a detailed description If text is printed coloured is controlled by the TeX booleans ifGPcolor and ifGPblacktext Only if ifGPcolor is true and ifGPblacktext is false text is printed coloured You may either change them in the generated TeX
287. letter q while that window has input focus or by choosing close from a window manager menu All plot windows can be closed by specifying reset which actually terminates the subprocess which maintains the windows unless persist was specified Plot windows will automatically be closed at the end of the session unless the persist option was given The size or aspect ratio of a plot may be changed by resizing the gnuplot window Linewidths and pointsizes may be changed from within gnuplot with set linestyle For terminal type be gnuplot accepts when initialized the standard X Toolkit options and resources such as geometry font and name from the command line arguments or a configuration file See the X 1 man page or its equivalent for a description of such options A number of other gnuplot options are available for the be terminal These may be specified either as command line options when gnuplot is invoked or as resources in the configuration file Xdefaults They are set upon initialization and cannot be altered during a gnuplot session Command line_options In addition to the X Toolkit options the following options may be specified on the command line when starting gnuplot or as resources in your Xdefaults file mono forces monochrome rendering on color displays gray requests grayscale rendering on grayscale or color displays Grayscale displays receive monochrome rendering by default clear requests
288. lid fill if close lt open This is the behavior you will get if the current fillstyle is set to empty See fillstyle p 148 If you set the fillstyle to solid or pattern then this will be used for all boxes independent of open and close values See also set bars p and financebars p 49 See also the candlestick and demos a Note To place additional symbols such as the median value on a box and whisker plot requires additional plot commands as in this example Data columns X Min istQuartile Median 3rdQuartile Max set bars 4 0 set style fill empty plot stat dat using 1 3 2 6 5 with candlesticks title Quartiles dd using 1 4 4 4 4 with candlesticks 1t 1 notitle Plot with crossbars on the whiskers crossbars are 50 of full width plot stat dat using 1 3 2 6 5 with candlesticks whiskerbars 0 5 See set boxwidth p 102 set bars p 100 set style fill p 148 and boxplot p 45 Circles The circles style plots a circle with an explicit radius 25 at each data point If three columns of data are present aap they are interpreted as x y radius The radius is always interpreted in the units of the plot s horizontal axis x cal or x2 The scale on y and the aspect ratio of the plot 10 are both ignored If only two columns are present the 05 radius is taken from set style circle In this case the oa radius may be given in graph or screen coordinates pe By default a ful
289. linewidth gt unset grid show grid The grid can be enabled and disabled for the major and or minor tic marks on any axis and the linetype and linewidth can be specified for major and minor grid lines also via a predefined linestyle as far as the active terminal driver supports this Additionally a polar grid can be selected for 2D plots circles are drawn to intersect the selected tics and radial lines are drawn at definable intervals The interval is given in degrees or radians depending on the set angles setting Note that a polar grid is no longer automatically generated in polar mode The pertinent tics must be enabled before set grid can draw them gnuplot will quietly ignore instructions to draw grid lines at non existent tics but they will appear if the tics are subsequently enabled If no linetype is specified for the minor gridlines the same linetype as the major gridlines is used The default polar angle is 30 degrees If front is given the grid is drawn on top of the graphed data If back is given the grid is drawn underneath the graphed data Using front will prevent the grid from being obscured by dense data The default setup layerdefault is equivalent to back for 2D plots In 3D plots the default is to split up the grid and the graph box into two layers one behind the other in front of the plotted data and functions Since hidden3d mode does its own sorting it ignores all grid drawing order options and passes
290. ll as 12 20 Each set of non blank characters in the timedata counts as one column in the using n n specification Thus 11 11 25 12 76 21 0 consists of three columns To avoid confusion gnuplot requires that you provide a complete using specification if your file contains timedata If the date format includes the day or month in words the format string must exclude this text But it can still be printed with the a A b or B specifier gnuplot will determine the proper month and weekday from the numerical values See set format p 113 for more details about these and other options for printing time data When reading two digit years with y values 69 99 refer to the 20th century while values 00 68 refer to the 21st century NB This is in accordance with the UNIX98 spec but conventions vary widely and two digit year values are inherently ambiguous See also set xdata p 158 and time date p for more information Example set timefmt 4d m ZY tZH 4M tells gnuplot to read date and time separated by tab But look closely at your data what began as a tab may have been converted to spaces somewhere along the line the format string must match what is actually in the file See also time data demo Title The set title command produces a plot title that is centered at the top of the plot set title is a special case of set label Syntax set title lt title text gt offset lt offset gt font lt font
291. lly as the gray value goes from 0 to 1 D A Green 2011 http arxiv org abs 1108 5083 start defines the starting point along the color wheel in radians cycles defines how many color wheel cycles span the palette range Larger values of saturation produce more saturated color saturation gt 1 may lead to clipping of the individual RGB components and to intensity becoming non monotonic The palette is also affected by set palette gamma The default values are set palette cubehelix start 0 5 cycles 1 5 saturation 1 set palette gamma 1 5 File set palette file is basically a set palette defined lt gradient gt where lt gradient gt is read from a datafile Either 4 columns gray R G B or just three columns R G B have to be selected via the using data file modifier In the three column case the line number will be used as gray The gray range is automatically rescaled to 0 1 The file is read as a normal data file so all datafile modifiers can be used Please note that R might actually be e g H if HSV color space is selected As usual lt filename gt may be which means that the data follow the command inline and are terminated by a single e on a line of its own Use show palette gradient to display the gradient Examples Read in a palette of RGB triples each in range 0 255 set palette file some palette using 1 255 2 255 3 255 Equidistant rainbow blue green yellow red palette set palette
292. lot cfg is loaded before the header information given by the header command Thus you can use header to overwrite some of settings performed using gnuplot cfg Epson_180dpi This driver supports a family of Epson printers and derivatives epson_180dpi and epson _60dpi are drivers for Epson LQ style 24 pin printers with resolutions of 180 and 60 dots per inch respectively epson_1x800 is a generic 9 pin driver appropriate for printers like the Epson LX 800 the Star NL 10 and NX 1000 the PROPRINTER and so forth nec_cp6 is generic 24 pin driver that can be used for printers like the NEC CP6 and the Epson LQ 800 The okidata driver supports the 9 pin OKIDATA 320 321 Standard printers The starc driver is for the Star Color Printer The tandy_60dpi driver is for the Tandy DMP 130 series of 9 pin 60 dpi printers The dpu414 driver is for the Seiko DPU 414 thermal printer nec_cp6 has the options Syntax set terminal nec_cp6 monochrome colour draft which defaults to monochrome dpu414 has the options Syntax set terminal dpu414 small medium large normal draft which defaults to medium font size and normal Preferred combinations are medium normal and small draft Excl The excl terminal driver supports Talaris printers such as the EXCL Laser printer and the 1590 It has no options Fig The fig terminal device generates output in the Fig graphics language Syntax set terminal fig monochrome
293. lot line2Dashes 42 gnuplot line3Dashes 13 gnuplot line4Dashes 44 gnuplot line5Dashes 15 gnuplot line6Dashes 4441 gnuplot line7Dashes 42 gnuplot line8Dashes 13 X11 pm3d_resources Choosing the appropriate visual class and number of colors is a crucial point in X11 applications and a bit awkward since X11 supports six visual types in different depths By default gnuplot uses the default visual of the screen The number of colors which can be allocated depends on the visual class chosen On a visual class with a depth gt 12bit gnuplot starts with a maximal number of 0x200 colors On a visual class with a depth gt 8bit but lt 12 bit the maximal number of colors is 0x100 on lt 8bit displays the maximum number of colors is 240 16 are left for line colors Gnuplot first starts to allocate the maximal number of colors as stated above If this fails the number of colors is reduced by the factor 2 until gnuplot gets all colors which are requested If dividing maxcolors by 2 repeatedly results in a number which is smaller than mincolors gnuplot tries to install a private colormap In this case the window manager is responsible for swapping colormaps when the pointer is moved in and out the x11 driver s window The default for mincolors is maxcolors num_colormaps gt 1 2 8 where num_colormaps is the number of colormaps which are currently used by gnuplot usually 1 if only one x11 window is open
294. lot with p for details of lt linetype gt and lt pointtype gt The big option is a substitute for the bfig terminal in earlier versions which is no longer supported Examples set terminal fig monochrome small pointsmax 1000 defaults plot file dat with points linetype 102 pointtype 759 would produce circles with a blue outline of width 1 and yellow fill color plot file dat using 1 2 3 with err linetype 1 pointtype 554 would produce errorbars with black lines and circles filled red These circles are one layer above the lines at depth 9 by default To plot the error bars on top of the circles use plot file dat using 1 2 3 with err linetype 1 pointtype 2554 Ggi The ggi driver can run on different targets as X or svgalib Syntax set terminal ggi acceleration lt integer gt model mode In X the window cannot be resized using window manager handles but the mode can be given with the mode option e g V1024x768 V800x600 V640x480 V320x200 Please refer to the ggi documentation for other modes The mode keyword is optional It is recommended to select the target by environment variables as explained in the libggi manual page To get DGA on X you should for example bash gt export GGI_DISPLAY DGA csh gt setenv GGI_DISPLAY DGA acceleration is only used for targets which report relative pointer motion events e g DGA and is a strictly positive integer multiplication factor for th
295. lotting It is similar to the xyerrorbars style ex cept that it draws rectangular areas rather than simple crosses It uses either 4 or 6 basic columns of input data Additional input columns may be used to provide infor mation such as variable line or fill color see rgbcolor variable p 35 al 4 columns x y xdelta ydelta 6 columns x y xlow xhigh ylow yhigh with box myeros The box width and height are determined from the x and y errors in the same way as they are for the xyerrorbars style either from xlow to xhigh and from ylow to yhigh or from x xdelta to x xdelta and from y ydelta to y ydelta depending on how many data columns are provided An additional 5th or 7th input column may be used to provide variable per datapoint color information see linecolor p and rgbcolor variable p 35 The interior of the boxes is drawn according to the current fillstyle See set style fill p 148 and boxes p for details Alternatively a new fillstyle may be specified in the plot command Candlesticks The candlesticks style can be used for 2D data plotting of financial data or for generating box and whisker plots of statistical data The symbol is a rectangular box centered horizontally at the x coordinate and limited vertically by the opening and closing prices A vertical i i l with candlestick
296. lso accepts a precision specifier so that fractional seconds can be written There is a 24 character limit to the length of the printed text longer strings will be truncated Examples Suppose the text is 76 12 25 23 11 11 Then set format x defaults to 12 25 76 An 23 11 set format x ZA d b Y Saturday 25 Dec 1976 set format x r D 11 11 11 pm 12 25 76 Suppose the text is 98 07 06 05 04 03 123456 Then set format x 1y 2m 43d 01H 02M 06 3S 98 7 6 5 04 03 123 Function style This form of the command is deprecated Please see set style function p 149 Functions The show functions command lists all user defined functions and their definitions Syntax show functions For information about the definition and usage of functions in gnuplot please see expressions p 25 See also 116 gnuplot 4 7 splines as user defined functions spline dem and use of functions and complex variables for airfoils airfoil dem Grid The set grid command allows grid lines to be drawn on the plot Syntax set grid no m xtics no m ytics no m ztics no m x2tics no m y2tics no m cbtics polar lt angle gt layerdefault front back linestyle lt major_linestyle gt linetype 1t lt major_linetype gt linewidth lw lt major_linewidth gt linestyle ls lt minor_linestyle gt linetype 1t lt minor_linetype gt linewidth lw lt minor_
297. lw gt lw lt lw gt Tics Control of the major labeled tics on all axes at once is possible with the set tics command Fine control of the major labeled tics on all axes at once is possible with the set tics command The tics may be turned off with the unset tics command and may be turned on the default state with set tics Similar commands by preceding tics by the axis name control the major tics on a single axis Syntax set tics axis border no mirror in out scale default lt major gt lt minor gt no rotate by lt ang gt offset lt offset gt nooffset left right center autojustify format formatstring font name lt size gt textcolor lt colorspec gt set tics front back unset tics show tics The options can be applied to a single axis x y z x2 y2 cb e g set xtics rotate by 90 unset cbtics Set tics front or back applies to all axes at once but only for 2D plots not splot It controls whether the tics are placed behind or in front of the plot elements in the case that there is overlap axis or border tells gnuplot to put the tics both the tics themselves and the accompanying labels along the axis or the border respectively If the axis is very close to the border the axis option will move the tic labels to outside the border in case the border is printed see set border p 100 The relevant margin settings will usually be sized
298. ly option is the choice of font Syntax set terminal hppj FNT5x9 FNT9X17 FNT13X25 with the middle sized font FNT9X17 being the default Imagen The imagen terminal driver supports Imagen laser printers It is capable of placing multiple graphs on a single page Syntax set terminal imagen lt fontsize gt portrait landscape lt horiz gt lt vert gt where fontsize defaults to 12 points and the layout defaults to landscape lt horiz gt and lt vert gt are the number of graphs in the horizontal and vertical directions these default to unity Example set terminal imagen portrait 2 3 puts six graphs on the page in three rows of two in portrait orientation Jpeg Syntax set terminal jpeg no enhanced no interlace linewidth lt lw gt dashlength lt dl gt rounded butt tiny small medium large giant font lt face gt lt pointsize gt fontscale lt scale gt size lt x gt lt y gt no tcrop background lt rgb_color gt PNG JPEG and GIF images are created using the external library libgd In most cases PNG is to be preferred for single plots and GIF for animations Both are loss less image formats and produce better image quality than the lossy JPEG format This is in particular noticeable for solid color lines against a solid background i e exactly the sort of image typically created by gnuplot The interlace option creates a progressive JPEG image Defaul
299. ly weighted when comparing the observed sum of deviations and the expected sum of deviations At the conclusion fit reports stdfit the standard deviation of the fit which is the rms of the residuals and the variance of the residuals also called reduced chisquare when the data points are weighted The number of degrees of freedom the number of data points minus the number of fitted parameters is used in these estimates because the parameters used in calculating the residuals of the datapoints were obtained from the same data These values are exported to the variables FIT_NDF Number of degrees of freedom FIT_WSSR Weighted sum of squares residual FIT_STDFIT sqrt WSSR NDF To estimate confidence levels for the parameters one can use the minimum chisquare obtained from the fit and chisquare statistics to determine the value of chisquare corresponding to the desired confidence level but considerably more calculation is required to determine the combinations of parameters which produce such values Rather than determine confidence intervals fit reports parameter error estimates which are readily obtained from the variance covariance matrix after the final iteration By convention these estimates are called 0 standard errors or asymptotic standard errors since they are calculated in the same way as the standard errors standard deviation of each parameter of a linear least squares problem even though the statistical co
300. major_diam 4 columns x y major_diam minor_diam 5 columns x y major_diam minor_diam angle If only two input columns are present they are taken as the coordinates of the centers and the ellipses will be drawn with the default extent see set style ellipse p 152 The orientation of the ellipse which is defined as the angle between the major diameter and the plot s x axis is taken from the default ellipse style see set style ellipse p 152 If three input columns are provided the third column is used for both diameters The orientation angle defaults to zero If four columns are present they are interpreted as x y major diameter minor diameter Note that these are diameters not radii An optional 5th column may be used to specify the orientation angle in degrees The ellipses will also be drawn with their default extent if either of the supplied diameters in the 3 4 5 column form is negative In all of the above cases optional variable color data may be given in an additional last 3th 4th 5th or 6th column See colorspec p for further information By default the major diameter is interpreted in the units of the plot s horizontal axis x or x2 while the minor diameter in that of the vertical y or y2 This implies that if the x and y axis scales are not equal then the major minor diameter ratio will no longer be correct after rotation This behavior can be changed with the units keyword however There are
301. many pictures are stored The mf terminal has no options METAFONT Instructions Set your terminal to METAFONT set terminal mf Select an output file e g set output myfigures mf Create your pictures Each picture will generate a separate character Its default size will be 5 3 inches You can change the size by saying set size 0 5 0 5 or whatever fraction of the default size you want to have Quit gnuplot Generate a TFM and GF file by running METAFONT on the output of gnuplot Since the picture is quite large 5 3 in you will have to use a version of METAFONT that has a value of at least 150000 for memmax On Unix systems these are conventionally installed under the name bigmf For the following assume that the command virmf stands for a big version of METAFONT For example Invoke METAFONT virmf amp plain Select the output device At the METAFONT prompt type mode CanonCx or whatever printer you use Optionally select a magnification mag 1 or whatever you wish Input the gnuplot file input myfigures mf On a typical Unix machine there will usually be a script called mf that executes virmf amp plain so you probably can substitute mf for virmf amp plain This will generate two files mfput tfm and mfput gf where indicates the resolution of your device The above can be conveniently achieved by typing everything on the command line e g
302. margin gt set tmargin at screen lt margin gt show margin The default units of lt margin gt are character heights or widths as appropriate A positive value defines the absolute size of the margin A negative value or none causes gnuplot to revert to the computed value For 3D plots only the left margin can be set using character units The keywords at screen indicates that the margin is specified as a fraction of the full drawing area This can be used to precisely line up the corners of individual 2D and 3D graphs in a multiplot This placement ignores the current values of set origin and set size and is intended as an alternative method for positioning graphs within a multiplot Normally the margins of a plot are automatically calculated based on tics tic labels axis labels the plot title the timestamp and the size of the key if it is outside the borders If however tics are attached to the axes set xtics axis for example neither the tics themselves nor their labels will be included in either the margin calculation or the calculation of the positions of other text to be written in the margin This can lead to tic labels overwriting other text if the axis is very close to the border Mouse The command set mouse enables mouse actions for the current interactive terminal It is usually enabled by default in interactive mode but disabled by default if commands are being read from a file There are two mouse modes Th
303. may give different plots than if the points were in the intended format Scattered data can be converted to a different grid format with set dgrid3d The contour code tests for z intensity along a line between a point on a y isoline and the corresponding point in the next y isoline Thus a splot contour of a surface with samples on the x isolines that do not coincide with a y isoline intersection will ignore such samples Try set xrange pi 2 pi 2 set yrange pi 2 pi 2 set style function lp set contour set isosamples 10 10 set samples 10 10 splot cos x cos y set samples 4 10 replot set samples 10 4 replot Splot surfaces splot can display a surface as a collection of points or by connecting those points As with plot the points may be read from a data file or result from evaluation of a function at specified intervals see set isosamples p 118 The surface may be approximated by connecting the points with straight line segments see set surface p 152 in which case the surface can be made opaque with set hidden3d The orientation from which the 3d surface is viewed can be changed with set view Additionally for points in a grid format splot can interpolate points having a common amplitude see set contour p 105 and can then connect those new points to display contour lines either directly with straight line segments or smoothed lines see set cntrparam p 103 Functions are already evaluated in a grid form
304. mewhere between 200 and 100 set xrange 200 lt lt 100 Xtics Fine control of the major labeled tics on the x axis is possible with the set xtics command The tics may be turned off with the unset xtics command and may be turned on the default state with set xtics Similar commands control the major tics on the y z x2 and y2 axes Syntax set xtics faxis border no mirror tin out scale default lt major gt lt minor gt no rotate by lt ang gt offset lt offset gt nooffset left right center autojustify add autofreq lt incr gt lt start gt lt incr gt lt end gt lt label gt lt pos gt lt level gt lt label gt format formatstring font name lt size gt rangelimited textcolor lt colorspec gt unset xtics show xtics The same syntax applies to ytics ztics x2tics y2tics and cbtics axis or border tells gnuplot to put the tics both the tics themselves and the accompanying labels along the axis or the border respectively If the axis is very close to the border the axis option will move the tic labels to outside the border The relevant margin settings will usually be sized badly by the automatic layout algorithm in this case mirror tells gnuplot to put unlabeled tics at the same positions on the opposite border nomirror does what you think it does in and out change the tic marks to be drawn inwards or outwards
305. mit blocks in if then else statements They are also used to denote complex numbers 3 2 3 2i The EEPIC Imagen Uniplex LaTeX and TPIC drivers allow a newline to be specified by in a single quoted string or in a double quoted string 2 Quote Marks Gnuplot uses three forms of quote marks for delimiting text strings double quote ascii 34 single quote ascii 39 and backquote ascii 96 Filenames may be entered with either single or double quotes In this manual the command examples generally single quote filenames and double quote other string tokens for clarity String constants and text strings used for labels titles or other plot elements may be enclosed in either single quotes or double quotes Further processing of the quoted text depends on the choice of quote marks Backslash processing of special characters like n newline and 345 octal character code is performed for double quoted strings In single quoted strings backslashes are just ordinary characters To get a single quote ascii 39 in a single quoted string it has to be doubled Thus the strings d s b and d 9 b are completely equivalent Text justification is the same for each line of a multi line string Thus the center justified string This is the first line of text nThis is the second line will produce This is the first line of text This is the second line but This is the first line of text nThis
306. n ASCII table of X Y Z R values rather than creating an actual plot on the current terminal The character R takes on one of three values i if the point is in the active range o if it is out of range or u if it is undefined The data format is determined by the format of the axis labels see set format p 113 and the columns are separated by single spaces This can be useful if you want to generate contours and then save them for further use perhaps for plotting with plot see set contour p for example The same method can be used to save interpolated data see set samples p and set dgrid3d p 109 Syntax set table outfile plot lt whatever gt unset table Tabular output is written to the named file if any otherwise it is written to the current value of set output You must explicitly unset table in order to go back to normal plotting on the current terminal Terminal gnuplot supports many different graphics devices Use set terminal to tell gnuplot what kind of output to generate Use set output to redirect that output to a file or device Syntax set terminal lt terminal type gt push pop show terminal If lt terminal type gt is omitted gnuplot will list the available terminal types lt terminal type gt may be abbreviated If both set terminal and set output are used together it is safest to give set terminal first because some terminals set a flag which is needed in some operating syst
307. n a plainTeX document via epsf tex and then converted to PostScript with dvips or other dvi to ps converter the text in the plot will usually be handled correctly However the text may not appear if you send the Metapost output as is to a PostScript interpreter Metapost Instructions Set your terminal to Metapost e g set terminal mp mono cmtt12 12 Select an output file e g set output figure mp Create your pictures Each plot or multiplot group will generate a separate Metapost beginfig endfig group Its default size will be 5 by 3 inches You can change the size by saying set size 0 5 0 5 or whatever fraction of the default size you want to have Quit gnuplot Generate EPS files by running Metapost on the output of gnuplot mpost figure mp OR mp figure mp The name of the Metapost program depends on the system typically mpost for a Unix machine and mp on many others Metapost will generate one EPS file for each picture To include your pictures in your document you can use the graphics package in LaTeX or epsf tex in plainTeX usepackage graphics LaTeX input epsf tex plainTeX If you use a driver other than dvips for converting TeX DVI output to PS you may need to add the following line in your LaTeX document DeclareGraphicsRule eps Each picture you made is in a separate file The first picture is in e g figure 0 the second in figure 1 and so on To place the third pictu
308. n applies the bezier algorithm Unique The unique option makes the data monotonic in x points with the same x value are replaced by a single point having the average y value The resulting points are then connected by straight line segments Frequency The frequency option makes the data monotonic in x points with the same x value are replaced by a single point having the summed y values The resulting points are then connected by straight line segments See also Cumulative The cumulative option makes the data monotonic in x points with the same x value are replaced by a single point containing the cumulative sum of y values of all data points with lower x values i e to the left of the current data point This can be used to obtain a cumulative distribution function from data See also Cnormal The cnormal option makes the data monotonic in x and normalises the y values onto the range 0 1 Points with the same x value are replaced by a single point containing the cumulative sum of y values of all data points with lower x values i e to the left of the current data point divided by the total sum of all y values This can be used to obtain a normalised cumulative distribution function from data useful when comparing sets of samples with differing numbers of members See also Kdensity The kdensity option is a way to plot a kernel density estimate which is a smooth histogram for a random collection of points using Gaussian kernels A Gau
309. n either 2D or 3D plots The basic form requires 1 2 or 3 columns of input data Additional input columns may be used to provide infor mation such as variable line color see rgbcolor vari able p 35 2D form 1 column y 2 columns x y 3D form 1 column Z 3 columns x y Z See also linetype p 124 linewidth p 150 and linestyle p 150 Linespoints The linespoints style connects adjacent points with straight line segments and then goes back to draw a small symbol at each point The command set point size may be used to change the default size of the points 1 or 2 columns of basic input data are required in 2D plots 1 or 3 columns are required if 3D plots See style lines p 55 Additional input columns may be used to provide information such as variable point size or line color The pointinterval short form pi property of the line implicit x from row numb with Lines implicit x from row y from index with linespoints O polntinterual type can be used to control whether or not every point in the plot is given a symbol For example with lp pi 3 will draw line segments through every data point but will only place a symbol on every 3rd point A negative value for pointinterval will erase the portion of line segment that passes underneath the symbol The size of the era
310. nd and higher derivatives of the fitting function with respect to the parameters are zero for a linear least squares problem For linear least squares LLS the user defined function will be a sum of simple functions not involving any parameters each multiplied by one parameter NLLS handles more complicated functions in which parameters can be used in a large number of ways An example that illustrates the difference between linear and nonlinear least squares is the Fourier series One member may be written as z a sin cx x bx cos cxx If a and b are the unknown parameters and c is constant then estimating values of the parameters is a linear least squares problem However if c is an unknown parameter the problem is nonlinear In the linear case parameter values can be determined by comparatively simple linear algebra in one direct step However LLS is a special case which is also solved along with more general NLLS problems by the iterative procedure that gnuplot uses fit attempts to find the minimum by doing a search Each step iteration calculates WSSR with a new set of parameter values The Marquardt Levenberg algorithm selects the parameter values for the next iteration The process continues until a preset criterion is met either 1 the fit has converged the relative change in WSSR is less than FIT_LIMIT or 2 it reaches a preset iteration count limit FIT_MAXITER see fit control variables p 68 The fit may also
311. nd Symbol It is likely that many additional fonts are also available but the specific 3 set depends on your system or printer configuration Gnuplot does not know or care about this the output ps or eps files that it creates will simply refer to whatever font names you request Thus set term postscript eps font Times Roman 12 will produce output that is suitable for all printers and viewers On the other hand set term postscript eps font Garamond Premier Pro Italic will produce an output file that contains valid PostScript but since it refers to a specialized font only some printers or viewers will be able to display the specific font that was requested Most will substitute a different font However it is possible to embed a specific font in the output file so that all printers will be able to use it This requires that the a suitable font description file is available on your system Note that some font files require specific licensing if they are to be embedded in this way See postscript fontfile p for more detailed description and examples Glossary Throughout this document an attempt has been made to maintain consistency of nomenclature This cannot be wholly successful because as gnuplot has evolved over time certain command and keyword names have been adopted that preclude such perfection This section contains explanations of the way some of these terms are used A page or screen or canvas is the
312. nd header otherwise switching the font will have no effect For a standard font in ConTeXt MKII pdfTeX you could use set terminal context standalone header usetypescript iwona ec font iwona ss 11 Please take a look into ConTeXt documentation wiki or mailing list archives for any up to date information about font usage Examples set terminal context size 10cm 5cm 10cm 5cm set terminal context size 4in 3in 4in 3in For standalone whole page plots with labels in UTF 8 encoding set terminal context standalone header enableregime utf 8 Requirements You need gnuplot module for ConTeXt http ctan org pkg context gnuplot and a recent version of ConTeXt If you want to call gnuplot on the fly you also need writel8 enabled In most TeX distributions this can be set with shell_escape t in texmf cnf See http wiki contextgarden net Gnuplot for details about this terminal and for more exhaustive help amp examples Calling gnuplot from ConTeXt The easiest way to make plots in ConTeXt documents is usemodule gnuplot starttext title How to draw nice plots with sc gnuplot startGNUPLOTscript sin set format y 1f plot sin x t Hsin x stopGNUPLOTscript useGNUPLOTgraphic sin stoptext This will run gnuplot automatically and include the resulting figure in the document Corel The corel terminal driver supports CorelDraw Syntax set terminal corel default
313. nd intended for creation of high quality PDF documents The terminal outputs Metafun source which can be edited manually but you should be able to configure most things from outside For an average user of ConTeXt gnuplot module it s recommended to refer to Using ConTeXt rather than reading this page or to read the manual of the gnuplot module for ConTeXt The context terminal supports the following options Syntax set term context default defaultsize size lt scale gt size lt xsize gt in cm lt ysize gt in cm input standalone timestamp notimestamp noheader header lt header gt color colour monochrome rounded mitered beveled round butt squared dashed solid dashlength dl lt dl gt linewidth lw lt lw gt fontscale lt fontscale gt mppoints texpoints inlineimages externalimages defaultfont font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt In non standalone input graphic only parameters size to select graphic size fontscale to scale all the labels for a factor lt fontscale gt and font size make sense the rest is silently ignored and should be configured in the tex file which inputs the graphic It s highly recommended to set the proper fontsize if document font differs from 12pt so that gnuplot will know how much space to reserve for labels default resets all the options to their default values defaultsize sets the plot size to 5in 3in
314. nd the actual filename will be fit log in that directory If the errorvariables option is turned on the error of each fitted parameter computed by fit will be copied to a user defined variable whose name is formed by appending _err to the name of the parameter itself This is useful mainly to put the parameter and its error onto a plot of the data and the fitted function for reference as in set fit errorvariables fit f x datafile using 1 2 via a b print error of a is a_err set label a 6 2f a 6 2f a_err plot datafile using 1 2 f x By default the information written to the log file is also echoed to the terminal session set fit quiet turns off the echo Fontpath The fontpath setting defines additional locations for font files searched when including font files Currently only the postscript terminal supports fontpath If a file cannot be found in the current directory the directories in fontpath are tried Further documentation concerning the supported file formats is included in the terminal postscript section of the documentation Syntax set fontpath pathlisti pathlist2 show fontpath Path names may be entered as single directory names or as a list of path names separated by a platform specific path separator eg colon on Unix semicolon on DOS Windows OS 2 platforms The show fontpath save and save set commands replace the platform specific separator wi
315. nditions for designating the quantity calculated to be a standard deviation are not generally valid for the NLLS problem The asymptotic standard errors are generally over optimistic and should not be used for determining confidence levels but are useful for qualitative purposes The final solution also produces a correlation matrix indicating correlation of parameters in the region of the solution The main diagonal elements autocorrelation are always 1 if all parameters were independent the off diagonal elements would be nearly 0 Two variables which completely compensate each other would have an off diagonal element of unit magnitude with a sign depending on whether the relation is proportional or inversely proportional The smaller the magnitudes of the off diagonal elements the closer the estimates of the standard deviation of each parameter would be to the asymptotic standard error Practical guidelines If you have a basis for assigning weights to each data point doing so lets you make use of additional knowledge about your measurements e g take into account that some points may be more reliable than others That may affect the final values of the parameters Weighting the data provides a basis for interpreting the additional fit output after the last iteration Even if you weight each point equally estimating an average standard deviation rather than using a weight of 1 makes WSSR a dimensionless variable as chisquare is by def
316. ndows with 88 word words writeback wat B2 22 X resources 228 X11 x11 17 x11 fonts 229 x11 mouse 128 x2data mar x2dtics x2label x2mtics 158 x2range 158 x2tics 158 x2zeroaxis data pa 52 FEL xdtics E58 159 105107 xerrorbars xerrorlines xfig slabel E55 150 105 100 153 xlib xmtics 158 T00 105 150 153 xrange 90 538 1501053 160 160 165 73 xterm 219 xticlabels xtics 101 ETS 1 LH 5 LS 155 LO 155 TO xyerrorbars A xyplane A 57 165 167 169 xzeroaxis y2data y2dtics y2label 165 y2mtics 165 y2range 166 y2tics 166 y2zeroaxis 166 ydata 166 ydtics 166 yerrorbars yerrorlines 60 ylabel ymtics 166 yrange 166 ytics 166 yzeroaxis 166 zdata zdtics zero zeroaxis zlabel zmtics 168 zoom 128 zrange 168 ztics 168 zzeroaxis 167
317. ne relative lt frac gt places the xy plane below the range in Z where the distance from the xy plane to Zmin is given as a fraction of the total range in z The default value is 0 5 Negative values are permitted but tic labels on the three axes may overlap The older deprecated form set ticslevel is retained for backwards compatibility To place the xy plane at a position pos on the z axis ticslevel may be set equal to pos zmin zmin zmax However this position will change if the z range is changed The alternative form set xyplane at lt zvalue gt fixes the placement of the xy plane at a specific Z value regardless of the current z range Thus to force the x y and z axes to meet at a common origin one would specify set xyplane at 0 See also set view p 157 and set zeroaxis p 167 Xzeroaxis The set xzeroaxis command draws a line at y 0 For details please see set zeroaxis p 167 Y 2data The set y2data command sets y2 right hand axis data to timeseries dates times Please see set xdata p 158 Y 2dtics The set y2dtics command changes tics on the y2 right hand axis to days of the week Please see set xdtics p for details Y 2label The set y2label command sets the label for the y2 right hand axis Please see set xlabel p 159 Y 2mtics The set y2mtics command changes tics on the y2 right hand axis to months of the year Please see set xmtics p 160 for details
318. nes is like linespoints except that a vertical error line is also drawn At each point x y a line is drawn from x y ydelta to x y ydelta or from x ylow to x yhigh depending on how many data columns are provided A tic mark is placed at the ends of the error bar see set bars p for details Either 3 or 4 input columns are required with yero ines H 3 columns x y ydelta 4 columns x y ylow yhigh An additional input column 4th or 5th may be used to provide information such as variable point color See also errorbar demo 3D surface plots Surface plots are generated using the splot command rather than the plot command The style with lines FD surface plot with hidden line removal d m n Zz raws a surface made from a grid of lines Solid sur ML Lee faces can be drawn using the style with pm3d Usuall IS LY Le Loe scan be dra g the style with pm3d yo Xx LES we the surface is displayed at some arbitrary viewing angle 2 No DIAS f i LITA such that it clearly represents a 3D surface In this case T the X Y and Z axes are all visible in the plot The illusion of 3D is enhanced by choosing hidden line re moval or depth sorted surface elements See hidden3d p 116 and the depthorder p 136 option of set Mans ad pm3d p 135 The splot command can also calculate and draw contour lines corresponding to constant Z values These contour lines may be drawn onto the s
319. nese X11 font aliases and is the separator of font names set term x11 font mbfont fixed 16 r medium lt font gt lt size gt lt slant gt lt weight gt form is also usable set title mb strings font mbfont fixed medium r normal 14 The same syntax applies to the default font in Xresources settings for example gnuplot font mbfont misc fixed medium r normal 14 x x c 3jisx0208 1983 0 If gnuplot is built with enable x11 mbfonts you can use two special PostScript font names Ryumin Light and GothicBBB Medium standard Japanese PS fonts without the prefix mbfont Command line_options In addition to the X Toolkit options the following options may be specified on the command line when starting gnuplot or as resources in your Xdefaults file note that raise and persist can be overridden later by set term x11 nolraise no persist mono forces monochrome rendering on color displays _oray requests grayscale rendering on grayscale or color displays Grayscale displays receive monochrome rendering by default clear requests that the window be cleared momentarily before a new plot is displayed tvtwm requests that geometry specifications for position of the window be made relative to the currently displayed portion of the virtual root raise raises plot window after each plot noraise does not raise plot window after each plo
320. netype bgnd can be used to draw in this color See bgnd p 35 New plot styles See documentation for plot styles boxplot p 45 circles p 47 ellipses p 47 and fillsteps p 50 Revised polar axes Polar plot mode has been reworked to support additional plot styles The polar axes can now be drawn and labeled independent of the x and y axes See set polar p 143 and set rrange p 145 New smoothing algorithms New smoothing algorithms have been added for both 2 and 3 dimensional plots smooth kdensity and smooth cumulative can be used with plot to draw smooth histograms and cumulative distribution func tions Several new smoothing kernels have been added to dgrid3d for use with splot See smooth p dgrid3d p 109 New time date handling Gnuplot now tracks time to millisecond precision Time formats have been modified to match this The new built in function time returns the current time of day according to the system clock Example print the current time to msec precision print str time H M 3S d b Y time 0 0 18 15 04 253 16 Apr 2011 Statistical summary of data The new stats command reads data from a file using the same syntax as the plot or splot commands Rather than drawing a graph it prints out a statistical summary of the data contained in the column s requested The resulting statistics min max mean standard deviation correlation etc are also stored in named variables that can
321. nformation may be included in one of the columns of the binary data file Skip This keyword allows you to skip sections of a binary file For instance if the file contains a 1024 byte header before the start of the data region you would probably want to use plot lt file_name gt binary skip 1024 If there are multiple records in the file you may specify a leading offset for each For example to skip 512 bytes before the 1st record and 256 bytes before the second and third records plot lt file_name gt binary record 356 356 356 skip 512 256 256 Format The default binary format is a float For more flexibility the format can include details about variable sizes For example format uchar int float associates an unsigned character with the first using column an int with the second column and a float with the third column If the number of size specifications is less than the greatest column number the size is implicitly taken to be similar to the last given variable size i Furthermore similar to the using specification the format can include discarded columns via the character and have implicit repetition via a numerical repeat field For example format 2int 3float causes gnuplot to discard two ints before reading three floats To list variable sizes type show datafile binary datasizes There are a group of names that are machine dependent along with their sizes in bytes for the particular compilation Th
322. ng on a parameter An example of a 2D parametric function would be plot sin t cos t which draws a circle if the aspect ratio is set correctly see set size p 145 gnuplot will display an error message if both functions are not provided for a parametric plot For 3D plotting the surface is described as x f u v y g u v z h u v Therefore a triplet of functions is required An example of a 3D parametric function would be cos u cos v cos u sin v sin u which draws a sphere gnuplot will display an error message if all three functions are not provided for a parametric splot The total set of possible plots is a superset of the simple f x style plots since the two functions can describe the x and y values to be computed separately In fact plots of the type t f t are equivalent to those produced with f x because the x values are computed using the identity function Similarly 3D plots of the type u v f u v are equivalent to f x y Note that the order the parametric functions are specified is xfunction yfunction and zfunction and that each operates over the common parametric domain Also the set parametric function implies a new range of values Whereas the normal f x and f x y style plotting assume an xrange and yrange and zrange the parametric mode additionally specifies a trange urange and vrange These ranges may be set directly with set trange set urange and set vrange or by specifying the range on the plot o
323. nge on a dual axis graph the x coordinates may not coincide if the x2tics are not being drawn This is because the x axis has been autoextended to a whole number of tics but the x2 axis has not The following example illustrates the problem reset plot axes x2y1 11 19 19 e 11 19 19 e To avoid this you can use the fixmin fixmax feature of the set autoscale command which turns off the automatic extension of the axis range up to the next tic mark Label coordinates and text can also be read from a data file see labels p 55 Every The every keyword allows a periodic sampling of a data set to be plotted In the discussion a point is a datum defined by a single record in the file block here will mean the same thing as datablock see glossary p 33 Syntax plot file every lt point_incr gt 1 f lt block_incr gt lt start_point gt lt start_block gt lt end_point gt lt end_block gt The data points to be plotted are selected according to a loop from lt start_point gt to lt end_point gt with increment lt point_incr gt and the blocks according to a loop from lt start_block gt to lt end_block gt with increment lt block_incr gt The first datum in each block is numbered 0 as is the first block in the file Note that records containing unplottable information are counted Any of the numbers can be omitted the increments default to unity the s
324. nhanced set terminal postscript landscape 22 old psbig set terminal postscript eps 14 old epsf1 set terminal postscript eps 22 old epsf2 set size 0 7 1 4 set term post portrait color Times Roman 14 set term post VAGRoundedBT_Regular 14 fontfile bvrr8a pfa old postscript old enhpost Linewidths and pointsizes may be changed with set style line The postscript driver supports about 70 distinct pointtypes selectable through the pointtype option on plot and set style line Several possibly useful files about gnuplot s PostScript are included in the docs psdoc subdirectory of the gnuplot distribution and at the distribution sites These are ps_symbols gpi a gnuplot command file that when executed creates the file ps_symbols ps which shows all the symbols available through the postscript terminal ps_guide ps a PostScript file that contains a summary of the enhanced syntax and a page showing what the octal codes produce with text and symbol fonts ps_file doc a text file that contains a discussion of the organization of a PostScript file written by gnuplot and ps_fontfile_doc tex a LaTeX file which contains a short documentation concerning the encapsulation of LaTeX fonts with a glyph table of the math fonts A PostScript file is editable so once gnuplot has created one you are free to modify it to your heart s desire See the editing postscript p 213 section for some hints Editing postscript
325. ning a hotkey i e a sequence of gnuplot commands which will be executed when a certain key or key sequence is pressed while the driver s window has the input focus Note that bind is only available if gnuplot was compiled with mouse support and it is used by all mouse capable terminals A user specified binding supersedes any builtin bindings except that lt space gt and q cannot normally be rebound For an exception see bind space p 37 Mouse buttons cannot be rebound You get the list of all hotkeys by typing show bind or bind or by typing the hotkey h in the graph window Key bindings are restored to their default state by reset bind Note that multikey bindings with modifiers must be given in quotes Normally hotkeys are only recognized when the currently active plot window has focus bind allwindows lt key gt short form bind all lt key gt causes the binding for lt key gt to apply to all gnuplot plot windows active or not In this case gnuplot variable MOUSE_KEY_WINDOW is set to the ID of the originating window and may be used by the bound command Examples set bindings y bind a replot bind ctrl a plot x x bind ctrl alt a print great bind Home set view 60 30 replot bind all Home print This is window MOUSE_KEY_WINDOW show bindings bind ctrl a shows the binding for ctrl a bind shows all bindings show bind show all bindings remove
326. nly for every Nth point and that a box actually circle behind each point symbol is blanked out by filling with the background color The command set pointintervalbox controls the radius of this blanked out region It is a multiplier for the default radius which is equal to the point size Pointsize The set pointsize command scales the size of the points used in plots Syntax set pointsize lt multiplier gt show pointsize The default is a multiplier of 1 0 Larger pointsizes may be useful to make points more visible in bitmapped graphics The pointsize of a single plot may be changed on the plot command See plot with p 91 for details Please note that the pointsize setting is not supported by all terminal types Polar The set polar command changes the meaning of the plot from rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates Syntax set polar unset polar show polar In polar coordinates the dummy variable t is an angle The default range of t is 0 2 pi or if degree units have been selected to 0 360 see set angles p 96 The command unset polar changes the meaning of the plot back to the default rectangular coordinate system The set polar command is not supported for splots See the set mapping p 126 command for similar functionality for splot p 169 s While in polar coordinates the meaning of an expression in t is really r f t where t is an angle of rotation The trange controls the domain the angle
327. nts will not extend outside the boundary lines Without clipping points near the boundaries the plot may look bad Adjusting the x and y ranges may give similar results Setting the one clip type causes gnuplot to draw a line segment which has only one of its two endpoints within the graph Only the in range portion of the line is drawn The alternative is to not draw any portion of the line segment Some lines may have both endpoints out of range but pass through the graph Setting the two clip type allows the visible portion of these lines to be drawn In no case is a line drawn outside the graph The defaults are noclip points clip one and noclip two To check the state of all forms of clipping use show clip For backward compatibility with older versions the following forms are also permitted set clip unset clip set clip is synonymous with set clip points unset clip turns off all three types of clipping Cntrparam set cntrparam controls the generation of contours and their smoothness for a contour plot show contour displays current settings of cntrparam as well as contour Syntax set cntrparam linear cubicspline bspline points lt n gt order lt n gt levels auto lt n gt lt n gt discrete lt z1 gt lt z2 gt lt z3 gt incremental lt start gt lt incr gt lt end gt show contour This command has two functions First it sets the values of z for which contour poin
328. nuplot cfg file or the header option described below In standalone mode the font size is taken from the given font size in the set terminal command To be able to use a specified font size a file size lt size gt clo has to reside in the LaTeX search path By default 10pt 11pt and 12pt are supported If the package extsizes is installed 8pt 9pt 14pt 17pt and 20pt are added The header option takes a string as argument This string is written into the generated LaTeX file If using the standalone mode it is written into the preamble directly before the begin document command In the input mode it is placed directly after the begingroup command to ensure that all settings are local to the plot Examples Use T1 fontencoding change the text and math font to Times Roman as well as the sans serif font to Helvetica set terminal epslatex standalone header usepackage T1 fontenc n usepackage mathptmx n usepackage helvet Use a boldface font in the plot not influencing the text outside the plot set terminal epslatex input header bfseries If the file gnuplot cfg is found by LaTeX it is input in the preamble the LaTeX document when using standalone mode It can be used for further settings e g changing the document font to Times Roman Helvetica and Courier including math fonts handled by mathptmx sty usepackage mathptmx usepackage scaled 0 92 helvet usepackage courier The file gnup
329. ny other reason you may want to manually edit the transformations directly in the postscript file This is the default option nops_allcF Using the option ps_allcF writes postscript definitions of all formulae This you may find interesting if you want to edit the postscript file in order to have different palettes for different surfaces in one graph Well you can achieve this functionality by multiplot with fixed origin and size If pm3d map has been plotted from gridded or almost regular data with an output to a postscript file then it is possible to reduce the size of this postscript file up to at about 50 by the enclosed awk script pm3dCompress awk This you may find interesting if you intend to keep the file for including it into your publication or before downloading a very large file into a slow printer Usage awk f pm3dCompress awk thefile ps gt smallerfile ps If pm3d map has been plotted from rectangular gridded data with an output to a postscript file then it is possible to reduce the file size even more by the enclosed awk script pm3dConvert Tolmage awk Usage awk f pm3dConvertTolmage awk lt thefile ps gt smallerfile ps You may manually change the postscript output from gray to color and vice versa and change the definition of lt maxcolors gt Pointintervalbox The pointinterval property of line types is used in plot style linespoints A negative value of pointinterval e g N means that point symbols are drawn o
330. o set a label displaced a little bit from a small point set label origin at 0 0 point 1t 1 pt 2 ps 3 offset 1 1 To set a label whose color matches the z value in this case 5 5 of some point on a 3D splot colored using pm3d set label text at 0 0 5 5 tc palette z Linetype The set linetype command allows you to redefine the basic linetypes used for plots The command options are identical to those for set style line Unlike line styles redefinitions by set linetype are persistent they are not affected by reset For example linetypes one and two default to red and green If you redefine them like this set linetype 1 lw 2 lc rgb blue pointtype 6 set linetype 2 lw 2 lc rgb forest green pointtype 8 everywhere that uses lt 1 will now get a thick blue line rather than a thin red line the previous default meaning of lt 1 This includes uses such as the definition of a temporary linestyle derived from the base linetype 1 Note This command is new to gnuplot version 4 6 It supersedes a rather cryptic command in version 4 2 set style increment user The older command is now deprecated This mechanism can be used to define a set of personal preferences for the sequence of lines used in gnuplot The recommended way to do this is to add to the run time initialization file gnuplot a sequence of commands like if GPVAL_VERSION lt 4 5 C strstrt GPVAL_COMPILE_OPTIONS USER_LINETYPES exit se
331. ode the whole plot including the fonts is reduced to half of the default size enhanced enables enhanced text mode features subscripts superscripts and mixed fonts See enhanced p 24 for more information blacktext forces all text to be written in black even in color mode Duplexing in PostScript is the ability of the printer to print on both sides of the same sheet of paper With defaultplex the default setting of the printer is used with simplex only one side is printed duplex prints on both sides ignored if your printer can t do it lt fontname gt is the name of a valid PostScript font and lt fontsize gt is the size of the font in PostScript points In addition to the standard postscript fonts an oblique version of the Symbol font useful for mathematics is defined It is called Symbol Oblique default sets all options to their defaults landscape monochrome dashed dl 1 0 lw 1 0 defaultplex noenhanced Helvetica and 14pt Default size of a PostScript plot is 10 inches wide and 7 inches high The option color enables color while monochrome prefers black and white drawing elements Further monochrome uses gray palette but it does not change color of objects specified with an explicit colorspec solid draws all plots with solid lines overriding any dashed patterns dashlength or dl scales the length of the dashed line segments by lt DL gt which is a floating point number greater than zero linewidth or lw scales
332. of characters extended Latin Greek etc Some fonts use this scheme others do not By default gnuplot will use the Adobe glyph names E g the lower case Greek letter alpha will be called alpha If you specific noadobeglyphnames then instead gnuplot will use uni03B1 to describe this character If you get this setting wrong the character may not be found even if it is present in the font It is probably always correct to use the default for Adobe fonts but for other fonts you may have to try both settings See also fontfile P 214 Pslatex and pstex The pslatex driver generates output for further processing by LaTeX while the pstex driver generates output for further processing by TeX pslatex uses specials understandable by dvips and xdvi Figures generated by pstex can be included in any plain based format including LaTeX Syntax set terminal pslatex pstex default set terminal pslatex pstex rotate norotate foldstyle newstyle fauxfile noauxfile llevel1 leveldefault color colour monochrome background lt rgbcolor gt nobackground solid dashed dashlength dl lt DL gt linewidth lw lt LW gt rounded butt clip noclip palfuncparam lt samples gt lt maxdeviation gt size lt XxX gt unit lt YY gt unit lt font_size gt If you see the error message Can t find PostScript prologue file Please see and follow the instructions in postscript
333. of the y axis The default is xy or whatever set style ellipse units was set to NB If the x and y axis scales are not equal e g units xy is in effect then the major minor axis ratio will no longer be correct after rotation Note that set object ellipse size lt 2r gt lt 2r gt does not in general produce the same result as set object circle lt r gt The circle radius is always interpreted in terms of units along the x axis and will always produce a circle even if the x and y axis scales are different and even if the aspect ratio of your plot is not 1 If units is set to xy then set object ellipse interprets the first lt 2r gt in terms of x axis units and the second lt 2r gt in terms of y axis units This will only produce a circle if the x and y axis scales are identical and the plot aspect ratio is 1 On the other hand if units is set to xx or yy then the diameters specified in the set object command will be interpreted in the same units so the ellipse will have the correct aspect ratio and it will maintain its aspect ratio even if the plot is resized Circle Syntax set object lt index gt circle at center lt position gt size lt radius gt arc lt begin gt lt end gt lt other object properties gt The position of the circle is specified by giving the position of the center center followed by the radius The keywords at and center are synonyms The position and radius may be given in x axis graph or
334. off by clicking on the corresponding key entry By default this script is taken from a local directory usually usr local share gnuplot lt version gt js You can change this by using the jsdir option to specify either a different local directory or a general URL The latter is usually appropriate if you are embedding the svg into a web page SVG allows you to embed fonts directly into an SVG document or to provide a hypertext link to the desired font The fontfile option specifies a local file which is copied into the lt defs gt section of the resulting SVG output file This file may either itself contain a font or may contain the records necessary to create a hypertext reference to the desired font Gnuplot will look for the requested file using the directory list in the GNUPLOT_FONTPATH environmental variable NB You must embed an svg font not a TrueType or PostScript font Svga The svga terminal driver supports PCs with SVGA graphics It can only be used if it is compiled with DJGPP Its only option is the font Syntax set terminal svga lt fontname gt Tek40 This family of terminal drivers supports a variety of VT like terminals tek40xx supports Tektronix 4010 and others as well as most TEK emulators vttek supports VT like tek40xx terminal emulators The fol lowing are present only if selected when gnuplot is built kc tek40xx supports MS DOS Kermit Tek4010 terminal emulators in color km tek40xx supports them in monochrome
335. om each column a stack of boxes at x 2 representing the second data value from each column and so on All boxes derived from any one column are given the same fill color and or pattern see set style fill p 148 The columnstacked style is similar except that each stack of boxes is built up from a single data column Each data value from the first specified column yields a box in the stack at x 1 each data value from the second specified column yields a box in the stack at x 2 and so on In this style the color of each box is taken from the row number rather than the column number of the corresponding data field Box widths may be modified using the set boxwidth command Box fill styles may be set using the set style fill command Histograms always use the x1 axis but may use either yl or y2 If a plot contains both histograms and other plot styles the non histogram plot elements may use either the x1 or the x2 axis Examples 5 Suppose that the input file contains data values in columns 2 4 6 and error estimates in columns 3 5 7 This example plots the values in columns 2 and 4 as a histogram of clustered boxes the default style Because we use iteration in the plot command any num ber of data columns can be handled in a single command See iteration p 71 set boxwidth 0 9 relative set style data histograms set style histogram cluster set style fill solid 1 0 border 1t 1 plot for COL 2 4 2
336. oman Courier Bold Oblique Hershey Triplex Italic Symbol Hershey Gothic_German ZapfDingbats Hershey Gothic_English Script Hershey Gothic Italian 15 Hershey Symbol_Set_1 Hershey Symbol_Set_2 Hershey Symbol_Math The first thirteen of these fonts are required for WebCGM The Microsoft Office CGM import filter imple ments the 13 standard fonts listed above and also ZapfDingbats and Script However the script font may only be accessed under the name 15 For more on Microsoft import filter font substitutions check its help file which you may find here C Program Files Microsoft Office 0ffice Cgmimp32 hlp and or its configuration file which you may find here C Program Files Common Files Microsoft Shared Grphf1lt Cgmimp32 cfg In the set term command you may specify a font name which does not appear in the default font table In that case a new font table is constructed with the specified font as its first entry You must ensure that the spelling capitalization and spacing of the name are appropriate for the application that will read the CGM file Gnuplot and any MIL D 28003A compliant application ignore case in font names If you need to add several new fonts use several set term commands Example set terminal cgm 0ld English set terminal cgm Tengwar set terminal cgm Arabic set output myfile cgm plot set output You cannot introduce a new font in a set label comman
337. on outside of gnuplot type man strftime See set timefmt p 155 for a list of the allowed input format codes Time date specifiers In time date mode the acceptable formats are Tic mark label Date Time Format Specifiers Format Explanation ha abbreviated name of day of the week LA full name of day of the week b or h abbreviated name of the month 4B full name of the month ha day of the month 01 31 7D shorthand for m d y only output iF shorthand for Y m d only output AK hour 0 23 one or two digits 7H hour 00 23 always two digits hl hour 1 12 one or two digits I hour 01 12 always two digits hj day of the year 1 366 m month 01 12 7M minute 0 60 p am or pm Jr shorthand for 1 M S p only output 4R shorthand for 4H M only output 8 second integer 0 60 on output double on input hs number of seconds since start of year 2000 T shorthand for H M S only output 7U week of the year week starts on Sunday hw day of the week 0 6 Sunday 0 ZW week of the year week starts on Monday y year 0 99 in range 1969 2068 7 Y year 4 digit Except for the non numerical formats these may be preceded by a 0 zero not oh to pad the field length with leading zeroes and a positive digit to define the minimum field width which will be overridden if the specified width is not large enough to contain the number The S format a
338. on they often have spaces in the font names which is not supported by Type 1 fonts in which a TrueType is converted on the fly The font names are changed in order to eliminate the spaces in the fontnames The easiest way to find out which font name is generated for use with gnuplot start gnuplot in interactive mode and type in set terminal postscript fontfile lt filename ttf gt For converting font files either ttf or pfb to pfa format the conversion tool has to read the font from a file and write it to standard output If the output cannot be written to standard output on the fly conversion is not possible For pfb files pfbtops is a tool which can do this If this program is installed on your system the on the fly conversion should work Just try to encapsulate a pfb file If the compiled in program call does not work correctly you can specify how this program is called by defining the environment variable GNU PLOT_PFBTOPFA e g to pfbtops s The s will be replaced by the font file name and thus has to exist in the string If you don t want to do the conversion on the fly but get a pfa file of the font you can use the tool pfb2pfa which is written in simple c and should compile with any c compiler It is available from many ftp servers e g ftp ftp dante de tex archive fonts utilities ps2mf In fact pfbtopfa and pfb2ps do the same job pfbtopfa puts the resulting pfa code into a file whereas pfbtops writes
339. ons that can be set with the set command to take on their default values This command is useful e g to restore the default graph settings at the end of a command file or to return to a defined state after lots of settings have been changed within a command file Please refer to the set command to see the default values that the various options take The following are not affected by reset set term set output set loadpath set fontpath set linetype set encoding set decimalsign set locale set psdir reset errors clears only the error state variables GPVAL_ERRNO and GPVAL_ERRMSG reset bind restores all hotkey bindings to their default state s Save The save command saves user defined functions variables the set term status all set options or all of these plus the last plot splot command to the specified file Syntax save lt option gt lt filename gt where lt option gt is functions variables terminal or set If no option is used gnuplot saves functions variables set options and the last plot splot command saved files are written in text format and may be read by the load command For save with the set option or without any option the terminal choice and the output filename are written out as a comment to get an output file that works in other installations of gnuplot without changes and without risk of unwillingly overwriting files save termin
340. opened by a previous invocation of set output will be closed and new output will be sent to STDOUT If you give the command set output STDOUT your output may be sent to a file named STDOUT May be not will be because some terminals like x11 or wxt ignore set output When both set terminal and set output are used together it is safest to give set terminal first because some terminals set a flag which is needed in some operating systems This would be the case for example if the operating system needs to know whether or not a file is to be formatted in order to open it properly On machines with popen functions Unix output can be piped through a shell command if the first non whitespace character of the filename is For instance set output lpr Plaser filename set output lp dlaser filename On MSDOS machines set output PRN will direct the output to the default printer On VMS output can be sent directly to any spooled device It is also possible to send the output to DECnet transparent tasks which allows some flexibility Parametric The set parametric command changes the meaning of plot splot from normal functions to parametric functions The command unset parametric restores the plotting style to normal single valued expression plotting Syntax set parametric unset parametric show parametric For 2D plotting a parametric function is determined by a pair of parametric functions operati
341. or bar unless set bars is used see set bars p for details The basic style requires either 3 or 4 columns 3 columns x y xdelta 4 columns x y xlow xhigh with serror ines 1 An additional input column 4th or 5th may be used to provide information such as variable point color Xyerrorlines The xyerrorlines style is only relevant to 2D data plots xyerrorlines is like linespoints except that horizontal and vertical error bars are also drawn At each point x y lines are drawn from x y ydelta to x y ydelta and from x xdelta y to x xdelta y or from x ylow to x yhigh and from xlow y to xhigh y depending upon the number of data columns provided A tic mark is placed at the ends of the error bar unless set bars is used see set bars p for details Either 4 or 6 input columns are required 4 columns x y xdelta ydelta 6 columns x y xlow xhigh ylow yhigh with syerFor ines A ponte If data are provided in an unsupported mixed form the using filter on the plot command should be used to set up the appropriate form For example if the data are of the form x y xdelta ylow yhigh then you can use plot data using 1 2 1 3 1 3 4 5 with xyerrorlines An additional input column 5th or 7th may be used to provide variable per datapoint color information i Yerrorlines The yerrorlines or errorlines style is only relevant to 2D data plots yerrorli
342. ormat 113 152 155 159 160 164 format specifiers frequency fsteps function functions 3 ae gamma 26 gamma correction 142 gd general geographic geomean E gnuplot gpic gprintf GPVAL graph menu graph menu 223 223 226 grass 196 grayscale e p31 grid 116 116 144 grid data e 5 109 170 172 guidelines hegi heatmap INDEX help help desk hidden3a 60 histeps histograms history historysize 118 hotkey hpdj 198 nos hpel 1 hpljii hppj ibeta i 8 62 70 175 if old 71 a if old 7 e imag image imagen 198 impulses index initialization 19 int internationalization 233 interval introduction inverf invnorm sosampes 85 55 117 TE A iterate iteration 18 T B2 63 62 1 89 96 174 jpeg kdensity kdensity2d 109 key 07 19 123 127 latex lc kyo 199 label 55 122 least squares license ine 105 57 line editing line resources linecolor 34 44 lines 55 56 linespoints 56 ai 150 linestyle 56 150 tinetype 19 24158 82 12 239 150 linetypes linewidth linux 200 Imargin 124 load loadpath 1 cal 19 17 2533 log 27 102 log10 a e lower lp ES iva 200 22 macros map 61 mapping margin 100 13 120 29 133 158 Marquardt
343. ot reverseVideo on requests white on black Color_resources The X11 terminal honors the following resources shown here with their default values or the greyscale resources The values may be color names as listed in the X11 rgb txt file on your system hexadecimal RGB color specifications see X11 documentation or a color name followed by a comma and an intensity value from 0 to 1 For example blue 0 5 means a half intensity blue gnuplot background white gnuplot textColor black gnuplot borderColor black gnuplot axisColor black gnuplot linelColor red gnuplot line2Color green gnuplot line3Color blue egnuplot line4Color magenta gnuplot line5Color cyan gnuplot line6Color sienna gnuplot line7Color orange gnuplot line8Color coral The command line syntax for these is simple only for background which maps directly to the usual X11 toolkit option bg All others can only be set on the command line by use of the generic xrm resource override option Examples gnuplot background coral to change the background color gnuplot xrm gnuplot lineiColor blue to override the first linetype color Grayscale_resources When gray is selected gnuplot honors the following resources for grayscale or color displays shown here with their default values Note that the default background is black gnuplot background black gnuplot textGray white gnuplot borderGray gray50 gnuplot axi
344. ough the point symbol Not all terminals support the linewidth and pointsize features if not supported the option will be ignored Terminal independent colors may be assigned using either linecolor lt colorspec gt or linetype lt colorspec gt abbreviated lc or It This requires giving a RGB color triple a known palette color name a fractional index into the current palette or a constant value from the current mapping of the palette onto cbrange See colors p B3 colorspec p 34 set palette p 138 colornames p 105 cbrange p 168 set style line lt n gt linetype lt lt gt will set both a terminal dependent dot dash pattern and color The commandsset style line lt n gt linecolor lt colorspec gt or set style line lt n gt linetype lt colorspec gt will set a new line color while leaving the existing dot dash pattern unchanged In 3d mode splot command the special keyword palette is allowed as a shorthand for linetype palette z The color value corresponds to the z value elevation of the splot and varies smoothly along a line or surface Examples Suppose that the default lines for indices 1 2 and 3 are red green and blue respectively and the default point shapes for the same indices are a square a cross and a triangle respectively Then set style line 1 1t 2 lw 2 pt 3 ps 0 5 defines a new linestyle that is green and twice the default width and a new pointstyle that is a half sized triangle
345. oxwidth 0 5 relative To set the box width to an absolute value of 2 use set boxwidth 2 absolute Clabel gnuplot will vary the linetype used for each contour level when clabel is set When this option on the default a legend labels each linestyle with the z level it represents It is not possible at present to separate the contour labels from the surface key Syntax set clabel lt format gt unset clabel show clabel The default for the format string is 8 3g which gives three decimal places This may produce poor label alignment if the key is altered from its default configuration The first contour linetype or only contour linetype when clabel is off is the surface linetype 1 contour points are the same style as surface points See also set contour p 105 Clip gnuplot can clip data points and lines that are near the boundaries of a graph Syntax set clip lt clip type gt unset clip lt clip type gt show clip Three clip types for points and lines are supported by gnuplot points one and two One two or all three clip types may be active for a single graph Note that clipping of color filled quadrangles drawn by pm3d maps and surfaces is not controlled by this command but by set pm3d cliplin and set pm3d clip4in The points clip type forces gnuplot to clip actually not plot at all data points that fall within but too close to the boundaries This is done so that large symbols used for poi
346. pe gt and width lt line_width gt if supported by the terminal driver currently in use or a user defined style lt line_style gt If no linetype is specified any zero axes selected will be drawn using the axis linetype linetype 0 set zeroaxis is equivalent to set xzeroaxis set yzeroaxis Note that the z axis must be set separately using set zzeroaxis Examples To simply have the y 0 axis drawn visibly set xzeroaxis If you want a thick line in a different color or pattern instead set xzeroaxis linetype 3 linewidth 2 5 Zlabel This command sets the label for the z axis Please see set xlabel p 159 Zmtics The set zmtics command changes tics on the z axis to months of the year Please see set xmtics p 160 for details Zrange The set zrange command sets the range that will be displayed on the z axis The zrange is used only by splot and is ignored by plot Please see set xrange p 160 for details Ztics The set ztics command controls major labeled tics on the z axis Please see set xtics p 162 for details Cblabel This command sets the label for the color box axis Please see set xlabel p 159 Cbmtics The set cbmtics command changes tics on the color box axis to months of the year Please see set xmtics p for details Cbrange The set cbrange command sets the range of values which are colored using the current palette by styles with pm3d with image and with palette Values outs
347. pecified coordinates default to 0 See coordinates p for details A coordinate system specifier does not carry over from the first endpoint description the second 1 to lt position gt specifies the absolute coordinates of the other end 2 rto lt position gt specifies an offset to the from position For linear axes graph and screen coordinates the distance between the start and the end point corresponds to the given relative coordinate For logarithmic axes the relative given coordinate corresponds to the factor of the coordinate between start and end point Thus a negative relative value or zero are not allowed for logarithmic axes 3 length lt coordinate gt angle lt angle gt specifies the orientation of the arrow in the plane of the graph Again any of the coordinate systems can be used to specify the length The angle is always in degrees os Other characteristics of the arrow can either be specified as a pre defined arrow style or by providing them in set arrow command For a detailed explanation of arrow characteristics see arrowstyle p 146 Examples To set an arrow pointing from the origin to 1 2 with user defined linestyle 5 use set arrow to 1 2 1s 5 To set an arrow from bottom left of plotting area to 5 5 3 and tag the arrow number 3 use set arrow 3 from graph 0 0 to 5 5 3 To change the preceding arrow to end at 1 1 1 without an arrow head and double its width use set arrow 3 to
348. perience problems with your default setup if the demo enhancedtext dem is not displayed properly for example you probably have to install one of the Adobe or OpenOffice Symbol fonts and remove the Microsoft one Other non conform fonts such as wingdings have been observed working The rendering of the plot cannot be altered yet To obtain the best output possible the rendering involves two mechanisms antialiasing and oversampling Antialiasing allows to display non horizontal and non vertical lines smoother Oversampling combined with antialiasing provides subpixel accuracy so that gnuplot can draw a line from non integer coordinates This avoids wobbling effects on diagonal lines plot x for example Pm The pm terminal driver provides an OS 2 Presentation Manager window in which the graph is plotted The window is opened when the first graph is plotted This window has its own online help as well as facilities for printing copying to the clipboard and some line type and color adjustments The multiplot option is supported Syntax set terminal pm server n persist widelines enhanced title If persist is specified each graph appears in its own window and all windows remain open after gnuplot exits If server is specified all graphs appear in the same window which remains open when gnuplot exits This option takes an optional numerical argument which specifies an instance of the server process Thus multiple server w
349. plane Pixel spacing is given and there are two images in the file One of them is translated via origin plot lt file_name gt binary array 512 1024 1024 512 format uchar dx 2 1 dy 1 2 origin 0 0 1024 1024 flipy u 1 2 3 w rgbimage HHHH Four separate records in which the coordinates are part of the data file The file was created with a endianess different from the system on which gnuplot is running splot lt file_name gt binary record 30 30 29 26 endian swap u 1 2 3 Same input file but this time we skip the 1st and 3rd records splot lt file_name gt binary record 30 26 skip 360 348 endian swap u 1 2 3 See also binary matrix p 170 Index The index keyword allows you to select specific data sets in a multi data set file for plotting Syntax plot file index lt m gt lt n gt lt p gt lt name gt Data sets are separated by pairs of blank records index lt m gt selects only set lt m gt index lt m gt lt n gt selects sets in the range lt m gt to lt n gt and index lt m gt lt n gt lt p gt selects indices lt m gt lt m gt lt p gt lt m gt 2 lt p gt etc but stopping at lt n gt Following C indexing the index 0 is assigned to the first data set in the file Specifying too large an index results in an error message If lt p gt is specified but lt n gt is left blank then every lt p gt th dataset is read until the end of the file If in
350. plot defined variables p 30 Plotting There are three gnuplot commands which actually create a plot plot splot and replot plot generates 2D plots splot generates 3D plots actually 2D projections of course and replot appends its arguments to the previous plot or splot and executes the modified command Much of the general information about plotting can be found in the discussion of plot information specific to 3D can be found in the splot section plot operates in either rectangular or polar coordinates see set polar p for details of the latter splot operates only in rectangular coordinates but the set mapping command allows for a few other coordinate systems to be treated In addition the using option allows both plot and splot to treat almost any coordinate system you d care to define plot also lets you use each of the four borders x bottom x2 top y left and y2 right as an independent axis The axes option lets you choose which pair of axes a given function or data set is plotted against A full complement of set commands exists to give you complete control over the scales and labelling of each axis Some commands have the name of an axis built into their names such as set xlabel Other commands have one or more axis names as options such as set logscale xy Commands and options controlling the z axis have no effect on 2D graphs splot can plot surfaces and contours in addition to points and or lines Se
351. plot for filename in A dat B dat C dat filename using 1 2 with lines plot for basename in A B C basename dat using 1 2 with lines set for i 1 10 style line i lc rgb blue unset for tag 100 200 label tag Nested iteration is supported set for i 1 9 for j 1 9 label i 10 j sprintf Z d i 10 j at i j See additional documentation for plot iteration p 89 do p 62 Load The load command executes each line of the specified input file as if it had been typed in interactively Files created by the save command can later be loaded Any text file containing valid commands can be created and then executed by the load command Files being loaded may themselves contain load or call commands See comments p for information about comments in commands To load with arguments see call p 61 Syntax n load lt input file gt The name of the input file must be enclosed in quotes The special filename may be used to load commands from standard input This allows a gnuplot command file to accept some commands from standard input Please see help for batch interactive p for more details On some systems which support a popen function Unix the load file can be read from a pipe by starting the file name with a lt Examples load work gnu load func dat load lt loadfile_generator sh The load command is performed implicitly on any file names given as arguments to gnuplot These
352. point before further commandes are read from it This essentially implements an endless loop of the commands from the beginning of the command file to the reread command But this is not necessarily a disaster reread can be very useful when used in conjunction with if The reread command has no effect if input from standard input Examples Suppose the file looper contains the commands a a 1 plot sin x a pause 1 if a lt 5 reread and from within gnuplot you submit the commands a 0 load looper The result will be five plots separated by the pause message Suppose the file data contains six columns of numbers with a total yrange from 0 to 10 the first is x and the next are five different functions of x Suppose also that the file plotter contains the commands c_p c_pti plot 0 using 1 c_p with lines linetype c_p if c_p lt n_p reread and from within gnuplot you submit the commands n_p 6 c_p 1 unset key set yrange 0 10 set multiplot call plotter data unset multiplot The result is a single graph consisting of five plots The yrange must be set explicitly to guarantee that the five separate graphs drawn on top of each other in multiplot mode will have exactly the same axes The linetype must be specified otherwise all the plots would be drawn with the same type See animate dem in demo directory for an animated example Reset The reset command causes all graph related opti
353. positive angle of the Cartesian plane The angle can be expressed in radians radians as a multiple of pi or degrees For example rotate 1 5708 rotate 0 5pi and rotate 90deg are equivalent If origin is specified the rotation is done about the lower left sample point before translation Otherwise the rotation is done about the array center s Perpendicular For splot the concept of a rotational vector is implemented by a triple representing the vector to be oriented normal to the two dimensional x y plane Naturally the default is 0 0 1 Thus specifying both rotate and perpendicular together can orient data myriad ways in three space The two dimensional rotation is done first followed by the three dimensional rotation That is if R is the rotational 2 x 2 matrix described by an angle and P is the 3 x 3 matrix projecting 0 0 1 to xp yp zp let R be constructed from R at the upper left sub matrix 1 at element 3 3 and zeros elsewhere Then the matrix formula for translating data is v P R v where v is the 3 x 1 vector of data extracted from the data file In cases where the data of the file is inherently not three dimensional logical rules are used to place the data in three space E g usually setting the z dimension value to zero and placing 2D data in the x y plane Data Discrete data contained in a file can be displayed by specifying the name of the data file enclosed in single or double quotes on the plot
354. pplying gnuplot s format parser sprintf format x multiple string result from C language sprintf strlen string string int length of string in bytes strstrt string key strings int index of first character of substring key substr string beg end multiple string string beg end strftime timeformat t any string result from applying gnuplot s time parser strptime timeformat s string seconds since year 2000 as given in string s system command string string containing output stream of shell command word string n string int returns the nth word in string words string string returns the number of words in string other gnuplot functions Function Arguments Returns column x int or string column x during datafile manipulation columnhead x int string containing first entry of column z in datafile defined X variable name DEPRECATED returns 1 if X is defined 0 otherwise exists X string returns 1 if a variable named X is defined 0 otherwise stringcolumn x int or string content of column z as a string timecolumn x int timecolumn zx during datafile manipulation tm_hour x int the hour tm_mday x int the day of the month tm_min x int the minute tm_mon x int the month tm_sec x int the second tm_wday x int the day of the week tm_yday x int the day of the year tm_year x int the year time x any the current system time valid x
355. prologue p 215 The option color enables color while monochrome prefers black and white drawing elements Further monochrome uses gray palette but it does not change color of objects specified with an explicit colorspec solid draws all plots with solid lines overriding any dashed patterns dashlength or dl scales the length of the dashed line segments by lt DL gt which is a floating point number greater than zero linewidth or lw scales all linewidths by lt LW gt By default the generated PostScript code uses language features that were introduced in PostScript Level 2 notably filters and pattern fill of irregular objects such as filledcurves PostScript Level 2 features are condi tionally protected so that PostScript Level 1 interpreters do not issue errors but rather display a message or a PostScript Level 1 approximation The levell option substitutes PostScript Level 1 approximations of these features and uses no PostScript Level 2 code This may be required by some old printers and old versions of Adobe Illustrator The flag level1 can be toggled later by editing a single line in the PostScript output file to force PostScript Level 1 interpretation In the case of files containing level 2 code the above features will not appear or will be replaced by a note when this flag is set or when the interpreting program does not indicate that it understands level 2 PostScript or higher rounded sets line caps and line joins to be rounded bu
356. provides an sprintf format x1 x2 routine if you prefer For a list of gnuplot s format options see format specifiers p 113 Format specifiers The acceptable formats if not in time date mode are Tic mark label numerical format specifiers Format Explanation hf floating point notation e or 4E exponential notation an e or E before the power g or 4G the shorter of e or 4E and f xX or 4X hex o or 0 octal ht mantissa to base 10 1 mantissa to base of current logscale 8 mantissa to base of current logscale scientific power AT power to base 10 AL power to base of current logscale 8 scientific power c character replacement for scientific power hb mantissa of ISO IEC 80000 notation ki Mi Gi Ti Pi Ei Zi Yi B prefix of ISO IEC 80000 notation ki Mi Gi Ti Pi Ei Zi Yi uP multiple of pi A scientific power is one such that the exponent is a multiple of three Character replacement of scientific powers c has been implemented for powers in the range 18 to 18 For numbers outside of this range the format reverts to exponential Other acceptable modifiers which come after the but before the format specifier are which left justifies the number which forces all numbers to be explicitly signed a space which makes positive numbers have a space in front of them where negative numbers have which places a dec
357. ption of using 4 the default or 16 colors Syntax set terminal regis 4 16 Sun The sun terminal driver supports the SunView window system It has no options Svg This terminal produces files in the W3C Scalable Vector Graphics format Syntax set terminal svg size lt x gt lt y gt fixed dynamic no enhanced fname lt font gt fsize lt fontsize gt mouse jsdir lt dirname gt name lt plotname gt font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt fontfile lt filename gt rounded butt solid dashed linewidth lt lw gt background lt rgb_color gt where lt x gt and lt y gt are the size of the SVG plot to generate dynamic allows a svg viewer to resize plot whereas the default setting fixed will request an absolute size linewidth lt w gt increases the width of all lines used in the figure by a factor of lt w gt lt font gt is the name of the default font to use default Arial and lt fontsize gt is the font size in points default 12 SVG viewing programs may substitute other fonts when the file is displayed The svg terminal supports an enhanced text mode which allows font and other formatting commands to be embedded in labels and other text strings The enhanced text mode syntax is shared with other gnuplot terminal types See enhanced p for more details The mouse option tells gnuplot to include a link to a javascript module that supports toggling individual plots on
358. r axis These will only be shown in polar plot mode The tics and labels are drawn to the right of the origin The mirror keyword causes them to be drawn also to the left of the origin See polar p 143 and see set xtics p 162 for discussion of other keywords Samples The sampling rate of functions or for interpolating data may be changed by the set samples command Syntax set samples lt samples_1 gt lt samples_2 gt show samples By default sampling is set to 100 points A higher sampling rate will produce more accurate plots but will take longer This parameter has no effect on data file plotting unless one of the interpolation approximation options is used See plot smooth p re 2D data and set cntrparam p 103 and set dgrid3d p re 3D data When a 2D graph is being done only the value of lt samples_1 gt is relevant When a surface plot is being done without the removal of hidden lines the value of samples specifies the number of samples that are to be evaluated for the isolines Each iso v line will have lt sample_1 gt samples and each iso u line will have lt sample_2 gt samples If you only specify lt samples_1 gt lt samples_2 gt will be set to the same value as lt samples_1 gt See also set isosamples p 118 Size Syntax set size no square ratio lt r gt noratio lt xscale gt lt yscale gt show size The lt xscale gt and lt yscale gt values are scale factors for the size of
359. r code representing where point is assigned first letter line is assigned second letter and plane is assigned third letter For example scan yx means the fastest point by point increment should be mapped along the Cartesian y dimension and the middle line by line increment should be mapped along the x dimension When the plotting mode is plot the qualifier code can include the two letters x and y For splot it can include the three letters x y and z There is nothing restricting the inherent mapping from point line plane to apply only to Cartesian coordi nates For this reason there are cylindrical coordinate synonyms for the qualifier codes where t theta r and z are analogous to the x y and z of Cartesian coordinates Transpose Shorthand notation for scan yx or scan yxz Dx dy dz When gnuplot generates coordinates it uses the spacing described by these keywords For example dx 10 dy 20 would mean space samples along the x dimension by 10 and space samples along the y dimension by 20 dy cannot appear if dx does not appear Similarly dz cannot appear if dy does not appear If the underlying dimensions are greater than the keywords specified the spacing of the highest dimension given is extended to the other dimensions For example if an image is being read from a file and only dx 3 5 is given gnuplot uses a delta x and delta y of 3 5 The following keywords also apply only when generating coordinates However they may
360. r splot commands Currently the default range for these parametric variables is 5 5 Setting the ranges to something more meaningful is expected Plot The show plot command shows the current plotting command as it results from the last plot and or splot and possible subsequent replot commands In addition the show plot add2history command adds this current plot command into the history It is useful if you have used replot to add more curves to the current plot and you want to edit the whole command now Pm3d pm3d is an splot style for drawing palette mapped 3d and 4d data as color gray maps and surfaces It uses an algorithm that allows plotting gridded as well as non gridded data without preprocessing even when the data scans do not have the same number of points Syntax the options can be given in any order set pm3d at lt position gt interpolate lt steps points in scan between scans gt scansautomatic scansforward scansbackward depthorder flush begin center end ftriangles noftriangles cliptin clip4in corners2color mean geomean median min max c1 c2 c3 c4 hidden3d lt linestyle gt nohidden3d implicit explicit map show pm3d unset pm3d A pm3d color surface is drawn if the splot command specifies with pm3d if the data or function style is set to pm3d globally or if the pm3d mode is set pm3d implicit In the latter two cases the pm3d surface
361. r vertical lines Default is rounded The details of font selection are complicated Two equivalent simple examples are given below set term gif font arial 11 set term gif font arial 11 For more information please see the separate section under fonts p 32 The animate option is available only if your local gd library supports the creation of animated gifs The default delay between display of successive images may be specified in units of 1 100 second default 5 The actual delay may vary depending on the program used as a viewer Number of animation loops can be specified default 0 means infinity An animation sequence is terminated by the next set output or set term command The optimize option has two effects on the animation 1 A single color map is used for the entire animation This requires that all colors used in any frame of the animation are already defined in the first frame 2 If possible only the portions of a frame that differ from the previous frame are stored in the animation file This space saving may not be possible if the animation uses transparency Both of these optimizations are intended to produce a smaller output file but the decrease in size is probably only significant for long animations or very small frame sizes The nooptimize option turns off both of the effects just described Each frame is stored in its entirety along with a private color map Note that it is possible to post process a non optimized an
362. r wingdings lt fontsize gt is the font size in points The point type selection can be the standard default set by specifying nopspoints or the same set of point types found in the postscript terminal by specifying pspoints Note that built in support of some of these options is printer device dependent For instance all the fonts are supposedly supported by the HP Laserjet IV but only a few e g univers stick may be supported by the HP Laserjet III and the Designjet 750C Also color obviously won t work on the the laserjets since they are monochrome devices Defaults landscape noextended color 6 pens solid univers 12 point and nopspoints With pcl5 international characters are handled by the printer you just put the appropriate 8 bit character codes into the text strings You don t need to bother with set encoding HPGL graphics can be imported by many software packages Apljii The hpljii terminal driver supports the HP Laserjet Series II printer The hpdj driver supports the HP DeskJet 500 printer These drivers allow a choice of resolutions Syntax set terminal hpljii hpdj lt res gt where res may be 75 100 150 or 300 dots per inch the default is 75 Rasterization at the higher resolutions may require a large amount of memory The hp500c terminal is similar to hpdj hp500c additionally supports color and compression Hppj The hppj terminal driver supports the HP PaintJet and HP3630 printers The on
363. rd and set the line colors using set linetype The deprecated mechanism accepted colors of the form xrrggbb where x is the literal character x and rrggbb are the red green and blue components in hex The first color was used for the background subsequent colors are assigned to successive line types Examples set terminal cgm landscape color rotate dashed width 432 linewidth 1 Helvetica Bold 12 defaults set terminal cgm linewidth 2 14 wider lines amp larger font set terminal cgm portrait Times Italic 12 set terminal cgm color solid no pesky dashes Cgm font The first part of a Computer Graphics Metafile the metafile description includes a font table In the picture body a font is designated by an index into this table By default this terminal generates a table with the following 35 fonts plus six more with italic replaced by oblique or vice versa since at least the Microsoft Office and Corel Draw CGM import filters treat italic and oblique as equivalent CGM fonts Helvetica Hershey Cartographic_Roman Helvetica Bold Hershey Cartographic_Greek Helvetica Oblique Hershey Simplex_Roman Helvetica Bold Oblique Hershey Simplex_Greek Times Roman Hershey Simplex_Script Times Bold Hershey Complex_Roman Times Italic Hershey Complex_Greek Times Bold Italic Hershey Complex Ttalic Courier Hershey Complex_Cyrillic Courier Bold Hershey Duplex Roman Courier Oblique Hershey Triplex_R
364. rder to move For the corners when the stack direction is vertical the left or right border is moved inward appropriately When the stack direction is horizontal the top or bottom border is moved inward appropriately The margin syntax allows automatic placement of key regardless of stack direction When one of the margins Imargin lm rmargin rm tmargin tm and bmargin bm is combined with a single non conflicting direction keyword the following illustrated positions may contain the key 1 tm c tm r tm t lm t rm c 1m c rm b 1m b rm 1 bm c bm r bm Keywords above and over are synonymous with tmargin For version compatibility above or over without an additional 1 c r or stack direction keyword uses center and horizontal Keywords below and under are synonymous with bmargin For compatibility below or under without an additional 1 c r or stack direction keyword uses center and horizontal A further compatibility issue is that outside appearing without an additional t b c or stack direction keyword uses top right and vertical i e the same as t rm above The lt position gt can be a simple x y z as in previous versions but these can be preceded by one of five keywords first second graph screen character which selects the coordinate system in which the position of the first sample line is specified See coordinates p for more details The effect of left right top bottom and center when lt position gt is given is to
365. re in your document for example all you have to do is includegraphics figure 2 LaTeX epsfbox figure 2 plainTeX The advantage if any of the mp terminal over a postscript terminal is editable output Considerable effort went into making this output as clean as possible For those knowledgeable in the Metapost language the default line types and colors can be changed by editing the arrays lt and col The choice of solid vs dashed lines and color vs black lines can be change by changing the values assigned to the booleans dashedlines and colorlines If the default tex option was in effect global changes to the text of labels can be achieved by editing the vebatimtex etex block In particular a LaTeX preamble can be added if desired and then LaTeX s built in size changing commands can be used for maximum flexibility Be sure to set the appropriate MP configuration variable to force Metapost to run LaTeX instead of plain TeX Next Several options may be set in the next driver Syntax set terminal next lt mode gt lt type gt Y lt color gt lt dashed gt lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt title lt newtitle gt where lt mode gt is default which sets all options to their defaults lt type gt is either new or old where old invokes the old single window lt color gt is either color or monochrome lt dashed gt is either solid or dashed lt fontname gt is the name of a valid PostScript font
366. ress in the active plot window If you want to wait for a particular key to be pressed you can use a reread loop such as print I will resume after you hit the Tab key in the plot window load wait_for_tab File wait_for_tab contains the lines pause mouse key if MOUSE_KEY 9 reread Plot plot is the primary command for drawing plots with gnuplot It creates plots of functions and data in many many ways plot is used to draw 2D functions and data splot draws 2D projections of 3D surfaces and data plot and splot offer many features in common see splot p for differences Note specifically that although the binary lt binary list gt variation does work for both plot and splot there are small differences between them Syntax plot lt ranges gt lt iteration gt lt function gt lt datafile gt datafile modifiers axes lt axes gt lt title spec gt with lt style gt definitions lt function gt where either a lt function gt or the name of a data file enclosed in quotes is supplied A function is a mathematical expression or a pair of mathematical expressions in parametric mode Functions may be builtin user defined or provided in the plot command itself Multiple datafiles and or functions may be plotted in a single command separated by commas See data p 78 functions p 8es Examples plot sin x plot sin x cos x plot f x sin x a a 2 f x a 4 f x plot d
367. rge and lt mode gt is monochrome gray or color The default plot size is 640 pixels wide and 480 pixels high The output size is white space padded to the nearest multiple of 8 pixels on both x and y This empty space may be cropped later if needed The output of the pbm driver depends upon lt mode gt monochrome produces a portable bitmap one bit per pixel gray a portable graymap three bits per pixel and color a portable pixmap color four bits per pixel The output of this driver can be used with various image conversion and manipulation utilities provided by NETPBM Based on Jef Poskanzer s PBMPLUS package NETPBM provides programs to convert the above PBM formats to GIF TIFF MacPaint Macintosh PICT PCX X11 bitmap and many others Complete information is available at http netpbm sourceforge net Examples set terminal pbm small monochrome defaults set terminal pbm color medium size 800 600 set output pnmrotate 45 pnmtopng gt tilted png uses NETPBM Pdf This terminal produces files in the Adobe Portable Document Format PDF useable for printing or display with tools like Acrobat Reader Syntax set terminal pdf monochrome color colour no enhanced fname lt font gt fsize lt fontsize gt font lt fontname gt lt fontsize gt fontscale lt scale gt linewidth lt lw gt rounded butt solid dashed dl lt dashlength gt size lt XxX gt unit lt YY gt unit The
368. riginal string E g str and str both describe the full string str Substitution and Command line macros When a command line to gnuplot is first read i e before it is interpreted or executed two forms of lexical substitution are performed These are triggered by the presence of text in backquotes ascii character 96 or preceded by ascii character 64 Substitution of system commands in backquotes Command line substitution is specified by a system command enclosed in backquotes This command is spawned and the output it produces replaces the backquoted text on the command line Some implementa tions also support pipes see plot datafile special filenames p 82 Command line substitution can be used anywhere on the gnuplot command line except inside strings delimited by single quotes Example This will run the program leastsq and replace leastsq including backquotes on the command line with its output f x leastsq or in VMS f x run leastsq These will generate labels with the current time and userid set label generated on date Y m d by whoami at 1 1 set timestamp generated on Y m d by whoami Substitution of string variables as macros Substitution of command line macros is disabled by default but may be enabled using the set macros command If macro substitution is enabled the character is used to trigger substitution of the current value of a string
369. rounding corners according to corners2color lt option gt The options mean default geomean and median produce various kinds of surface color smoothing while options min and max choose minimal or maximal value respectively This may not be desired for pixel images or for maps with sharp and intense peaks in which case the options cl c2 c3 or c4 can be used instead to assign the quadrangle color based on the z coordinate of only one corner Some experimentation may be needed to determine which corner corresponds to cl as the orientation depends on the drawing direction Because the pm3d algorithm does not extend the colored surface outside the range of the input data points the lt j gt coloring options will result in pixels along two edges of the grid not contributing to the color of any quadrangle For example applying the pm3d algorithm to the 4x4 grid of data points in script demo pm3d dem please have a look produces only 4 1 x 4 1 9 colored rectangles 4 columns of data x y z color If a fourth column of data is provided it is normally interpreted as a separate palette mapped gray value The coloring of individual quadrangles works as above except that the color value is distinct from the z value As a separate coloring option the fourth data column may provide instead an RGB color See rgbcolor variable p 35 In this case the plotting command must be splot
370. rpolate and uniform control if color interpolation is done while drawing triangles on by default To get high resolution modes you will probably have to modify the configuration file of libvga usually etc vga libvga conf Using the VESA fb is a good choice but this needs to be compiled in the kernel The vgagl driver uses the first available vga mode from the following list the driver which was supplied when setting vgagl e g set term vgagl G1024x768x256 would first check if the G1024x768x256 mode is available the environment variable SVGALIB_DEFAULT_MODE G1024x768x256 G800x600x256 G640x480x256 G320x200x256 G1280x1024x256 G1152x864x256 G1360x768x256 G1600x1200x256 VWs The VWS terminal driver supports the VAX Windowing System It has no options It will sense the display type monochrome gray scale or color All line styles are plotted as solid lines Vx384 The vx384 terminal driver supports the Vectrix 384 and Tandy color printers It has no options Windows The windows terminal is a fast interactive terminal driver that uses the Windows GDI to draw and write text The cross platform terminal wxt is also supported on Windows Syntax set terminal windows lt n gt color monochrome solid dashed enhanced noenhanced font lt fontspec gt fontscale lt scale gt linewdith lt scale gt background lt rgb color gt title Plot Window Title size
371. rpretation of data on the x axis An analogous command acts on each of the other axes Syntax set xdata time geographic show xdata The same syntax applies to ydata zdata x2data y2data and cbdata The time option signals that data represents a time date in seconds The current version of gnuplot stores time to a millisecond precision The geographic option signals that data represents a geographical coordinate measured in de grees minutes seconds If no option is specified the data interpretation reverts to normal Time set xdata time indicates that the x coordinate is to be interpreted as a date or time to millisecond precision See set timefmt p to tell gnuplot how to read date or time data from a file The time date is converted to seconds from start of the century There is currently only one timefmt which implies that all the time date columns must conform to this format Specification of ranges should be supplied as quoted strings according to this format to avoid interpretation of the time date as an expression By default the function strftime type man strftime on unix to look it up is used to label axis tickmarks gnuplot tries to figure out a reasonable format for this You can customize the label format using set format x See time_specifiers p for a special set of time format specifiers See also time date p for more information Geographic set xdata geographic indicates that the x coord
372. rs the following resources for setting the dash style used for plotting lines 0 means a solid line A two digit number jk j and k are gt 1 and lt 9 means a dashed line with a repeated pattern of j pixels on followed by k pixels off For example 16 is a dotted line with one pixel on followed by six pixels off More elaborate on off patterns can be specified with a four digit value For example 4441 is four on four off four on one off The default values shown below are for monochrome displays or monochrome rendering on color or grayscale displays For color displays the default for each is 0 solid line except for axisDashes which defaults to a 16 dotted line gnuplot borderDashes 0 gnuplot axisDashes 16 gnuplot linelDashes 0 gnuplot line2Dashes 42 gnuplot line3Dashes 13 gnuplot line4Dashes 44 gnuplot line5Dashes 15 gnuplot line6Dashes 4441 gnuplot line7Dashes 42 gnuplot line8Dashes 13 Cairolatex The cairolatex terminal device generates encapsulated PostScript eps or PDF output using the cairo and pango support libraries and uses LaTeX for text output using the same routines as the epslatex terminal Syntax set terminal cairolatex eps pdf standalone input blacktext colortext colourtext header lt header gt noheader mono color solid dashed no transparent no crop background lt rgbcolor gt font lt font gt fontscale lt scale gt linew
373. rt gt to lt end gt For each of these the current value of lt expression gt is added to a running total whose final value becomes the value of the summation expression Examples print sum i 1 10 i 55 Equivalent to plot data using 1 2 3 4 5 6 plot data using 1 sum col 2 MAXCOL column col It is not necessary that lt expression gt contain the variable lt var gt Although lt start gt and lt end gt can be specified as variables or expressions their value cannot be changed dynamically as a side effect of carrying out the summation If lt end gt is less than lt start gt then the value of the summation is zero Gnuplot defined variables Gnuplot maintains a number of read only variables that reflect the current internal state of the program and the most recent plot These variables begin with the prefix GPVAL_ Examples include GPVAL_TERM GPVAL_X_MIN GPVAL_X_MAX GPVAL_Y_MIN Type show variables all to display the complete list and current values Values related to axes parameters ranges log base are values used during the last plot not those currently set Example To calculate the fractional screen coordinates of the point X Y GRAPH_X X GPVAL_X_MIN GPVAL_X_MAX GPVAL_X_MIN GRAPH_Y Y GPVAL_Y_MIN GPVAL_Y_MAX GPVAL_Y_MIN SCREEN_X GPVAL_TERM_XMIN GRAPH_X GPVAL_TERM_XMAX GPVAL_TERM_XMIN SCREEN_Y GPVAL_TERM_YMIN GRAPH_Y GPVAL_TERM_YMAX GPVAL_TERM_YMIN F
374. rth colunm can be added to the specification If present the values of that column will be interpreted as the discrete levels of a factor variable As many boxplots will be drawn as there are levels in the factor variable The separation between these boxplots is 1 0 by default but it can be changed by set style boxplot separation By default the value of the factor variable is shown as a tic label below or above each boxplot Example Suppose that column 2 of data contains either control or treatment The following example produces two boxplots one for each level of the factor plot data using 1 0 5 0 2 The default width of the box can be set via set boxwidth lt width gt or may be specified as an optional 3rd column in the using clause of the plot command The first and third columns x coordinate and width are normally provided as constants rather than as data columns By default the whiskers extend from the ends of the box to the most distant point whose y value lies within 1 5 times the interquartile range By default outliers are drawn as circles point type 7 The width of the bars at the end of the whiskers may be controlled using set bars These default properties may be changed using the set style boxplot command See set style boxplot p 147 bars p 100 boxwidth p 102 fillstyle p 148 candlesticks p 46 Boxxyerrorbars s The boxxyerrorbars style is only relevant to 2D data p
375. rtically by LaTeX If the text string begins with you need to continue it with a position specification up to two out of t b Lr the text itself and finally The text itself may be anything LaTeX can typeset as an LR box rule s may help for best positioning Examples About label positioning Use gnuplot defaults mostly sensible but sometimes not really best set title LaTeX gamma Force centering both horizontally and vertically set label LaTeX gamma at 0 0 Specify own positioning top here set xlabel t LaTeX gamma The other label account for long ticlabels set ylabel r LaTeX gamma rule 7mm Opt Vgagl The vgag driver is a fast linux console driver with full mouse and pm3d support It looks at the environment variable SVGALIB_DEFAULT MODE for the default mode if not set it uses a 256 color mode with the highest available resolution Syntax set terminal vgagl background red green blue uniform interpolate mode The color mode can also be given with the mode option Both Symbolic names as G1024x768x256 and integers are allowed The background option takes either one or three integers in the range 0 255 If only one integers is supplied it is taken as gray value for the background If three integers are present the background gets the corresponding color The mutually exclusive options inte
376. s macros and command line substitution The interaction of string variables backquotes and macro substitution is somewhat complicated Backquotes do not block macro substitution so filename mydata inp lines wc lines filename sed s results in the number of lines in mydata inp being stored in the integer variable lines And double quotes do not block backquote substitution so mycomputer uname n results in the string returned by the system command uname n being stored in the string variable mycom puter However macro substitution is not performed inside double quotes so you cannot define a system command as a macro and then use both macro and backquote substitution at the same time machine_id uname n mycomputer machine_id doesn t work This fails because the double quotes prevent machine_id from being interpreted as a macro To store a system command as a macro and execute it later you must instead include the backquotes as part of the macro itself This is accomplished by defining the macro as shown below Notice that the sprintf format nests all three types of quotes machine_id sprintf uname n mycomputer machine_id Syntax Options and any accompanying parameters are separated by spaces whereas lists and coordinates are sep arated by commas Ranges are separated by colons and enclosed in brackets text and file names are enclo
377. s CO line segment at the x coordinate extends up from the top of the rectangle to the high price and another down i to the low The vertical line will be unchanged if the i low and high prices are interchanged Five columns of basic data are required financial data date open low high close whisker plot x box_min whisker_min whisker_high box_high The width of the rectangle can be controlled by the set boxwidth command For backwards compatibility with earlier gnuplot versions when the boxwidth parameter has not been set then the width of the candlestick rectangle is controlled by set bars lt width gt Alternatively an explicit width for each box and whiskers grouping may be specified in an optional 6th column of data The width must be given in the same units as the x coordinate An additional 6th or 7th if the 6th column is used for width data input column may be used to provide variable per datapoint color information see linecolor p and rgbcolor variable p 35 By default the vertical line segments have no crossbars at the top and bottom If you want crossbars which are typically used for box and whisker plots then add the keyword whiskerbars to the plot command By default these whiskerbars extend the full horizontal width of the candlestick but you can modify this by specifying a fraction of the full width The usual convention for financial data is that the rectangle is empty if open lt close and so
378. s and palettes of smooth colors are currently available for terminals listed in help for set pm3d The range of color values are adjustable independently by set cbrange and set log cb The whole color palette is visualized in the colorbox Syntax set palette set palette gray color gamma lt gamma gt rgbformulae lt r gt lt g gt lt b gt defined lt gray1 gt lt color1 gt lt grayN gt lt colorN gt file lt filename gt datafile modifiers functions lt R gt lt G gt lt B gt cubehelix start lt val gt cycles lt val gt saturation lt val gt model RGB HSV CMY YIQ XYZ gt positive negative nops_allcF ps_allcF maxcolors lt maxcolors gt show palette show palette palette lt n gt float int show palette gradient show palette fit2rgbformulae show palette rgbformulae show colornames set palette i e without options sets up the default values Otherwise the options can be given in any order show palette shows the current palette properties show palette gradient displays the gradient defining the palette if appropriate show palette rgb formulae prints the available fixed gray gt color transformation formulae show colornames prints the known color names show palette palette lt n gt prints to the screen or to the file given by set print a table of RGB triplets calculated for the current palette settings and
379. s ate he a ees he ah Bs oe a ee ee A we ok og 204 Mpio aa ta ek ge dds Ae AA A a Rk Rho ee eS 204 sg RiGee Be GaGa ie Ge Ge G Reve ee eas ee seg ange eye yes as aes Ge oe e 206 A A heeds Bes ce set ae ae ee eve ce ee ae ys aes OR Be ate E RR 206 Openstep mext a 4444444444444 Po booed errado eae eS 207 Pb seres tee ea ee haa a eh EGG ewe a ee MER Boe ee ee a eA ee Ge ee 207 Cay gt Aad he GR AUER E in BO tosh oh Dt in Bel A cen aya aw nd les Bie oh ee 208 eek Re are ee ara Boe Re aes oe ee Ee ee ey 208 mY oh A eh RE aes ae em to avd en fee fe eats ee A Se eae ee ee ees BB gs a e 209 IPTG sat a ee Ase oe ces Gag ap sees dG ewe ae Qs Gi ee ae Ae ay oe gnc as ee eons Ge we a 210 yaa ee bee ee eee aon ea a Eos 210 ee Goh Bb hed hb a Ga dee bens woe een Ohh SES ow Be oe by Ges 211 A 4 a 25h cele we aetna wae ee YE bw A RN 211 a MG bee badd Rel EA aa eos BE cido 213 so Pe geal a ee Oe a ee a eS e A 214 She RR Ee eR E Ewe eae eR ek AE x 215 Os ee a a a es OS ee ee 215 TRE AN ee ee ee 215 IPStricks a A ee ee oe oe eee A E 217 S a ooh Se he Sh Sa gto gt ee Gras Meee aN Oe Ge Be Sh ae do ete NN 217 pia adas dui wha ddd edeu taeda ta de ae ee Oey EERE ads aa 217 EE RO Ce ER Oe EES eRe Pe ee ee 218 eh ae ia Ta EDP de de A 2 Se EASES MG PEPER Raa EEG EEG 219 DV Obs tole eras a oie th th hs A Wee ee eee a a AP ee A ee ee A 219 DV Galles e wera AAA AAA 219 a Se Ae een ee a a Ge RA AA eee ee ee eas See A 219 Eee eye uae ae ei ae ee ee eae bab Se
380. s for the demo file demo binary dem Usage in plot plot a dat matrix plot a dat matrix using 1 3 plot a gpbin matrix binary using 1 3 will plot rows of the matrix while using 2 3 will plot matrix columns and using 1 2 the point coordinates rather useless Applying the every option you can specify explicit rows and columns Example rescale axes of a matrix in an ascii file splot a dat matrix using 1 1 1 2 10 3 Example plot the 3rd row of a matrix in an ascii file plot a dat matrix using 1 3 every 1 999 1 2 rows are enumerated from 0 thus 2 instead of 3 Gnuplot can read matrix binary files by use of the option binary appearing without keyword qualifications unique to general binary i e array record format or filetype Other general binary keywords for translation should also apply to matrix binary See binary general p for more details Example datafile A simple example of plotting a 3D data file is splot datafile dat where the file datafile dat might contain The valley of the Gnu 0 0 10 O 1 10 0 2 10 1 0 10 115 1 2 10 2 0 10 1 2 2 10 N m 3 0 10 0 3210 w p Note that datafile dat defines a 4 by 3 grid 4 rows of 3 points each Rows datablocks are separated by blank records Note also that the x value is held constant within each dataline If you instead keep y constant and plot with hidden line removal enable
381. s have one head Specifying heads draws arrow heads on both ends of the line Head size can be controlled by size lt length gt lt angle gt or size lt length gt lt angle gt lt backangle gt where lt length gt defines length of each branch of the arrow head and lt angle gt the angle in degrees they make with the arrow lt Length gt is in x axis units this can be changed by first second graph screen or character before the lt length gt see coordinates p for details lt Backangle gt only takes effect when filled or empty is also used Then lt backangle gt is the angle in degrees the back branches make with the arrow in the same direction as lt angle gt The fig terminal has a restricted backangle function It supports three different angles There are two thresholds Below 70 degrees the arrow head gets an indented back angle Above 110 degrees the arrow head has an acute back angle Between these thresholds the back line is straight Specifying filled produces filled arrow heads if heads are used Filling is supported on filled polygon capable terminals see help of pm3d p for their list otherwise the arrow heads are closed but not filled The same result closed but not filled arrow head is reached by specifying empty Further filling and outline is obviously not supported on terminals drawing arrows by their own specific routines like metafont metapost latex or tgif The line style may be selected from a
382. s hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation Permission to modify the software is granted but not the right to distribute the complete modified source code Modifications are to be distributed as patches to the released version Permission to distribute binaries produced by compiling modified sources is granted provided you 1 distribute the corresponding source modifications from the released version in the form of a patch file along with the binaries 2 add special version identification to distinguish your version in addition to the base release version number 3 provide your name and address as the primary contact for the support of your modified version and 4 retain our contact information in regard to use of the base software Permission to distribute the released version of the source code along with corresponding source modifications in the form of a patch file is granted with same provisions 2 through 4 for binary distributions This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty to the extent permitted by applicable law AUTHORS Original Software Thomas Williams Colin Kelley Gnuplot 2 0 additions Russell Lang Dave Kotz John Campbell Gnuplot 3 0 additions Gershon Elber and many others Gnuplot 4 0 additions See list of contributors at head of this document In
383. s is described in http www tug org fontname fontname pdf For example cmr stands for Computer Modern Roman ptm for Times Roman and phv for Helvetica The font series denotes the thickness of the glyphs in most cases m for normal medium and bx or b for bold fonts The font shape is n for upright it for italics sl for slanted or sc for small caps in general Some fonts may provide different font series or shapes Examples Use Times Roman boldface with the same shape as in the surrounding text set terminal cairolatex font ptm bx Use Helvetica boldface italics set terminal cairolatex font phv bx it Continue to use the surrounding font in slanted shape set terminal cairolatex font sl Use small capitals set terminal cairolatex font sc By this method only text fonts are changed If you also want to change the math fonts you have to use the enuplot cfg file or the header option described below In standalone mode the font size is taken from the given font size in the set terminal command To be able to use a specified font size a file size lt size gt clo has to reside in the LaTeX search path By default 10pt 11pt and 12pt are supported If the package extsizes is installed 8pt 9pt 14pt 17pt and 20pt are added The header option takes a string as argument This string is written into the generated LaTeX file If using
384. s taken from the third column if there is one or is set to unity if there is no third column The mapping is x r cos theta cos phi y r sin theta cos phi z r sin phi Note that this is a geographic spherical system rather than a polar one that is phi is measured from the equator rather than the pole For a cylindrical coordinate system the data again occupy two or three columns The first two are interpreted as theta in the units specified by set angles and z The radius is either taken from the third column or set to unity as in the spherical case The mapping is x r cos theta y r sin theta Z Z The effects of mapping can be duplicated with the using filter on the splot command but mapping may be more convenient if many data files are to be processed However even if mapping is used using may still be necessary if the data in the file are not in the required order mapping has no effect on plot world dem mapping demos Margin The margin is the distance between the plot border and the outer edge of the canvas The size of the margin is chosen automatically but can be overridden by the set margin commands show margin shows the current settings To alter the distance between the inside of the plot border and the data in the plot itself see set offsets p 133 Syntax set bmargin at screen lt margin gt set lmargin at screen lt margin gt set rmargin at screen lt
385. s the program to format all input and output in accordance with locale foo which must be installed If locale foo is not found then an error message is printed and the decimal sign setting is unchanged On linux systems you can get a list of the locales installed on your machine by typing locale a A typical linux locale string is of the form sl SI UTF 8 A typical Windows locale string is of the form Slovenian_Slovenia 1250 or slovenian Please note that interpretation of the locale settings is done by the C library at runtime Older C libraries may offer only partial support for locale settings such as the thousands grouping separator character set decimalsign locale set decimalsign This sets all input and output to use whatever decimal sign is correct for the current locale but over rides this with an explicit in numbers formatted using gnuplot s internal gprintf function Derid3d The set dgrid3d command enables and can set parameters for non grid to grid data mapping See splot grid_data p for more details about the grid data structure Syntax set dgrid3d lt rows gt lt cols gt splines qnorm lt norm gt gauss cauchy exp box hann kdensity lt dx gt lt dy gt unset dgrid3d show dgrid3d By default dgrid3d is disabled When enabled 3D data read from a file are always treated as a scattered data set A grid with dimensions derived from a bounding box of the scattered d
386. s will be adjusted to include the error bars See plot using p 84 plot with p 91 and set style p 146 for more information Functions Built in or user defined functions can be displayed by the plot and splot commands in addition to or instead of data read from a file The requested function is evaluated by sampling at regular intervals spanning the independent axis range s See set samples p 145 and set isosamples p 118 Example approx ang ang ang 3 3 2 plot sin x title sin x approx x title approximation To set a default plot style for functions see set style function p 149 For information on built in functions see expressions functions p 26 For information on defining your own functions see user defined p 31 Parametric When in parametric mode set parametric mathematical expressions must be given in pairs for plot and in triplets for splot Examples plot sin t tx x 2 splot cos u cos v cos u sin v sin u Data files are plotted as before except any preceding parametric function must be fully specified before a data file is given as a plot In other words the x parametric function sin t above and the y parametric function t 2 above must not be interrupted with any modifiers or data functions doing so will generate a syntax error stating that the parametric function is not fully specified Other modifiers such as with and title may be specified only after th
387. sGray gray50 gnuplot linelGray gray100 gnuplot line2Gray gray60 gnuplot line3Gray gray80 gnuplot line4Gray gray40 gnuplot line5SGray gray90 gnuplot line6Gray gray50 gnuplot line7Gray gray70 gnuplot line8Gray gray30 Line_resources gnuplot honors the following resources for setting the width in pixels of plot lines shown here with their default values 0 or 1 means a minimal width line of 1 pixel width A value of 2 or 3 may improve the appearance of some plots gnuplot borderWidth 2 gnuplot axisWidth 0 gnuplot linel Width gnuplot line2 Width gnuplot line3 Width gnuplot line4 Width gnuplot lined Width gnuplot line6 Width gnuplot line7 Width gnuplot line8 Width DG O GGG O O gnuplot honors the following resources for setting the dash style used for plotting lines 0 means a solid line A two digit number jk j and k are gt 1 and lt 9 means a dashed line with a repeated pattern of j pixels on followed by k pixels off For example 16 is a dotted line with one pixel on followed by six pixels off More elaborate on off patterns can be specified with a four digit value For example 4441 is four on four off four on one off The default values shown below are for monochrome displays or monochrome rendering on color or grayscale displays Color displays default to dashed off gnuplot dashed off gnuplot borderDashes 0 gnuplot axisDashes 16 gnuplot linelDashes 0 gnup
388. scaling in both 2D and 3D graphs can be adjusted using the mouse wheel lt wheel up gt scrolls up increases both YMIN and YMAX by ten percent of the Y range and increases both Y2MIN and Y2MAX likewise and lt wheel down gt scrolls down lt shift wheel up gt scrolls left decreases both XMIN and XMAX and both X2MIN and X2MAX and lt shift wheel down gt scrolls right lt control wheel up gt zooms in toward the center of the plot and lt control wheel down gt zooms out lt shift control wheel up gt zooms in along the X and X2 axes only and lt shift control wheel down gt zooms out along the X and X2 axes only X11 mouse If multiple X11 plot windows have been opened using the set term x11 lt n gt terminal option then only the current plot window supports the entire range of mouse commands and hotkeys The other windows will however continue to display mouse coordinates at the lower left Zoom Zooming is usually accomplished by holding down the left mouse button and dragging the mouse to delineate a zoom region Some platforms may require using a different mouse button The original plot can be restored by typing the w hotkey in the plot window The hotkeys p and n step back and forth through a history of zoom operations The option zoomcoordinates determines if the coordinates of the zoom box are drawn at the edges while zooming This is on by default If the option zoomjump is on the mouse pointer will be
389. sed Type help startup On Unix PAGER is used as an output filter for help messages On Unix SHELL is used for the shell command On MS DOS and OS 2 COMSPEC is used for the shell command FIT_SCRIPT may be used to specify a gnuplot command to be executed when a fit is interrupted see fit p 63 FIT_LOG specifies the default filename of the logfile maintained by fit GNUPLOT _LIB may be used to define additional search directories for data and command files The variable may contain a single directory name or a list of directories separated by a platform specific path separator eg on Unix or on DOS Windows OS 2 platforms The contents of GNUPLOT LIB are appended to the loadpath variable but not saved with the save and save set commands Several gnuplot terminal drivers access TrueType fonts via the gd library For these drivers the font search path is controlled by the environmental variable GDFONTPATH Furthermore a default font for these drivers may be set via the environmental variable GNUPLOT_DEFAULT_GDFONT The postscript terminal uses its own font search path It is controlled by the environmental vari able GNUPLOT_FONTPATH The format is the same as for GNUPLOT LIB The contents of GNU PLOT_FONTPATH are appended to the fontpath variable but not saved with the save and save set commands GNUPLOT PS DIR is used by the postscript driver to search for external prologue files Depending on the build process
390. sed in quotes and a few miscellaneous things are enclosed in parentheses Commas are used to separate coordinates on the set commands arrow key and label the list of variables being fitted the list after the via keyword on the fit command lists of discrete contours or the loop parameters which specify them on the set cntrparam command the arguments of the set commands dgrid3d dummy isosamples offsets origin samples size time and view lists of tics or the loop parameters which specify them the offsets for titles and axis labels parametric functions to be used to calculate the x y and z coordinates on the plot replot and splot commands and the complete sets of keywords specifying individual plots data sets or functions on the plot replot and splot commands Parentheses are used to delimit sets of explicit tics as opposed to loop parameters and to indicate compu tations in the using filter of the fit plot replot and splot commands Parentheses and commas are also used as usual in function notation Square brackets are used to delimit ranges given in set plot or splot commands Colons are used to separate extrema in range specifications whether they are given on set plot or splot commands and to separate entries in the using filter of the plot replot splot and fit commands Semicolons are used to separate commands given on a single command line Curly braces are used in the syntax for enhanced text mode and to deli
391. sed portion is controlled by set pointintervalbox linespoints may be abbreviated lp Points The points style displays a small symbol at each point The command set pointsize may be used to change the default size of the points 1 or 2 columns of basic input data are required in 2D plots 1 or 3 columns are required in 3D plots See style lines p 55 Additional input columns may be used to provide information such as variable point size or variable point color Polar O O with points ps variable O s Polar plots are not really a separate plot style but are listed here for completeness The option set po lar tells gnuplot to interpret input 2D coordinates as lt angle gt lt radius gt rather than lt x gt lt y gt Many but not all 2D plotting styles work in polar mode The fig ure shows a combination of plot styles lines and filled curves See set polar p 143 set rrange p 145 set size square p 145 bounding radius 25 sin kos 5 sty Steps The steps style is only relevant to 2D plotting It con nects consecutive points with two line segments the first from x1 y1 to x2 y1 and the second from x2 y1 to x2 y2 The input column requires are the same as for plot styles lines and points The difference between fsteps and steps is that fsteps traces first the change in y and then the change in x steps traces first the change in x and then the change in y
392. sed to layout the text is based on utf 8 Thus the pngcairo terminal has to convert from your encoding to utf 8 The default input encoding is based on your locale If you want to use another encoding make sure gnuplot knows which one you are using See encoding p 111 for more details Pango may give unexpected results with fonts that do not respect the unicode mapping With the Symbol font for example the pngcairo terminal will use the map provided by http www unicode org to trans late character codes to unicode Note that the Symbol font is to be understood as the Adobe Symbol font distributed with Acrobat Reader as SY_____ PFB Alternatively the OpenSymbol font distributed with OpenOffice org as opens___ ttf offers the same characters Microsoft has distributed a Symbol font symbol ttf but it has a different character set with several missing or moved mathematic characters If you experience problems with your default setup if the demo enhancedtext dem is not displayed properly for example you probably have to install one of the Adobe or OpenOffice Symbol fonts and remove the Microsoft one Other non conform fonts such as wingdings have been observed working The rendering of the plot cannot be altered yet To obtain the best output possible the rendering involves two mechanisms antialiasing and oversampling Antialiasing allows to display non horizontal and non vertical lines smoother Oversampling combined wit
393. seeds to x rand x y for integer 0 lt x y lt 2731 1 sets seed1 to x and seed2 to y Value B value A is effectively the same as B A where A is the name of a user defined variable This is useful when the name of the variable is itself held in a string variable See user defined variables p 31 It also allows you to read the name of a variable from a data file If the argument is a numerical expression value returns the value of that expression If the argument is a string that does not correspond to a currently defined variable value returns NaN Operators The operators in gnuplot are the same as the corresponding operators in the C programming language except that all operators accept integer real and complex arguments unless otherwise noted The operator exponentiation is supported as in FORTRAN Parentheses may be used to change order of evaluation Unary The following is a list of all the unary operators and their usages Unary Operators Symbol Example Explanation a unary minus a unary plus no operation a one s complement la logical negation a factorial 3 call arg column during using manipulation 2 Starred explanations indicate that the operator requires an integer argument Operator precedence is the same as in Fortran and C As in those languages parentheses may be used to change the order of operation Thus 2 2 4
394. separated by whitespace or the name of the color in quotes or X style color specifiers also in quotes You may freely mix the three types in a gradient definition but the named color red will be something strange if RGB is not selected as color space Use show colornames for a list of known color names Please note that even if written as lt r gt this might actually be the lt H gt component in HSV color space or lt X gt in CIE XYZ space or depending on the selected color model The lt gray gt values have to form an ascending sequence of real numbers the sequence will be automatically rescaled to 0 1 set palette defined without a gradient definition in braces switches to RGB color space and uses a preset full spectrum color gradient Use show palette gradient to display the gradient Examples To produce a gray palette useless but instructive use set palette model RGB set palette defined 0 black 1 white To produce a blue yellow red palette use all equivalent set palette defined 0 blue 1 yellow 2 red set palette defined 0001 1110 2100 set palette defined O 0000ff 1 ffff00 2 f0000 To produce some rainbow like palette use set palette defined 0 blue 3 green 6 yellow 10 red Full color spectrum within HSV color space set palette model HSV set palette defined 0 0 set palette defined 0 0 11 1111 10 101 1 6 0 8333 1 1 7 0 8333 0 1 Approxim
395. ser units from the ruler origin to the mouse is displayed continuously By default toggling the ruler has the key binding r The option polardistance determines if the distance between the mouse cursor and the ruler is also shown in polar coordinates distance and angle in degrees or tangent slope This corresponds to the default key binding 75 Choose the option labels to define persistent gnuplot labels using Button 2 The default is nolabels which makes Button 2 draw only a temporary label at the mouse position Labels are drawn with the current setting of mouseformat The labeloptions string is passed to the set label command The default is point pointstyle 1 which will plot a small plus at the label position Temporary labels will disappear at the next replot or mouse zoom operation Persistent labels can be removed by holding the Ctrl Key down while clicking Button 2 on the label s point The threshold for how close you must be to the label is also determined by the pointsize If the option verbose is turned on the communication commands are shown during execution This option can also be toggled by hitting 6 in the driver s window verbose is off by default Press h in the driver s window for a short summary of the mouse and key bindings This will also display user defined bindings or hotkeys which can be defined using the bind command see help for bind p 36 Note that user defined hotkeys may override the defa
396. set datafile Examples set datafile binary filetype auto set datafile binary array 512 512 format Zuchar show datafile binary list current settings Decimalsign The set decimalsign command selects a decimal sign for numbers printed into tic labels or set label strings Syntax set decimalsign lt value gt locale lt locale gt unset decimalsign show decimalsign The argument lt value gt is a string to be used in place of the usual decimal point Typical choices include the period and the comma but others may be useful too If you omit the lt value gt argument the decimal separator is not modified from the usual default which is a period Unsetting decimalsign has the same effect as omitting lt value gt Example Correct typesetting in most European countries requires set decimalsign Please note If you set an explicit string this affects only numbers that are printed using gnuplot s gprintf formatting routine include axis tics It does not affect the format expected for input data and it does not affect numbers printed with the sprintf formatting routine To change the behavior of both input and output formatting instead use the form set decimalsign locale This instructs the program to use both input and output formats in accordance with the current setting of the LC_ALL LC_NUMERIC or LANG environmental variables set decimalsign locale foo This instruct
397. set format p 113 command Xrange The set xrange command sets the horizontal range that will be displayed A similar command exists for each of the other axes as well as for the polar radius r and the parametric variables t u and v Syntax set xrange 1 lt min gt lt max gt no reverse no writeback restore show xrange where lt min gt and lt max gt terms are constants expressions or an asterisk to set autoscaling See below for full autoscaling syntax If the data are time date you must give the range as a quoted string according to the set timefmt format Any value omitted will not be changed The same syntax applies to yrange zrange x2range y2range cbrange rrange trange urange and vrange The reverse option reverses the direction of an autoscaled axis For example if the data values range from 10 to 100 it will autoscale to the equivalent of set xrange 100 10 The reverse flag has no effect if the axis is not autoscaled NB This is a change introduced in version 4 7 Autoscaling If lt min gt the same applies for correspondingly to lt max gt is an asterisk autoscaling is turned on The range in which autoscaling is being performed may be limited by a lower bound lt lb gt or an upper bound lt ub gt or both The syntax is lt lb gt lt lt lt ub gt For example O lt lt 200 sets lt lb gt 0 and lt ub gt 200 With such a setting lt min gt would
398. size lt scale gt sets the plot size to lt scale gt times lt default value gt If two arguments are given separated with the first one sets the horizontal size and the second one the vertical size Size may be given without units in which case it means relative to the default value with inches in or centimeters cm input default creates a graphic that can be included into another ConTeXt document standalone adds some lines so that the document might be compiled as is You might also want to add header in that case Use header for any additional settings definitions macros that you might want to include in a standalone graphic noheader is the default notimestamp prevents printing creation time in comments if version control is used one may prefer not to commit new version when only date changes color to make color plots is the default but monochrome doesn t do anything special yet If you have any good ideas how the behaviour should differ to suit the monochrome printers better your suggestions are welcome rounded default mitered and beveled control the shape of line joins round default butt and squared control the shape of line caps See PostScript or PDF Reference Manual for explanation For wild behaving functions and thick lines it is better to use rounded and round to prevent sharp corners in line joins Some general support for this should be added to Gnuplot so that the same options could b
399. size gt lt face gt is either the full pathname to the font file or the first part of a filename in one of the directories listed in the GDFONTPATH environmental variable That is set term png font Face will look for a font file named either lt somedirectory gt Face ttf or lt somedirectory gt Face pfa For example if GDFONTPATH contains usr local fonts ttf usr local fonts pfa then the following pairs of commands are equivalent set term png font arial set term png font usr local fonts ttf arial ttf set term png font Helvetica set term png font usr local fonts pfa Helvetica pfa To request a default font size at the same time set term png font arial 11 Both TrueType and Adobe Type 1 fonts are fully scalable and rotatable If no specific font is requested in the set term command gnuplot checks the environmental variable GNUPLOT_DEFAULT_GDFONT to see if there is a preferred default font Postscript also encapsulated postscript eps PostScript font handling is done by the printer or viewing program Gnuplot can create valid PostScript or encapsulated PostScript eps even if no fonts at all are installed on your computer Gnuplot simply refers to the font by name in the output file and assumes that the printer or viewing program will know how to find or approximate a font by that name All PostScript printers or viewers should know about the standard set of Adobe fonts Times Roman Helvetica Courier a
400. so lf is essentially the only permissible specifier A format string given by the user must contain at least one such input specifier and no more than seven of them scanf expects to see white space a blank tab t newline An or formfeed f between numbers anything else in the input stream must be explicitly skipped Note that the use of t n or f requires use of double quotes rather than single quotes Using_examples This creates a plot of the sum of the 2nd and 3rd data against the first The format string specifies comma rather than space separated columns The same result could be achieved by specifying set datafile separator plot file using 1 2 3 1f 1f 1 In this example the data are read from the file MyData using a more complicated format plot MyData using 1 41f 7 20 7 n 41 The meaning of this format is 1f ignore a number Alt read a double precision number x by default 4 20 n ignore 20 non newline characters Alt read a double precision number y by default One trick is to use the ternary operator to filter data plot file using 1 3 gt 10 2 1 0 which plots the datum in column two against that in column one provided the datum in column three exceeds ten 1 0 is undefined gnuplot quietly ignores undefined points so unsuitable points are suppressed Or you can use the pre defined variable NaN to achieve the same result
401. specified Try for example set colorbox horiz user origin 1 02 size 8 04 which will draw a horizontal gradient somewhere at the bottom of the graph border turns the border on this is the default noborder turns the border off If an positive integer argument is given after border it is used as a line style tag which is used for drawing the border e g set style line 2604 linetype 1 linewidth 4 set colorbox border 2604 will use line style 2604 a thin line with the default border color 1 for drawing the border bdefault which is the default will use the default border line style for drawing the border of the color box The axis of the color box is called cb and it is controlled by means of the usual axes commands i e set unset show with cbrange m cbtics format cb grid m cb cblabel and perhaps even cbdata no cbdtics no cbmtics set colorbox without any parameter switches the position to default unset colorbox resets the default parameters for the colorbox and switches the colorbox off See also help for set pm3d p 135 set palette p 138 x11 pm3d p 232 and set style line P 150 Colornames Gnuplot knows a limited number of color names You can use these to define the color range spanned by a pm3d palette or to assign a terminal independent color to a particular linetype or linestyle To see the list of known color names use the command show colornames p 105 Example set style line 1
402. specifies that no bounding lines are drawn Set style fill transparent Some terminals support the attribute transparent for filled areas In the case of transparent solid fill areas the density parameter is interpreted as an alpha value that is density 0 is fully transparent density 1 is fully opaque In the case of transparent pattern fill the background of the pattern is either fully transparent or fully opaque Terminal solid pattern pm3d gif no yes no jpeg yes no yes pdf yes yes yes png TrueColor index yes post no yes no svg yes no yes win yes yes yes wxt yes yes yes x11 no yes no Note that there may be additional limitations on the creation or viewing of graphs containing transparent fill areas For example the png terminal can only use transparent fill if the truecolor option is set Some pdf viewers may not correctly display the fill areas even if they are correctly described in the pdf file Ghostscript gv does not correctly display pattern fill areas even though actual PostScript printers generally have no problem Set style function The set style function command changes the default plotting style for function plots e g lines points filledcurves See plotting styles p 43 Syntax set style function lt plotting style gt show style function Set style increment Note This command has been deprecated Instead please use the newer command set linetype which redefines the linetypes themselves r
403. ssian is placed at the location of each point in the first column and the sum of all these Gaussians is plotted as a function The value in the second column is taken as weight of the Gaussian To obtain a normalized histogram this should be 1 number of points The value of the third column if supplied is taken as the bandwidth for the kernels If only two columns have been specified or if the value of the third column is zero or less gnuplot calculates the bandwidth which would be optimal if the input data was normally distributed This will usually be a very conservative i e broad bandwidth Special filenames There are a few filenames that have a special meaning and s The empty filename tells gnuplot to re use the previous input file in the same plot command So to plot two columns from the same input file plot filename using 1 2 using 1 3 The special filenames and are a mechanism to allow the full range of using specifiers and plot styles with in line functions Normally a function plot can only have a single y or z value associated with each sampled point The pseudo file treats the sampled points as column 1 and allows additional column values to be specified via a using specification just as for a true input file The number of samples returned is controlled by set samples Example plot using 1 sin 1 sin 1 2 wi
404. st row of input data contains the y coordinates the first column of input data contains the x coordinates For binary input data the first element of the first row must contain the number of data columns This number is ignored for ascii input Both the coordinates and the data values in a binary input are treated as single precision floats Example commands for plotting non uniform matrix data splot file nonuniform matrix using 1 2 3 ascii input splot file binary matrix using 1 2 3 binary input Thus the data organization for non uniform matrix input is lt N 1 gt lt y0 gt lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt yN gt lt x0 gt lt z0 0 gt lt z0 1 gt lt z0 2 gt lt z0 N gt lt x1 gt lt z1 0 gt lt z1 1 gt lt z1 2 gt lt z1 N gt which is then converted into triplets lt x0 gt lt y0 gt lt z0 0 gt lt x0 gt lt y1 gt lt z0 1 gt lt x0 gt lt y2 gt lt z0 2 gt lt x0 gt lt yN gt lt z0 N gt lt x1 gt lt y0 gt lt z1 0 gt lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt z1 1 gt These triplets are then converted into gnuplot iso curves and then gnuplot proceeds in the usual manner to do the rest of the plotting A collection of matrix and vector manipulation routines in C is provided in binary c The routine to write binary data is int fwrite_matrix file m nrl nrl ncl nch row_title column_title An example of using these routines is provided in the file bf_test c which generates binary file
405. t lt font gt is the base name of the font e g Times or Symbol lt size gt is the point size defaults to 12 if not specified if if lt slant gt italic o if lt slant gt oblique lt weight gt is medium or bold if explicitly requested otherwise lt s gt is r otherwise lt encoding gt is set based on the current character set see set encoding ing default encoding The lt size gt lt slant gt and lt weight gt specifications are all optional If you do not specify lt slant gt or lt weight gt then you will get whatever font variant the font server offers first You may set a default enconding via the corresponding X11 resource E g gnuplot encoding iso8859 15 The driver also recognizes some common PostScript font names and replaces them with possible X11 or TrueType equivalents This same sequence is used to process font requests from set label If your gnuplot was built with configuration option enable x11 mbfonts you can specify multi byte fonts by using the prefix mbfont on the font name An additional font may be given separated by a semicolon Since multi byte font encodings are interpreted according to the locale setting you must make sure that the environmental variable LC_CTYPE is set to some appropriate locale value such as ja_JP eucJP ko KR EUC or zh_CN EUC Example set term x11 font mbfont kanal4 k14 kanai4 and k14 are Japa
406. t noevents does not process mouse and key events persist plot windows survive after main gnuplot program exits The options are shown above in their command line syntax When entered as resources in Xdefaults they require a different syntax Example gnuplot gray on gnuplot ctrlq on gnuplot also provides a command line option pointsize lt v gt and a resource gnuplot pointsize lt v gt to control the size of points plotted with the points plotting style The value v is a real number greater than 0 and less than or equal to ten used as a scaling factor for point sizes For example pointsize 2 uses points twice the default size and pointsize 0 5 uses points half the normal size The noevents switch disables all mouse and key event processing except for q and lt space gt for closing the window This is useful for programs which use the x11 driver independent of the gnuplot main program The ctrlq switch changes the hot key that closes a plot window from q to lt ctrl gt q This is useful is you are using the keystroke capture feature pause mouse keystroke since it allows the character q to be captured just as all other alphanumeric characters The ctrlq switch similarly replaces the lt space gt hot key with lt ctrl gt lt space gt for the same reason Monochrome_options For monochrome displays gnuplot does not honor foreground or background colors The default is black on white rv or gnupl
407. t is equivalent to the previous hp7550 terminal and the selection set terminal hpgl 4 is equivalent to the previous hp7580b terminal The pcl5 driver supports plotters such as the Hewlett Packard Designjet 750C the Hewlett Packard Laserjet III and the Hewlett Packard Laserjet IV It actually uses HPGL 2 but there is a name conflict among the terminal devices It has several options which must be specified in the order indicated below Syntax set terminal pcl5 mode lt mode gt lt plotsize gt color lt number_of_pens gt monochrome solid dashed font lt font gt size lt fontsize gt pspoints nopspoints lt mode gt is landscape or portrait lt plotsize gt is the physical plotting size of the plot which is one of the following letter for standard 8 1 2 X 11 displays legal for 8 1 2 X 14 displays noextended for 36 X 48 displays a letter size ratio or extended for 36 X 55 displays almost a legal size ratio color is for multi pen i e color plots and lt number_of_pens gt is the number of pens i e colors used in color plots monochrome is for one e g black pen plots solid draws all lines as solid lines or dashed will draw lines with different dashed and dotted line patterns lt font gt is stick univers cg_times zapf_dingbats antique_olive arial courier garamond_antigua letter_gothic cg_omega albertus times_new_roman clarendon coronet marigold truetype_symbols o
408. t solid dashed dashlength lt d1 gt standalone mousing name lt funcname gt jsdir URL for javascripts title lt some string gt where lt xsize gt and lt ysize gt set the size of the plot area in pixels The default size in standalone mode is 600 by 400 pixels The default font size is 10 NB Only one font is available the ascii portion of Hershey simplex Roman provided in the file canvastext js You can replace this with the file canvasmath js which contains also UTF 8 encoded Hershey simplex Greek and math symbols For consistency with other terminals it is also possible to use font name size Currently the font name is ignored but browser support for named fonts is likely to arrive eventually The default standalone mode creates an html page containing javascript code that renders the plot using the HTML 5 canvas element The html page links to two required javascript files canvastext js and gnu plot_common js An additional file gnuplot_dashedlines js is needed to support dashed lines By default these point to local files on unix like systems usually in directory usr local share gnuplot lt version gt js See installation notes for other platforms You can change this by using the jsdir option to specify either a different local directory or a general URL The latter is usually appropriate if the plot is exported for viewing on remote client machines All plots produced by the
409. t extension pfa Type 1 fonts in binary file format extension pfb and TrueType fonts extension ttf Pfa files are understood directly pfb and ttf files are converted on the fly if appropriate conversion tools are installed see below You have to specify the full filename including the extension Each fontfile option takes exact one font file name This option can be used multiple times in order to include more than one font file The font file is searched in the working directory and in all directories listed in the fontpath which is determined by set fontpath In addition the fontpath can be set using the environment variable GNU PLOT_FONTPATH If this is not set a system dependent default search list is used See set fontpath p 112 for more details For using the encapsulated font file you have to specify the font name which normally is not the same as the file name When embedding a font file by using the fontfile option in interactive mode the font name is printed on the screen E g Font file p0520041 pfb contains the font URWPalladioL Bold Location usr 1ib X11 fonts URW p0520041 pfb When using pfa or pfb fonts you can also find it out by looking into the font file There is a line similar to FontName URWPalladioL Bold def The middle string without the slash is the fontname here URWPalladioL Bold For TrueType fonts this is not so easy since the font name is stored in a binary format In additi
410. t Ge ees ee et ee a ee coche age os De A 186 Ceana aa aaa A A 187 Dumb occiso a Aa aa adaa eee EE a a a de aa a 187 MORE ss a gee E RRA 187 A 187 ota dll REE a ete te OO ee ey AA AER A A ee tee e 187 E GE A A ER AN a 188 E A A deeds We Gd ae I ee OS iS ee bie 189 a are a 189 apa so reo eee y 189 A nese ss 192 EXCH eae oop eee ae eek a ba th 8 gue a eee ae Pe ae ey Yee bead bbe pad 193 IPTG at cowie a BG Re Te ee AAA ee A ee e 193 a ie Oe Pee A a a OG ias ae en OO Ge SG 194 cdot ai env eh SF Rea NAAA ee eee ee a ee 195 SE ada a ae o48 4b 6 5o88 EA TEE esas 195 LEAR eee et tes Seas A gD AA arse arenas ea ata eae es 196 PE ASS ice eye wee ot a at ee wh eat AN ee ee ee 196 A A nee oe 197 pu Bw gle ata A Oe wa Ee ee ER RARE AA eee E a 197 BR Bd hgh ee ths cal eaten in le eth BO Gk ae de a ey nn ee 197 DO ta wha dy y my ae RO e o O SOR eas ah wy 1 197 Se SENG ea at al GG tee ee A A Ge A aOR Meier ee eS a A 198 DA AA RR BAT Aa ERA Oe Ae oe ae be 198 WAAC CD Le gece gerd aR Rais a arn a Hd GL Rp a ot ADA eee ae Be a Ga ew aS 198 Sie oy te a Se he Ms e RI eC ls alt Sp ho als ses ag eee A ee ap ck ee ate Ok a a 198 ee Gee Boe de Gy AAA o A A E RA AA See amp 2 199 Beet bbGG EE EEADSAGN See Ewe ee eS EPL RGSS ERO EE Sa eA A DS 199 PSG SIGs a oe Oe ee ey ee RR i e E 200 alg aa a eee ed www CAIDA ee Sd AA US ie OO ee 200 14 CONTENTS AA a ia Gok Oe ye ce e a e A oe ean a eae Ga T 202 a See ek AD ee eee eye eee Uo a ee hh 203 Mito
411. t does not provide any fonts of its own It relies on external font handling the details of which unfortunately vary from one terminal type to another Brief documentation of font mechanisms that apply to more than one terminal type is given here For information on font use by other individual terminals see the documentation for that terminal Cairo pdfcairo pngcairo epscairo wxt terminals Sorry this section is under construction These terminals find and access fonts using the external fontconfig tool set Please see the fontconfig user manual It is usually sufficient in gnuplot to request a font by a generic name and size letting fontconfig substitute a similar font if necessary The following will probably all work set term pdfcairo font sans 12 set term pdfcairo font Times 12 set term pdfcairo font Times New Roman 12 Gd png gif jpeg terminals Font handling for the png gif and jpeg terminals is done by the external library libgd Five basic fonts are provided directly by libgd These are tiny 5x8 pixels small 6x12 pixels medium 7x13 Bold large 8x16 or giant 9x15 pixels These fonts cannot be scaled or rotated Use one of these keywords instead of the font keyword E g set term png tiny On most systems libgd also provides access to Adobe Type 1 fonts pfa and TrueType fonts ttf You must give the name of the font file not the name of the font inside it in the form lt face gt lt point
412. t fontshape or fontseries are requested they can be omitted Thus the real syntax for the fontname is fontnamel fontseries fontshape The naming convention for all parts is given by the LaTeX font scheme The fontname is 3 to 4 characters long and is built as follows One character for the font vendor two characters for the name of the font and optionally one additional character for special fonts e g j for fonts with old style numerals or x for expert fonts The names of many fonts is described in http www tug org fontname fontname pdf For example cmr stands for Computer Modern Roman ptm for Times Roman and phv for Helvetica The font series denotes the thickness of the glyphs in most cases m for normal medium and bx or b for bold fonts The font shape is n for upright it for italics sl for slanted or sc for small caps in general Some fonts may provide different font series or shapes Examples Use Times Roman boldface with the same shape as in the surrounding text set terminal epslatex ptm bx Use Helvetica boldface italics set terminal epslatex phv bx it Continue to use the surrounding font in slanted shape set terminal epslatex sl Use small capitals set terminal epslatex sc By this method only text fonts are changed If you also want to change the math fonts you have to use the e
413. t is nointerlace The linewidth and dashlength options are scaling factors that affect all lines drawn i e they are multiplied by values requested in various drawing commands butt instructs the driver to use a line drawing method that does not overshoot the desired end point of a line This setting is only applicable for line widths greater than 1 This setting is most useful when drawing horizontal or vertical lines Default is rounded The details of font selection are complicated Two equivalent simple examples are given below set term jpeg font arial 11 set term jpeg font arial 11 For more information please see the separate section under fonts p 32 The output plot size lt x y gt is given in pixels it defaults to 640x480 Please see additional information under canvas p and set size p 145 Blank space at the edges of the finished plot may be trimmed using the crop option resulting in a smaller final image size Default is nocrop The background color must be given in the form xrrggbb where x is the literal character x and rrggbb are the red green and blue components in hexadecimal For example x00ff00 is green The specification of additional colors other than the background is deprecated Kyo The kyo and prescribe terminal drivers support the Kyocera laser printer The only difference between the two is that kyo uses Helvetica whereas prescribe uses Courier There are no options L
414. t line This has been replaced by allowing a multi line clause to be enclosed in curly brackets The old syntax is still honored by itself but cannot be used inside a bracketed clause If no opening follows the if keyword the command s in lt command line gt will be executed if lt condition gt is true non zero or skipped if lt condition gt is false zero Either case will consume com mands on the input line until the end of the line or an occurrence of else Note that use of to allow multiple commands on the same line will not end the conditionalized commands Examples pi 3 if pi acos 1 print Fixing pi pi acos 1 print pi will display Fixing pi 3 14159265358979 but if 1 2 print Never see this print Or this either will not display anything else v 0 v v 1 if v 2 print 2 else if v 3 print 3 else print fred repeat the last line repeatedly See reread p for an example of using if and reread together to perform a loop Iteration The plot splot set and unset commands may optionally contain an iteration clause This has the effect of executing the basic command multiple times each time re evaluating any expressions that make use of the iteration control variable Iteration of arbitrary command sequences can be requested using the do command Two forms of iteration clause are currently supported for intvar start end increment for stringvar in A B C D Examples
415. t linetype 1 lc rgb dark violet lw 2 pt 0 set linetype 2 lc rgb sea green lw 2 pt 7 set linetype 3 lc rgb cyan lw 2 pt 6 pi 1 set linetype 4 lc rgb dark red lw 2 pt 5 pi 1 set linetype 5 lc rgb blue lw 2 pt 8 set linetype 6 lc rgb dark orange lw 2 pt 3 set linetype 7 lc rgb black lw 2 pt 11 set linetype 8 lc rgb goldenrod lw 2 set linetype cycle 8 Every time you run gnuplot the line types will be initialized to these values You may initialize as many linetypes as you like If you do not redefine say linetype 3 then it will continue to have the default properties in this case blue pt 3 lw 1 etc The first few lines of the example script insure that the commands will be skipped by older versions of gnuplot Similar script files can be used to define theme based color choices or sets of colors optimized for a particular plot type or output device The command set linetype cycle 8 tells gnuplot to re use these definitions for the color and linewidth of higher numbered linetypes That is linetypes 9 16 17 24 and so on will use this same sequence of colors and widths The point properties pointtype pointsize pointinterval are not affected by this command unset linetype cycle disables this feature If the line properties of a higher numbered linetype are explicitly defined this takes precedence over the recycled low number linetype properties Lmargin The command set Imargin sets the size of the left margin P
416. t of the data For a list of the supported file types type show datafile binary filetypes If no file type is given the rule is that traditional gnuplot binary is assumed for splot if the binary keyword stands alone In all other circumstances for plot or when one of the lt binary list gt keywords appears a raw binary file is assumed 5 whereby the keywords specify the binary format General binary data files fall into two basic classes and some files may be of both classes depending upon how they are treated There is that class for which uniform sampling is assumed and point coordinates must be generated This is the class for which full control via the lt binary list gt keywords applies For this class the settings precedence is that command line parameters override in file parameters which override default settings The other class is that set of files for which coordinate information is contained within the file or there is possibly a non uniform sampling such as gnuplot binary Other than for the unique data files such as gnuplot binary one should think of binary data as conceptually the same as ASCII data Each point has columns of information which are selected via the lt using list gt associated with using When no format string is specified gnuplot will retrieve a number of binary variables equal to the largest column given in the lt using list gt For example using 1 3 will result in three columns being read of which
417. t with p for more information Syntax set key fonloff default inside outside lmargin rmargin tmargin bmargin fat lt position gt left right center top bottom center vertical horizontal Left Right no opaque no reverse no invert samplen lt sample_length gt spacing lt vertical_spacing gt width lt width_increment gt height lt height_increment gt no autotitle columnheader title lt text gt no enhanced font lt face gt lt size gt textcolor lt colorspec gt no box linestyle ls lt line_style gt linetype 1t lt line_type gt linewidth lw lt line_width gt maxcols lt max no of columns gt auto maxrows lt max no of rows gt auto unset key show key The key contains a title and a sample line point box for each plot in the graph The key may be turned off by requesting set key off or unset key Individual key entries may be turned off by using the notitle keyword in the corresponding plot command Elements within the key are stacked according to vertical or horizontal In the case of vertical the key occupies as few columns as possible That is elements are aligned in a column until running out of vertical space at which point a new column is started The vertical space may be limited using maxrows In the case of horizontal the key occupies as few rows as possible The horizontal space may be limited using
418. tant If you type replot click the replot icon in the terminal toolbar or type a new plot command the new plot will completely fit in the window and the font size and the linewidths will be reset to their defaults The active plot window the one selected by set term qt lt n gt is interactive Its behaviour is shared with other terminal types See mouse p 127 for details It also has some extra icons which are supposed to be self explanatory This terminal supports an enhanced text mode which allows font and other formatting commands sub scripts superscripts etc to be embedded in labels and other text strings The enhanced text mode syntax is shared with other gnuplot terminal types See enhanced p for more details lt font gt is in the format FontFace FontSize i e the face and the size comma separated in a single string FontFace is a usual font face name such as Arial If you do not provide FontFace the qt terminal will use Sans FontSize is the font size in points If you do not provide it the qt terminal will use a size of 9 points For example set term qt font Arial 12 set term qt font Arial to change the font face only set term qt font 12 to change the font size only set term qt font to reset the font name and size The Qt rendering speed is affected strongly by the rendering mode used In Qt version 4 7 or newer this can be controlled by the environmental variable QT_GRAPHICSSYSTEM The op
419. tart values to the first point or block and the end values to the last point or block If every is not specified all points in all lines are plotted Examples every 3 3 selects just the fourth block 0 is first every iiO selects the first 10 blocks every 2 2 selects every other point in every other block every 5 15 selects points 5 through 15 in each block See simple plot demos simple dem Non parametric splot demos and Parametric splot demos so Example datafile This example plots the data in the file population dat and a theoretical curve pop x 103x exp 1965 x 10 set xrange 1960 1990 plot population dat pop x The file population dat might contain Gnu population in Antarctica since 1965 1965 103 1970 55 1975 34 1980 24 1985 10 Binary examples Selects two float values second one implicit with a float value discarded between them for an indefinite length of 1D data plot lt file_name gt binary format float float using 1 2 with lines The data file header contains all details necessary for creating coordinates from an EDF file plot lt file_name gt binary filetype edf with image plot lt file_name gt edf binary filetype auto with image Selects three unsigned characters for components of a raw RGB image and flips the y dimension so that typical image orientation start at top left corner translates to the Cartesian
420. th a space character for maximum portability If a directory name ends with an exclamation mark also the subdirectories of this directory are searched for font files If the environmental variable GNUPLOT_FONTPATH is set its contents are appended to fontpath If it is not set a system dependent default value is used It is set by testing several directories for existence when using the fontpath the first time Thus the first call of set fontpath show fontpath save fontpath plot or splot with embedded font files takes a little more time If you want to save this time you may set the environmental variable GNUPLOT_FONTPATH since probing is switched off then You can find out which is the default fontpath by using show fontpath show fontpath prints the contents of the user defined fontpath and the system fontpath separately How ever the save and save set commands save only the user specified parts of fontpath For terminal drivers that access fonts by filename via the gd library the font search path is controlled by the environmental variable GDFONTPATH Format The format of the tic mark labels can be set with the set format command or with the set tics format or individual set axis tics format commands Syntax set format lt axes gt lt format string gt set format lt axes gt lt format string gt show format where lt axes gt is either x y xy x2 y2 z cb or nothing which appl
421. th filledcurves Similarly the pseudo file returns 2 columns of data forming a regular grid of x y coordinates with the number of points along x controlled by set samples and the number of points along y controlled by set isosamples You must set xrange and yrange before plotting Examples splot using 1 2 sin 1 sin 2 with pm3d plot using 1 2 sin 1 sin 2 with image The special filename specifies that the data are inline i e they follow the command Only the data follow the command plot options like filters titles and line styles remain on the plot command line This is similar to lt lt in unix shell script and DECK in VMS DCL The data are entered as though they are being read from a file one data point per record The letter e at the start of the first column terminates data entry The using option can be applied to these data using it to filter them through a function might make sense but selecting columns probably doesn t is intended for situations where it is useful to have data and commands together e g when gnuplot is run as a sub process of some front end application Some of the demos for example might use this feature While plot options such as index and every are recognized their use forces you to enter data that won t be used For example while plot index 0 index 1 2 4 6 does indeed work plot 2 4 6 e 1
422. the axes and urange and vrange govern the parametric variables In polar mode rrange determines the radial range plotted lt rmin gt acts as an additive constant to the radius whereas lt rmax gt acts as a clip to the radius no point with radius greater than lt rmax gt will be plotted xrange and yrange are affected the ranges can be set as if the graph was of r t rmin with rmin added to all the labels Any range may be partially or totally autoscaled although it may not make sense to autoscale a parametric variable unless it is plotted with data Ranges may also be specified on the plot command line A range given on the plot line will be used for that single plot command a range given by a set command will be used for all subsequent plots that do not specify their own ranges The same holds true for splot Examples To set the xrange to the default set xrange 10 10 To set the yrange to increase downwards set yrange 10 10 To change zmax to 10 without affecting zmin which may still be autoscaled set zrange 10 To autoscale xmin while leaving xmax unchanged set xrange To autoscale xmin but keeping xmin positive set xrange 0 lt To autoscale x but keep minimum range of 10 to 50 actual might be larger set xrange lt 10 50 lt Autoscaling but limit maximum xrange to 1000 to 1000 i e autoscaling within 1000 1000 set xrange 1000 lt lt 1000 Make sure xmin is so
423. the grid lines through the hidden line removal machinery instead These options actually affect not only the grid but also the lines output by set border and the various ticmarks see set xtics p 162 Z grid lines are drawn on the bottom of the plot This looks better if a partial box is drawn around the plot see set border p 100 Hidden3d The set hidden3d command enables hidden line removal for surface plotting see splot p 169 Some optional features of the underlying algorithm can also be controlled using this command Syntax set hidden3d defaults front back foffset lt offset gt nooffset trianglepattern lt bitpattern gt undefined lt level gt noundefined no altdiagonal nuplot 4 7 117 gnuplot 4 7 no bentover unset hidden3d show hidden3d In contrast to the usual display in gnuplot hidden line removal actually treats the given function or data grids as real surfaces that can t be seen through so plot elements behind the surface will be hidden by it For this to work the surface needs to have grid structure see splot datafile p about this and it has to be drawn with lines or with linespoints When hidden3d is set both the hidden portion of the surface and possibly its contours drawn on the base see set contour p 105 as well as the grid will be hidden Each surface has its hidden parts removed with respect to itself and to other surfaces if mor
424. the minimum or maximum of that axis If no keyword is given all axes are autoscaled A keyword with fixmin fixmax or fix appended tells gnuplot to disable extension of the axis range to the next tic mark position for autoscaled axes using equidistant tics set autoscale fix sets this for all axes Command set autoscale keepfix autoscales all axes while keeping the fix settings o set autoscale noextend is a synonym for set autoscale fix When autoscaling the axis range is automatically computed and the dependent axis y for a plot and z for splot is scaled to include the range of the function or data being plotted If autoscaling of the dependent axis y or z is not set the current y or z range is used Autoscaling the independent variables x for plot and x y for splot is a request to set the domain to match any data file being plotted If there are no data files autoscaling an independent variable has no effect In other words in the absence of a data file functions alone do not affect the x range or the y range if plotting z f x y Please see set xrange p 160 for additional information about ranges The behavior of autoscaling remains consistent in parametric mode see set parametric p 134 How ever there are more dependent variables and hence more control over x y and z axis scales In parametric mode the independent or dummy variable is t for plots and u v for splots autoscale in parametric mode then
425. the page The command set view equal xyz additionally sets the z axis scale to match the x and y axes however there is no guarantee that the current z axis range will fit within the plot boundary By default all three axes are scaled independently to fill the available area See also set xyplane p 165 Vrange The set urange and set vrange commands set the parametric ranges used to compute x y and z values when in splot parametric mode Please see set xrange p 160 for details X2data The set x2data command sets data on the x2 top axis to timeseries dates times Please see set xdata p 158 X2dtics The set x2dtics command changes tics on the x2 top axis to days of the week Please see set xdtics p 159 for details X2label The set x2label command sets the label for the x2 top axis Please see set xlabel p 159 X2mtics The set x2mtics command changes tics on the x2 top axis to months of the year Please see set xmtics p for details X2range The set x2range command sets the horizontal range that will be displayed on the x2 top axis Please see set xrange p 160 for details X2tics The set x2tics command controls major labeled tics on the x2 top axis Please see set xtics p 162 for details X2zeroaxis The set x2zeroaxis command draws a line at the origin of the x2 top axis y2 0 For details please see set zeroaxis p 167 Xdata This command controls inte
426. ther in red the default for linetype 1 and a third in gold Example set term postscript dashed color plot foo 1t 3 baz lt 3 linecolor 1 bar 1t 3 lc rgb gold Colorspec Many commands allow you to specify a linetype with an explicit color Terminal independent color choice is only possible for terminals that support RGB color or pm3d palettes Syntax linecolor 1c lt colorspec gt lt n gt textcolor tc lt colorspec gt linetype lt lt n gt where lt colorspec gt has one of the following forms rgbcolor colorname rgbcolor RRGGBB rgbcolor variable color is read from input file palette frac lt val gt lt val gt runs from O to 1 palette cb lt value gt lt val gt lies within cbrange palette z variable color index is read from input file 5 The lt n gt is the linetype number the color of which is used see test p 174 colorname refers to one of the color names built in to gnuplot For a list of the available names see show colornames p RRGGBB is a hexadecimal constant preceded by the symbol The RRGGBB represents the red green and blue components of the color each on a scale from 0 255 For example magenta full scale red full scale blue would be represented by FF00FF which is the hexadecimal representation of 255 lt lt 16 0 lt lt 8 255 The color palette is a linear gradient of colors that smoot
427. therwise all data points are weighted equally with a weight of one Note that if you don t specify a using option at all no z standard deviations are read from the datafile even if it does have a third column so you ll always get unit weights To fit a function with two independent variables z f x y the required format is using with four items x y z s The complete format must be given no default columns are assumed for a missing token Weights for each data point are evaluated from s as above If error estimates are not available a constant value can be specified as a constant expression see plot datafile using p 84 e g using 1 2 3 1 The fit function may have up to five independent variables There must be two more using qualifiers than there are independent variables unless there is only one variable The allowed formats and the default dummy variable names are as follows gt Mw Mm MM OM N lt lt lt lt NN at t tN QD S Zz U Zz S uU v Z S The dummy variable names may be changed with ranges as noted above The first range corresponds to the first using spec etc A range may also be given for z the dependent variable but that name cannot be changed Multiple datasets may be simultaneously fit with functions of one independent variable by making y a pseudo variable e g the dataline number and fitting as two independent variables See fit multi branch p 68 The via quali
428. tions Several new smoothing kernels have been added to dgrid3d for use with splot See smooth p dgrid3d p 109 New time date handling Gnuplot now tracks time to millisecond precision Time formats have been modified to match this The new built in function time returns the current time of day according to the system clock Example print the current time to msec precision print strftime H M 3S d b 4Y time 0 0 18 15 04 253 16 Apr 2011 Statistical summary of data The new stats command reads data from a file using the same syntax as the plot or splot commands Rather than drawing a graph it prints out a statistical summary of the data contained in the column s requested The resulting statistics min max mean standard deviation correlation etc are also stored in named variables that can be used to compose or modify subsequent plotting commands See stats p 173 Gnuplot version 4 0 deprecated certain syntax used in earlier versions but continued to recognize it This is now under the control of a configuration option and can be enabled as follows configure enable backwards compatibility Notice Deprecated syntax items may be removed entirely in some future version of gnuplot One major difference is the introduction of keywords to disambiguate complex commands particularly commands containing string variables A notable issue was the use of bare numbers to specify offsets line and point types Illustra
429. tions are native raster or opengl in order of increasing rendering speed For earlier versions of Qt the terminal defaults to raster To obtain the best output possible the rendering involves three mechanisms antialiasing oversampling and hinting Oversampling combined with antialiasing provides subpixel accuracy so that gnuplot can draw a line from non integer coordinates This avoids wobbling effects on diagonal lines plot x for example Hinting avoids the blur on horizontal and vertical lines caused by oversampling The terminal will snap these lines to integer coordinates so that a one pixel wide line will actually be drawn on one and only one pixel By default the window is raised to the top of your desktop when a plot is drawn This can be controlled with the keyword raise The keyword persist will prevent gnuplot from exiting before you explicitely close all the plot windows Finally by default the key lt space gt raises the gnuplot console window and q closes the plot window The keyword ctrl allows you to replace those bindings by lt ctrl gt lt space gt and lt ctrl gt q respectively The gnuplot outboard driver gnuplot_qt is searched in a default place chosen when the program is compiled You can override that by defining the environment variable GNUPLOT_DRIVER DIR to point to a different location Regis The regis terminal device generates output in the REGIS graphics language It has the o
430. tive examples Deprecated a set title Old 0 1 set data linespoints plot 1 24 horizontal line at y 1 New TITLE New set title TITLE offset char 0 char 1 set style data linespoints plot 1 linetype 2 pointtype 4 Batch Interactive Operation Gnuplot may be executed in either batch or interactive modes and the two may even be mixed together on many systems Any command line arguments are assumed to be either program options first character is or names of files containing gnuplot commands The option e command may be used to force execution of a gnuplot command Each file or command string will be executed in the order specified The special filename is indicates that commands are to be read from stdin Gnuplot exits after the last file is processed If no load files and no command strings are specified gnuplot accepts interactive input from stdin Both the exit and quit commands terminate the current command file and load the next one until all have been processed Examples To launch an interactive session gnuplot To launch a batch session using two command files inputl and input2 gnuplot inputi input2 To launch an interactive session after an initialization file header and followed by another command file trailer gnuplot header trailer To give gnuplot commands directly in the command line using the persist option so that the plot remains on the screen afterwards
431. tly than those enclosed in single quotes The major difference is that backslashes may need to be doubled when in double quoted strings Examples these are hard to describe in words try them set xlabel Time 10 6 Symbol m s set title Symbol 18 113620_4 9 6 0 12 x Helvetica e Symbol m 2 2 d Symbol my The file ps_guide ps in the docs psdoc subdirectory of the gnuplot source distribution contains more examples of the enhanced syntax 25 Environment A number of shell environment variables are understood by gnuplot None of these are required but may be useful If GNUTERM is defined it is used as the name of the terminal type to be used This overrides any terminal type sensed by gnuplot on start up but is itself overridden by the gnuplot or equivalent start up file see startup p 39 and of course by later explicit changes GNUHELP may be defined to be the pathname of the HELP file gnuplot gih On VMS the logical name GNUPLOT HELP should be defined as the name of the help library for gnuplot The gnuplot help can be put inside any system help library allowing access to help from both within and outside gnuplot if desired On Unix HOME is used as the name of a directory to search for a gnuplot file if none is found in the current directory On MS DOS Windows and OS 2 GNUPLOT is used On Windows the NT specific variable USERPROFILE is also tried VMS SYS LOGIN is u
432. to put the comment character in the first column of the text lines Pseudocolumns Expressions in the using clause of a plot statement can refer to additional bookkeeping values in addition to the actual data values contained in the input file These are contained in pseudo columns column 0 The sequential order of each point within a data set The counter starts at 0 and is reset by two sequential blank records The shorthand form 0 is available column 1 This counter starts at 0 and is reset by a single blank line This corresponds to the data line in array or grid data column 2 The index number of the current data set within a file that contains multiple data sets See index Xticlabels Axis tick labels can be generated via a string function usually taking a data column as an argument The simplest form uses the data column itself as a string That is xticlabels N is shorthand for xticlabels stringcolumn N This example uses the contents of column 3 as x axis tick labels plot datafile using lt xcol gt lt ycol gt xticlabels 3 with lt plotstyle gt Axis tick labels may be generated for any of the plot axes x x2 y y2 z The ticlabels lt labelcol gt specifiers must come after all of the data coordinate specifiers in the using portion of the command For each data point which has a valid set of X Y Z coordinates the string value given to xticlabels is added to the list of xtic labels at the same X coordinat
433. tors filled head lw 2 set clip one and set clip two affect vectors drawn in 2D Please see set clip p 103 and arrowstyle p L46 Xerrorbars The xerrorbars style is only relevant to 2D data plots xerrorbars is like points except that a horizontal er ror bar is also drawn At each point x y a line is drawn from xlow y to xhigh y or from x xdelta y to x xdelta y depending on how many data columns are provided A tic mark is placed at the ends of the error A bar unless set bars is used see set bars p L00 for ove Hu details The basic style requires either 3 or 4 columns a HH With errotari 42 3 columns x y xdelta 4 columns x y xlow xhigh An additional input column 4th or 5th may be used to provide information such as variable point color Xyerrorbars The xyerrorbars style is only relevant to 2D data plots xyerrorbars is like points except that horizontal and vertical error bars are also drawn At each point x y lines are drawn from x y ydelta to x y ydelta and from x xdelta y to x xdelta y or from x ylow to Foy f ft mithocyerrorbars HA x yhigh and from xlow y to xhigh y depending upon the number of data columns provided A tic mark is placed at the ends of the error bar unless set bars is used see set bars p for details Either 4 or 6 input columns are required EN F 4 columns x y xdelta ydelta 6 columns x y xlow xhig
434. tour levels For auto lt n gt specifies a nominal number of levels the actual number will be adjusted to give simple labels If the surface is bounded by zmin and zmax contours will be generated at integer multiples of dz between zmin and zmax where dz is 1 2 or 5 times some power of ten like the step between two tic marks For levels discrete contours will be generated at z lt zl gt lt z2 gt as specified the number of discrete levels sets the number of contour levels In discrete mode any set cntrparam levels lt n gt are ignored For incremental contours are generated at values of z beginning at lt start gt and increasing by lt increment gt until the number of contours is reached lt end gt is used to determine the number of contour levels which will be changed by any subsequent set cntrparam levels lt n gt If the z axis is logarithmic lt increment gt will be interpreted as a factor just like in set ztics If the command set cntrparam is given without any arguments specified the defaults are used linear 5 points order 4 5 auto levels Examples set cntrparam bspline set cntrparam points 7 set cntrparam order 10 To select levels automatically 5 if the level increment criteria are met set cntrparam levels auto 5 To specify discrete levels at 1 37 and 9 set cntrparam levels discrete 1 1 exp 1 9 To specify levels from O to 4 with increment 1 set cntrparam levels incremental 0
435. treaming between applications It consists of 2 longs xwidth ywidth followed by a stream of pixels each with four bytes of information alpha red green blue Edf edf is one of the automatically recognized binary file types for images EDF stands for ESRF Data Format and it supports both edf and ehf formats the latter means ESRF Header Format More information on specifications can be found at http www edfplus info specs Png If gnuplot was configured to use the libgd library for png gif jpeg output then it can also be used to read these same image types as binary files You can use an explicit command plot file png binary filetype png Or the file type will be recognized automatically from the extension if you have previously requested set datafile binary filetype auto Keywords The following keywords apply only when generating coordinates from binary data files That is the control mapping the individual elements of a binary array matrix or image to specific x y z positions n Scan A great deal of confusion can arise concerning the relationship between how gnuplot scans a binary file and the dimensions seen on the plot To lessen the confusion conceptually think of gnuplot always scanning the binary file point line plane or fast medium slow Then this keyword is used to tell gnuplot how to map this scanning convention to the Cartesian convention shown in plots i e x y z The qualifier for scan is a two or three lette
436. troduction Gnuplot is a portable command line driven graphing utility for Linux OS 2 MS Windows OSX VMS and many other platforms The source code is copyrighted but freely distributed i e you don t have to pay for it It was originally created to allow scientists and students to visualize mathematical functions and data interactively but has grown to support many non interactive uses such as web scripting It is also used as a plotting engine by third party applications like Octave Gnuplot has been supported and under active development since 1986 Gnuplot supports many types of plots in either 2D and 3D It can draw using lines points boxes contours vector fields surfaces and various associated text It also supports various specialized plot types Gnuplot supports many different types of output interactive screen terminals with mouse and hotkey input direct output to pen plotters or modern printers and output to many file formats eps emf fig jpeg 17 LaTeX pdf png postscript Gnuplot is easily extensible to include new output modes Recent additions include interactive terminals based on wxWidgets usable on multiple platforms and Qt Mouseable plots embedded in web pages can be generated using the svg or HTML5 canvas terminal drivers The command language of gnuplot is case sensitive i e commands and function names written in lowercase are not the same as those written in capitals All command names
437. ts are to be determined by linear interpolation between data points or function isosamples Second it controls the way contours are drawn between the points determined to be of equal z lt n gt should be an integral constant expression and lt zl gt lt z2 gt any constant expressions The parameters are linear cubicspline bspline Controls type of approximation or interpolation If linear then straight line segments connect points of equal z magnitude If cubicspline then piecewise linear contours are interpolated between the same equal z points to form somewhat smoother contours but which may undulate If bspline a guaranteed smoother curve is drawn which only approximates the position of the points of equal z points Eventually all drawings are done with piecewise linear strokes This number controls the number of line segments used to approximate the bspline or cubicspline curve Number of cubicspline or bspline segments strokes points number of linear segments order Order of the bspline approximation to be used The bigger this order is the smoother the resulting contour Of course higher order bspline curves will move further away from the original piecewise linear data This option is relevant for bspline mode only Allowed values are integers in the range from 2 linear to 10 levels Selection of contour levels controlled by auto default discrete incremental and lt n gt number of con
438. ts may be used cm mm in or inch pt pe bp dd cc Blanks between numbers and units are not allowed monochrome disables line coloring and switches to grayscaled fills solid use only solid lines originreset moves the origin of the TikZ picture to the lower left corner of the plot It may be used to align several plots within one tikzpicture environment This is not tested with multiplots and pm3d plots gparrows use gnuplot s internal arrow drawing function instead of the ones provided by TikZ eppoints use gnuplot s internal plotmark drawing function instead of the ones provided by TikZ nopicenvironment omits the declaration of the tikzpicture environment in order to set it manually This permits putting some PGF TikZ code directly before or after the plot clip crops the plot at the defined canvas size Default is noclip by which only a minimum bounding box of the canvas size is set Neither a fixed bounding box nor a crop box is set if the plotsize or tightboundingbox option is used If tightboundingbox is set the clip option is ignored and the final bounding box is the natural bounding box calculated by tikz background sets the background color to the value specified in the lt colorpec gt argument lt colorspec gt must be a valid color name or a 3 byte RGB code as a hexadecimal number with a preceding number sign CH E g
439. tt is the default butt caps and mitered joins clip tells PostScript to clip all output to the bounding box noclip is the default palfuncparam controls how set palette functions are encoded as gradients in the output Analytic color component functions set via set palette functions are encoded as linear interpolated gradients in the postscript output The color component functions are sampled at lt samples gt points and all points are removed from this gradient which can be removed without changing the resulting colors by more than lt maxdeviation gt For almost every useful palette you may safely leave the defaults of lt samples gt 2000 and lt maxdeviation gt 0 003 untouched The default size for postscript output is 10 inches x 7 inches The default for eps output is 5 x 3 5 inches The size option changes this to whatever the user requests By default the X and Y sizes are taken to be in inches but other units are possibly currently only cm The BoundingBox of the plot is correctly adjusted to contain the resized image Screen coordinates always run from 0 0 to 1 0 along the full length of the plot edges as specified by the size option NB this is a change from the previously recommended method of using the set size command prior to setting the terminal type The old method left the BoundingBox unchanged and screen coordinates did not correspond to the actual limits of the plot if rotate is specified the y axis label is rotated lt
440. ua tikz As decribed above it uses the generic lua terminal and an external lua script to produce a latex document The context terminal driver creates output to be further processed by the ConTeXt TeX macro package To process its output you additionally require the gnuplot module for ConTeXt available at http ctan org pkg context gnuplot The epscairo terminal uses the cairo and pango libraries to create encapsulated postscript eps ouput It is an alternative to the postscript terminal driver for those who would like to have their eps files look equal to e g screen output by the wxt terminal The cairolatex terminal uses the cairo backend of the pdfcairo or epscairo terminal to produce graphs for inclusion in LaTeX documents It creates pdf or eps graphics but transfers texts to LaTeX in the same way as the epslatex terminal The windows terminal driver has been revised to suport transparency antialiasing buffered output multiple graph windows and copying to clipboard and saving of graphs as emf files It has many new options and a revised user interface Additionaly the code of the text console has been largely rewritten to support wrapping of long lines Help is now provided via HTML Backwards compatibility New smoothing algorithms New smoothing algorithms have been added for both 2 and 3 dimensional plots smooth kdensity and smooth cumulative can be used with plot to draw smooth histograms and cumulative distribution func
441. ual to 1 5 times the interquartile range i e the vertical height of the box proper Each whisker is truncated back toward the median so that it terminates at a y value belonging to some point in the data set Since there may be no point whose value is exactly 1 5 times the interquartile distance the whisker may be shorter than its nominal range This default corresponds to set style boxplot range 1 5 Alternatively you can specify the fraction of the total number of points that the whiskers should span In this case the range is extended symmetrically from the median value until it encompasses the requested fraction of the data set Here again each whisker is constrained to end at a point in the data set To span 95 of the points in the set set style boxplot fraction 0 95 Any points that lie outside the range of the whiskers are considered outliers By default these are drawn as individual circles pointtype 7 The option nooutliers disables this By default boxplots are drawn in a style similar to candlesticks but you have the option of using instead a style similar to finance bars If the using specification for a boxplot contains a fourth column the values in that column will be interpreted as the discrete leveles of a factor variable In this case more than one boxplots may be drawn as many as the number of levels of the factor variable These boxplots will be drawn next to each other the distance between them is 1 0 by default in x a
442. uals changes between two iteration steps by a factor less than this number epsilon the fit is considered to have converged The maximum number of iterations may be limited by declaring a value for FIT_MAXITER A value of 0 or not defining it at all means that there is no limit If you need even more control about the algorithm and know the Marquardt Levenberg algorithm well there are some more variables to influence it The startup value of lambda is normally calculated automatically from the ML matrix but if you want to you may provide your own one with FIT_START_LAMBDA Specifying FIT START_LAMBDA as zero or less will re enable the automatic selection The variable FIT_LAMBDA_FACTOR gives the factor by which lambda is increased or decreased whenever the chi squared target function in creased or decreased significantly Setting FIT_LAMBDA_FACTOR to zero re enables the default factor of 10 0 Other variables with the FIT_ prefix may be added to fit so it is safer not to use that prefix for user defined variables The variables FIT_SKIP and FIT_INDEX were used by earlier releases of gnuplot with a fit patch called gnufit and are no longer available The datafile every modifier provides the functionality of FIT_SKIP FIT_INDEX was used for multi branch fitting but multi branch fitting of one independent variable is now done as a pseudo 3D fit in which the second independent variable and using are used to specify the branch
443. ult bindings See also help for bind p and label p 122 Doubleclick The doubleclick resolution is given in milliseconds and used for Button 1 which copies the current mouse position to the clipboard The default value is 300 ms Setting the value to 0 ms triggers the copy on a single click Mouseformat The set mouse format command specifies a format string for sprintf which determines how the mouse cursor x y coordinates are printed to the plot window and to the clipboard The default is g set mouse clipboardformat and set mouse mouseformat are used for formatting the text on Buttonl and Button2 actions copying the coordinates to the clipboard and temporarily annotating the mouse position An integer argument selects one of the format options in the table below A string argument is used as a format for sprintf in option 6 and should contain two float specifiers Example set mouse mouseformat mouse x y 5 2g 10 3f Use set mouse mouseformat to turn this string off again The following formats are available O default same as 1 1 axis coordinates 1 23 2 45 2 graph coordinates from 0 to 1 0 00 1 00 3 x timefmt y axis as set by set timefmt 2 45 4 x date y axis 31 12 1999 2 45 5 x time y axis 23 59 2 45 6 x date time y axis 31 12 1999 23 59 2 45 7 format from set mouse mouseformat e g mouse x y 1 23 2 450 Scrolling X and Y axis
444. upport for locale features such as thousands grouping separator depend on the internationalization support provided by your individual machine Part VI Index Index gnuplot 3D abs acos 26 acosh acsplines adobeglyphnames 215 aed512 aed767 aifm airy all angles Aqua aqua 176 arg ALTOW arrowstyle asin asinh atan atan2 26 atanh automated 5 autoscale 89 EN 98 background backquotes bars batch interactive BE be r besjl bessel besy0 besy1 2 bezier bgnd 19 35 binary 74 76 bind bitwise operators bmargin border boxerrorbars 43 102 boxes boxplot 19 148 boxwidth 47 102 boxxyerrorbars branch bugs sts ara cairolatex 179 call 6 61 71 candlesticks 45 fA at 148 canvas a 195 199 cbdata cbdtics cblabel 1 cbmtics 168 ER canse B7 B3 15 35 5015 cbtics cd 61 ceil center 54 cgi 182 cgm 182 circle 47 etl circles cab 0319908 129 clear clip Ba 103 cnormal cntrparara 88 03 108 5 172 color resources lorbox 35 105 135 137 168 lomen colors B3 4 pA 140 151 clospe 2 5 column 7 84 columnhead 18 27 84 columnheader command line editing command line options 22 command line editing 94 command line options 37 commands 61 comments E 22 71 commentschars 22 22
445. ur locale If you want to use another encoding make sure gnuplot knows which one you are using See encoding p 111 for more details Pango may give unexpected results with fonts that do not respect the unicode mapping With the Symbol font for example the wxt terminal will use the map provided by http www unicode org to translate character codes to unicode Pango will do its best to find a font containing this character looking for your Symbol font or other fonts with a broad unicode coverage like the DejaVu fonts Note that the Symbol font is to be understood as the Adobe Symbol font distributed with Acrobat Reader as SY______ PFB Alternatively the OpenSymbol font distributed with OpenOffice org as opens___ ttf offers the same char acters Microsoft has distributed a Symbol font symbol ttf but it has a different character set with several missing or moved mathematic characters If you experience problems with your default setup if the demo enhancedtext dem is not displayed properly for example you probably have to install one of the Adobe or OpenOffice Symbol fonts and remove the Microsoft one Other non conform fonts such as wingdings have been observed working The rendering of the plot can be altered with a dialog available from the toolbar To obtain the best output possible the rendering involves three mechanisms antialiasing oversampling and hinting Antialiasing allows to display non horizontal and non
446. urface itself or projected onto the XY plane See set contour p LO5 ED surface with projected contour at a 2D projection set view map a An important special case of the splot command is to map the Z coordinate onto a 2D surface by projecting contours RS set wiew 27 the plot along the Z axis See set view map p 157 SS This plot mode can be used to generate contour plots SE Ya Part III d Commands This section lists the commands acceptable to gnuplot in alphabetical order Printed versions of this document contain all commands the text available interactively may not be complete Indeed on some systems there may be no commands at all listed under this heading Note that in most cases unambiguous abbreviations for command names and their options are permissible e p f x w li instead of plot f x with lines In the syntax descriptions braces denote optional arguments and a vertical bar separates mutually exclusive choices Cd The cd command changes the working directory Syntax cd lt directory name gt The directory name must be enclosed in quotes Examples cd subdir cd N It is recommended that Windows users use single quotes because backslash has special significance inside double quotes and has to be escaped For example cd c newdata fails but cd c newdata
447. user defined list of line styles see set style line p 150 or may be defined here by providing values for lt line_type gt an index from the default list of styles and or lt line_width gt which is a multiplier for the default width Note however that if a user defined line style has been selected its properties type and width cannot be altered merely by issuing another set style arrow command with the appropriate index and lt or lw If front is given the arrows are written on top of the graphed data If back is given the default the arrow is written underneath the graphed data Using front will prevent a arrow from being obscured by dense data Examples To draw an arrow without an arrow head and double width use set style arrow 1 nohead lw 2 set arrow arrowstyle 1 See also set arrow p for further examples Boxplot The set style boxplot command allows you to change the layout of plots created using the boxplot plot style Syntax set style boxplot range lt r gt fraction lt f gt no outliers pointtype lt p gt candlesticks financebars separation lt x gt labels off auto x x2 sorted unsorted The box in the boxplot always spans the range of values from the first quartile to the third quartile of the data points The limit of the whiskers that extend from the box can be controlled in two different ways By default the whiskers extend from each end of the box for a range eq
448. vailable topics The new gnuplot user should begin by reading about plotting if in an interactive session type help plotting See the simple dem demo also available together with other demos on the web page http www gnuplot info demo Gnuplot can be started from a command line or from an icon according to the desktop environment Running it from command line can take the syntax gnuplot OPTIONS file1 file2 where filel file2 etc are input file as in the load command On X11 based systems you can use gnuplot X110PTIONS OPTIONS filet file2 see your X11 documentation and x11 p 227 in this document Options interpreted by gnuplot may come anywhere on the line Files are executed in the order specified as are commands supplied by the e option for example gnuplot filel in e reset file2 in The special filename is used to force reading from stdin Gnuplot exits after the last file is processed If no load files are named Gnuplot takes interactive input from stdin See help batch interactive p for more details The options specific to gnuplot can be listed by typing gnuplot help See command line options p for more details In sessions with an interactive plot window you can hit h anywhere on the plot for help about hotkeys and mousing features Section seeking assistance will help you to find further information help and FAQ Seeking assistance The canonical gnuplot web page can be
449. variable into the command line The text in the string variable may contain any number of lexical elements This allows string variables to be used as command line macros Only string constants may be expanded using this mechanism not string valued expressions For example set macros stylel lines 1t 4 lw 2 style2 points 1t 3 pt 5 ps 2 rangel using 1 3 range2 using 1 5 plot foo Crangel with stylei bar range2 with style2 The line containing symbols is expanded on input so that by the time it is executed the effect is identical to having typed in full plot foo using 1 3 with lines 1t 4 lw 2 bar using 1 5 with points 1t 3 pt 5 ps 2 The function exists may be useful in connection with macro evaluation The following example checks that C can safely be expanded as the name of a user defined variable C pi if exists C print C OC Macro expansion does not occur inside either single or double quotes However macro expansion does occur inside backquotes Macro expansion is handled as the very first thing the interpreter does when looking at a new line of commands and is only done once Therefore code like the following will execute correctly A c 1 A but this line will not since the macro is defined on the same line and will not be expanded in time A c 1 CA will not expand to c 1 For execution of complete commands the evaluate command may also be handy a String variable
450. vertical lines smoother Oversampling combined with antialiasing provides subpixel accuracy so that gnuplot can draw a line from non integer coordinates This avoids wobbling effects on diagonal lines plot x for example Hinting avoids the blur on horizontal and vertical lines caused by oversampling The terminal will snap these lines to integer coordinates so that a one pixel wide line will actually be drawn on one and only one pixel By default the window is raised to the top of your desktop when a plot is drawn This can be controlled with the keyword raise The keyword persist will prevent gnuplot from exiting before you explicitely close all the plot windows Finally by default the key lt space gt raises the gnuplot console window and q closes the plot window The keyword ctrl allows you to replace those bindings by lt ctrl gt lt space gt and lt ctrl gt q respectively These three keywords raise persist and ctrl can also be set and remembered between sessions through the configuration dialog X11 Syntax set terminal x11 lt n gt window lt string gt title lt string gt no enhanced font lt fontspec gt linewidth LW solid dashed no persist no raise no ctrlq close size XX YY position XX YY set terminal xii reset Multiple plot windows are supported set terminal x11 lt n gt directs the output to plot window number n If n is not 0 the terminal number w
451. virmf amp plain mode CanonCX mag 1 input myfigures mf In this case the output files will be named myfigures tfm and myfigures 300gf Generate a PK file from the GF file using gftopk gftopk myfigures 300gf myfigures 300pk The name of the output file for gftopk depends on the DVI driver you use Ask your local TeX administrator about the naming conventions Next either install the TFM and PK files in the appropriate directories or set your environment variables properly Usually this involves setting TEXFONTS to include the current directory and doing the same thing for the environment variable that your DVI driver uses no standard name here This step is necessary so that TeX will find the font metric file and your DVI driver will find the PK file To include your pictures in your document you have to tell TeX the font font gnufigs myfigures Each picture you made is stored in a single character The first picture is character 0 the second is character 1 and so on After doing the above step you can use the pictures just like any other characters Therefore to place pictures 1 and 2 centered in your document all you have to do is centerline gnufigs char0 centerline gnufigs char1 in plain TeX For LaTeX you can of course use the picture environment and place the picture wherever you wish by using the makebox and put macros This conversion saves you a lot of time once you have generated th
452. w xhigh x y xdelta ydelta or x y xlow xhigh ylow yhigh The x coordinate must be specified The order of the numbers must be exactly as given above though the using qualifier can manipulate the order and provide values for missing columns For example plot file with errorbars plot file using 1 2 sqrt 1 with xerrorbars plot file using 1 2 1 3 1 3 4 5 with xyerrorbars The last example is for a file containing an unsupported combination of relative x and absolute y errors The using entry generates absolute x min and max from the relative error The y error bar is a vertical line plotted from x ylow to x yhigh If ydelta is specified instead of ylow and yhigh ylow y ydelta and yhigh y ydelta are derived If there are only two numbers on the record yhigh and ylow are both set to y The x error bar is a horizontal line computed in the same fashion To get lines plotted between the data points plot the data file twice once with errorbars and once with lines but remember to use the notitle option on one to avoid two entries in the key Alternately use the errorlines command see errorlines p 87 The error bars have crossbars at each end unless set bars is used see set bars p for details If autoscaling is on the ranges will be adjusted to include the error bars See also See plot using p 84 plot with p 91 and set style p for more information Errorlines
453. with X Y coordinates taken from columns 3 and 4 of the input datafile However rather than generating regularly spaced tics along the x axis labeled numerically gnuplot will position a tic mark along the x axis at the X coordinate of each point and label the tic mark with text taken from column 1 of the input datafile set xtics plot datafile using 3 4 xticlabels 1 with linespoints There is also an option that will interpret the first entry in a column of input data i e the column heading as a text field and use it as the key title for data plotted from that column The example given below will use the first entry in column 2 to generate a title in the key box while processing the remainder of columns 2 and 4 to draw the required line plot datafile using 1 2 4 with lines title columnhead 2 Another example plot for i 2 6 datafile using i title Results for columnhead i See set style labels p 55 using xticlabels p 86 plot title p 90 using p 84 7 Enhanced text mode Many terminal types support an enhanced text mode in which additional formatting information is embedded in the text string For example x 2 will write x squared as we are used to seeing it with a superscript 2 This mode is normally selected when you set the terminal e g set term png enhanced but may also be toggled afterward using set termoption enhanced or by marking individual strings as in set
454. wo out of t b Lr the text itself and finally The text itself may be anything LaTeX can typeset as an LR box rule s may help for best positioning The options not described here are identical to the Postscript terminal Look there if you want to know what they do Examples set term pslatex monochrome dashed rotate set to defaults To write the PostScript commands into the file foo ps set term pslatex auxfile set output foo tex plot set output About label positioning Use gnuplot defaults mostly sensible but sometimes not really best set title LaTeX gamma Force centering both horizontally and vertically set label LaTeX gamma at 0 0 Specify own positioning top here set xlabel t LaTeX gamma The other label account for long ticlabels set ylabel r LaTeX gamma rule 7mm Opt Linewidths and pointsizes may be changed with set style line Pstricks The pstricks driver is intended for use with the pstricks sty macro package for LaTeX It is an alterna tive to the eepic and latex drivers You need pstricks sty and of course a printer that understands PostScript or a converter such as Ghostscript PSTricks is available via anonymous ftp from the pub directory at Princeton edu This driver definitely does not come close to using the full capability of the PSTricks package Syntax set terminal pstric
455. xis units This distance can be changed by the option separation The labels option governs how and where these boxplots each representing a part of the dataset are labeled By default the value of the factor is put as a tick label on the horizontal axis x or x2 depending on which one is used for the plot itself This setting corresponds to option labels auto The labels can be forced to use either of the x or x2 axes options labels x and labels x2 respectively or they can be turned off altogether with the option labels off By default the boxplots corresponding to different levels of the factor variable are not sorted they will be drawn in the same order the levels are encountered in the data file This behavior corresponds to the unsorted option If the sorted option is active the levels are first sorted alphabetically and the boxplots are drawn in the sorted order The separation labels sorted and unsorted option only have an effect if a fourth column is given the plot specification See boxplot p 45 candlesticks p 46 financebars p 49 Set style data The set style data command changes the default plotting style for data plots Syntax set style data lt plotting style gt show style data See plotting styles p for the choices If no choice is given the choices are listed show style data shows the current default data plotting style Set style fill The set style fill command is used to set the
456. y cause one branch to predominate if there is a difference in the scale of the dependent variable Fitting each branch separately using the multi branch solution as initial values may give an indication as to the relative effect of each branch on the joint solution so Starting values Nonlinear fitting is not guaranteed to converge to the global optimum the solution with the smallest sum of squared residuals SSR and can get stuck at a local minimum The routine has no way to determine that it is up to you to judge whether this has happened fit may and often will get lost if started far from a solution where SSR is large and changing slowly as the parameters are varied or it may reach a numerically unstable region e g too large a number causing a floating point overflow which results in an undefined value message or gnuplot halting To improve the chances of finding the global optimum you should set the starting values at least roughly in the vicinity of the solution e g within an order of magnitude if possible The closer your starting values are to the solution the less chance of stopping at another minimum One way to find starting values is to plot data and the fitting function on the same graph and change parameter values and replot until reasonable similarity is reached The same plot is also useful to check whether the fit stopped at a minimum with a poor fit Of course a reasonably good fit is not proof there
457. yhigh In all cases the numbers of each record of a data file must be separated by white space one or more blanks or tabs unless a format specifier is provided by the using option This white space divides each record into columns However whitespace inside a pair of double quotes is ignored when counting columns so the following datafile line has three columns 1 0 second column 3 0 Data may be written in exponential format with the exponent preceded by the letter e or E The fortran exponential specifiers d D q and Q may also be used if the command set datafile fortran is in effect Only one column the y value need be provided If x is omitted gnuplot provides integer values starting at 0 In datafiles blank records records with no characters other than blanks and a newline and or carriage return are significant Single blank records designate discontinuities in a plot no line will join points separated by a blank records if they are plotted with a line style 5 Two blank records in a row indicate a break between separate data sets See index p 80 If autoscaling has been enabled set autoscale the axes are automatically extended to include all data points with a whole number of tic marks if tics are being drawn This has two consequences i For splot the corner of the surface may not coincide with the corner of the base In this case no vertical line is drawn ii When plotting data with the same x ra
458. yle rectangle front back lw linewidth lt lw gt fillcolor lt colorspec gt fs lt fillstyle gt See colorspec p and fillstyle p 148 fillcolor may be abbreviated as fc Examples set style rectangle back fc rgb white fs solid 1 0 border 1t 1 set style rectangle fc linsestyle 3 fs pattern 2 noborder The default values correspond to solid fill with the background color and a black border Set style ellipse Syntax set style ellipse units xx xylyy size graph screen lt a gt graph screen lt b gt angle lt angle gt This command governs whether the diameters of ellipses are interpreted in the same units or not Default is xy which means that the major diameter first axis of ellipses will be interpreted in the same units as the x or x2 axis while the minor second diameter in those of the y or y2 axis In this mode the ratio of the ellipse axes depends on the scales of the plot axes and aspect ratio of the plot When set to xx or yy both axes of all ellipses will be interpreted in the same units This means that the ratio of the axes of the plotted ellipses will be correct even after rotation but either their vertical or horizontal extent will not be correct This is a global setting that affects all ellipses both those defined as objects and those generated with the plot command however the value of units can also be redefined on a per plot and per object basis It is also possible to set a
459. ze at the point of inclusion is taken so use LaTeX commands for changing fonts If you use e g 12pt as font size for your LaTeX document use 12 as options The font name is ignored If using standalone the given font and font size are used see below for a detailed description If text is printed coloured is controlled by the TeX booleans ifGPcolor and ifGPblacktext Only if VifGPcolor is true and ifGPblacktext is false text is printed coloured You may either change them in the generated TeX file or provide them globally in your TeX file for example by using newif ifGPblacktext GPblacktexttrue in the preamble of your document The local assignment is only done if no global value is given When using the epslatex terminal give the name of the TeX file in the set output command including the file extension normally tex The eps filename is generated by replacing the extension by eps If using the standalone mode a complete LaTeX header is added to the LaTeX file and inc is added to the filename of the eps file The standalone mode generates a TeX file that produces output with the correct size when using dvips pdfTeX or VTeX The default input generates a file that has to be included into a LaTeX document using the input command If a font other than or default is given it is interpreted as LaTeX font name It contains up to three parts separated by a comma fontname fontseries fontshape If the defaul

manual - mpsge

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents